Unisab II 0178 445 ENG Logo 1

UNISAB II 2.
03
Compressor type:
Shop no:
Refrigerant:
Password:
Software version:
0178_425_en.fm
03.09
Instruction Manual
UNISAB II Control
Computerized Control System
for refrigerating compressors
Version 2.03
0178-445 - ENG
Rev. 03.09
1/222
UNISAB II 2.03
Preface
This instruction manual covers reciprocating as
well as screw compressors, unless otherwise stated. This manual offers a detailed description of
the UNISAB II control system including function,
application, service and trouble shooting.
This document is produced by:

YORK Refrigeration
Chr. Xs Vej 201
DK-8270 Hoejbjerg
Denmark
Copyright 2003 YORK Refrigeration
In the space below you can enter the name and address of your local YORK representative:
This document must not be copied without the

written permission of YORK Refrigeration and the
contents must not be imparted to a third party nor
be used for any unauthorised purpose. Contravention will be prosecuted.
This manual is intended for operating and service
personnel.
Please read this manual carefully so that you fully
understand the UNISAB II control system and
know how to operate it correctly. Damage occurring as a result of incorrect operation is not covered by YORK Refrigerations guarantee.
2/222
Be aware of the version number of this manual.

The version number is printed at the bottom of the
preceeding page. It is important that this number
is identical to the UNISAB II version number appearing for a few seconds in the second line of the
display when turning on power. It is, however,
possible to use a manual with higher version
number than UNISAB II. In such cases use the
section List of Versions to view the differences.
Never use a manual with lower version number
than UNISAB II.
0178-445 - ENG
Rev. 03.09
UNISAB II 2.03
WWarning!
If it is necessary to service UNISAB II control system, the power supply to the compressor motor must
be switched off at the main switch to prevent the compressor from starting up accidentally.
The UNISAB II box contains live parts, which makes it absolutely necessary to comply with the safety
regulations on site.
Failure to do so may cause damage to equipment and affect personal safety. Even though the power
supply to UNISAB II is switched off, some of the terminals may still be live.
Only authorized personnel is permitted to service UNISAB II. If UNISAB II is connected on a network,
always be aware that the compressor can be started from REMOTE. This cannot be avoided solely
by making choices on the UNISAB II display.
0178_425_en.fm
Emergency stop
Activate the emergency stop by a light pressure and deactivate it by turning it clockwise. The emergency stop cuts right into the power circuit of the compressor motor guard. Activation of the emergency
stop during operation will lead to immediate unloading of the motor guard while there is still power on
UNISAB II. In this way it will always be possible to read the state of the compressor.
Whenever the emergency stop is activated during operation, the alarm text COMPR. MOTOR ERROR
will be read on the display. Before compressor restart is possible, deactivate the alarm by means of
the R key and release the emergency stop. PLEASE OBSERVE: If UNISAB II is set on REMOTE or
AUTO, the compressor will restart automatically.
Technical Data
Power supply:
Nominal VAC
Tolerance
Hz
24
+10/-15%
45 - 65
115
+10/-15%
45 - 65
230
+10/-15%
45 - 65
Consumption:
50 VA
Ambient temperature:
0-55 C (during operation)
Humidity:
Tightness:
20-90% relative humidity (not condensing)
0178-445 - ENG
Rev. 03.09
IP 54
3/222
UNISAB II 2.03
4/222
0178-445 - ENG
Rev. 03.09
UNISAB II 2.03
0178-445TOC.fm
Table of Contents
Preface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Emergency stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2
3
Table of Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Description of UNISAB II control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Operating UNISAB II control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Start-up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Front panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Menu structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Selecting a picture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Display in Bar or C/R . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
The user's own picture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Changing of set values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Application of password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Changing of password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Resetting of password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Procedure for changing of set values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Changing a value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Changing a function, example 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Changing a function, example 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Factory settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Languages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Contrast (display) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Languages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11
12
12
13
14
15
19
20
20
22
22
22
22
23
23
23
24
24
25
25
25
26
Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SETUP I CONFIG I CONTROL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SETUP I CONFIG I COMPRESSOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SETUP I CONFIG I OIL SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SETUP I CONFIG I ECONOMIZER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SETUP I CONFIG I MOTOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SETUP I CONFIG I MULTISAB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SETUP I CONFIG I COP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SETUP I CONFIG I COMMUNICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SETUP I CONFIG I MEASURING UNIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SETUP I CONFIG I UNIT/PLANT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SETUP I CONFIG I FACTORY RESET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
27
28
28
28
28
28
28
28
28
28
28
29
Alarms and Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Analog alarms and warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Suction gas superheat, alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Auxiliary input signal (4-20 mA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Other alarms and warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Oil system error (screw compressors) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
47
47
54
55
55
55
0178-445 - ENG
Rev. 03.09
5/222
UNISAB II 2.03
Capacity error (screw compressors) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

PMS error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
No starting permission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Compressor motor error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Compressor motor overload . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Discharge pressure, overload . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
High motor temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Oil pump error (screw compressors) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Oil pump error (SAB 80) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Full flow pump error (screw compressors) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cooling fan error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Oil rectifier error (screw compressors) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Wrong starting number in sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Error in diagnosis - EEPROM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Limiting suction pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Limiting discharge pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Limiting brine temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Limiting hot water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Limiting discharge temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
No communication to Chiller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Chiller, alarm from Chiller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Watch the oil pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Vi position error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Evolution, alarm from PLC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Evolution, warning from PLC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Evolution, no communication to PLC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Low lubricating pressure monitoring (screw compressor) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
55
55
55
55
56
56
56
56
56
56
56
57
57
57
57
57
57
57
57
57
57
57
57
58
58
58
58
Timers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1. TIMERS - I . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.TIMER SETUP - I . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3. SERVICE COUNTER - I . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4. DATE - TIME - I . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5. OIL CHARGING - I (screw compressor) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6. MOTOR FAN I (Frequency controlled screw compressor) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Timer description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Screw compressors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Reciprocating compressors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7. P BAND FACTOR - I . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Stop delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Special timers in connection with MULTISAB
8.TRANSFER - I Reciprocating compressors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9.TAKE-OVER - I Reciprocating compressors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MULTISAB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1. MULTISAB STATE - I . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2. ALL COMPRESSORS - I . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3. PARALLEL CONTR. - I . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
61
61
61
61
61
61
62
66
66
69
71
71
6/222
73
73
73
74
75
76
77
0178-445 - ENG
Rev. 03.09
0178-445TOC.fm
UNISAB II 2.03
Compressor regulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Control mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Regulators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Screw compressors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PID controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PID regulator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Reciprocating compressors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 9A - Settings - Regulating parameters, Reciprocating compressors . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 9B - Settings - Regulating parameters, Screw compressors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Set points on regulators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Universal regulator (Ext. input) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Set point control with current input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Suction pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Brine temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Disch. pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Hotwater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Capacity control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Climatic Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Adjusting slide speed (screw compressors with hydraulic slides) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Capacity slide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Volume ratio slide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Variable Zero position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Corrected capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Automatic setting of new zero point (SAB 202) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Manual setting of new zero point (all types of screw compressors) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Built-in spacer block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
The alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Zero pos. picture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Electrical slide control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Part load and full load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Calculated Vi position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Change to full load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Change to part load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Position indications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Slide brake control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Capacity alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
79
79
79
80
81
82
85
86
88
90
91
91
92
92
92
93
93
95
97
97
97
98
98
99
99
100
100
100
101
101
101
102
102
102
102
102
103
Limiting functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Standard limiters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Special limiters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Display indications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
105
105
107
109
Compressor control and surveillance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SAB 202, SAB 163H/128H MK3 with oil pump & VMY Mk3 with full flow pump . . . . . . . .
SAB 128HR and 163HR with oil pump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SAB 283, SAB 330 and SAB 355 with oil pump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SAB 80 with fitted (mechanical) oil pump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
GSV/RWF with oil pump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
111
111
111
112
113
113
0178-445 - ENG
Rev. 03.09
7/222
UNISAB II 2.03
SV 24/26 with oil pump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

FV 24/26 with oil pump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FV 19 with oil pump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
VMY Mk 3
without full flow pump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
VMY Mk 2 and 2.5 with built-in oil pump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SAB 110/128/163 Mk 2
without oil pump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SAB 128/163 Mk 2 Booster with oil pump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SAB 163 Mk 1 with oil pump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
External starting permission - immediate stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
External starting permission normal stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Oil charging, manual (screw compressors) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Motor current measuring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Motor power measuring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
COP set-up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Thermistor connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Aux. output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Capacity down blocked . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Power management system (PMS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cold store function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Note on screw compressors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
HP on TWO-STAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Oil return (reciprocating compressors) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Oil heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Definition of refrigerant R000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
114
114
115
116
116
116
116
117
117
117
118
118
118
119
119
119
119
120
120
120
121
121
121
122
122
Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Pressure transducers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Brine temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Calibration of capacity slide signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Calibration of Vi slide signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Calibration of motor frequency signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Motor current . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Hydraulic slide systems
(certain screw compressors) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Adjusting capacity measuring system for turning transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Adjusting Long-Stroke Capacity Rod for SAB 283. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Adjusting Short-Stroke Capacity Rod . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Electrical slide systems (certain screw compressors) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Factory setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
125
125
126
127
127
127
127
Trouble shooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Diagnosis pictures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1) Diagnosis I Insp. old alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2) Diagnosis I Misc. functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3) Diagnosis I Software version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
137
137
137
139
139
8/222
127
128
131
132
134
136
0178-445 - ENG
Rev. 03.09
0178-445TOC.fm
UNISAB II 2.03
4) Diagnosis I Digital inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5) Diagnosis I Digital outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6) Diagnosis I Analog inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7) Diagnosis I Analog outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8) Diagnosis I No of alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9) Diagnosis I Superuser keyword . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10) Diagnosis I Serial number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11) Diagnosis I Examine memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12) Diagnosis J New password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
13) Diagnosis I Power on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
14) Diagnosis I Zero capacity pos. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
15) Diagnosis I COP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 11 - Numbering of digital inputs and outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 12 - Numbering of analog inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Printed circuit board, light diodes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
140
140
140
141
141
141
141
141
141
142
142
142
143
145
146
Trouble shooting diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
149
Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Replacement of door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Replacement of CPU print . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Replacement of CPU print and EEPROM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Replacement of relay print . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Replacement of EPROM (program) UNISAB II . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Replacement of serial EEPROM (diagnosis) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Replacement of battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Please note that at the next power failure, the problem will be the same. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Installation of data communication cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
The cable must have the following data: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Grounding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
159
159
159
160
160
161
162
163
163
164
165
166
MULTISAB regulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
System setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Regulation Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
167
167
168
169
Checklist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
173
Start and system numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

- pref. master = COMPR#. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Start and system numbers - pref. master = START# . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Example of regulation - screw compressors only . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Regulating parameters (for BRINE regulator) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Timers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Loading sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Unloading sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Operating sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
177
177
178
179
180
180
180
180
182
183
183
0178-445 - ENG
Rev. 03.09
9/222
UNISAB II 2.03
Regulating parameters (for SUCTION PRESSURE regulator) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Timers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Loading sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Unloading sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Example of regulation - combination of screw and reciprocating compressors . . . . . . . . . .
Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Regulating parameters (for SUCTION PRESSURE regulator) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Timers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Loading sequence - sequence A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
State of transfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
State of take-over . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Unloading sequence - sequence A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Loading sequence - sequence B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Unloading sequence - sequence B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Practical example 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Practical example 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Trouble shooting
The plant cannot start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
The plant does not run in sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
184
184
184
185
186
186
186
187
187
188
189
190
190
191
192
193
List of Versions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
197
Spare parts for UNISAB II . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
209
Supplementary Material . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
211
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
213
10/222
194
194
0178-445 - ENG
Rev. 03.09
UNISAB II 2.03
1. Description of UNISAB II control

The purpose of the UNISAB II control system is to
monitor, protect, control and regulate reciprocating and screw compressors. Both the control box
and the electrical components have been connected from the factory. Thus, only a few connections are necessary to link the components to the
electrical installations on site.
UNISAB II is programmed according to the type of
compressor it is going to controls. See section
Configuration.
0178_426_en_2.02.fm
UNISAB II contains different ways of controlling/regulating compressor capacity according to

pressure levels or temperatures. Compressor capacity can be regulated both manually and automatically.
Furthermore, a number of limiting functions have
been incorporated. In periods of overloading
these limiting functions will intervene and limit
compressor capacity until the situation has returned to normal. Consequently, the number of
undesirable operational stops will be reduced as
well as the need for supervision.
Compressors fitted with UNISAB II CONTROL
can be linked via the built-in communication system, MULTISAB. In this way compressors can
work in a common refrigerating system, thus optimizing the operation of the entire compressor
plant.
The communication system makes it possible
also to connect UNISAB II with a PLC or PC central monitoring, control and data logging system.
UNISAB II can be linked to and communicate with
old SABROE control units such as PROSAB II
and UNISAB S/R/RT/RTH.
0178-445 - ENG
Rev. 03.09
Other possibilities:
UNISAB II can be configured to run as a

chiller controller.
By inserting an optional communication

print, UNISAB II can be configured to communicate with
a PLC, the configuration by the name EVOLUTION
one or more Quantum compressor controllers also manufactured by
YORK Refrigeration.
The above points are described in separate manuals, only the configuration is included in this manual.
UNISAB II is operated by means of a front panel
as shown in the following drawing. The front panel
is well-arranged with only a few keys and a distinct
display.
The subsequent description refers to the numbers
in the drawing. On delivery UNISAB II is preset
with a number of factory values and is thus ready
for operation. Therefore, only a few adjustments
are necessary to adapt the UNISAB II system to
its actual use. For this purpose, use the enclosed
leaflet Quick Reference.
UNISAB II is constructed not to lose its preset or
changed values in case of a temporary power failure. UNISAB II is fitted with a battery, which is
used by the built-in timer so that time and date are
always correct even though current has been disconnected. The hour counter and any stored
alarm values will thus maintain the correct time.
11/222
UNISAB II 2.03
Fig. 1.1
10 9
UNISAB II front panel

8
11 13 12 14 15
Suct.temp. -25C
Disch.temp. 38C
Oil press. 4.3 bar
Ready 0%
Operating UNISAB II control
Fig. 1.2
Drawing of plugs and their positions
Start-up
On delivery all electrical components in the compressor are connected to UNISAB II. On site it is
UNISAB II
only necessary to add the correct supply voltage

from the local installations. The electric wiring
must be carried out according to the wiring diagrams for UNISAB II at the end of this manual.
Note in particular
a.
that no outside voltage must be applied to the

digital inputs of UNISAB II.
b.
that the code plug for the supply voltage must

be correct compared to the local supply voltage. (see Fig. 1.2)
12/222
230 VAC
115 VAC
Also check that the 3 Amp fuse is in good working

condition.
0178-445 - ENG
Rev. 03.09
UNISAB II 2.03
Fig. 1.3
Drawing of fuses and their positions
points is carried out via the display. The display

contains a number of different pictures.
The control panel is usually closed and locked
with a screw at each end of the panel.
3
3 Amp
UNISAB II
By turning the screws half a turn the control panel

is loosened and can be lifted to an open position,
Here, it is fastened to the cabinet (see Fig. 1.4).
Fig. 1.4
Opening the cabinet
UNISAB II
Before any voltage is applied to UNISAB II, the

0178_426_en_2.02.fm
emergency stop switch will be activated.

UNISAB II
When voltage is applied to UNISAB II, the following Main picture will appear in the display, and
UNISAB II will be ready for operation.
SUCT.PRESS
0,0 BAR
DISCH.PRES
0,0 BAR
MOTOR CURR
0A
STOPPED
0%
In this way it is still easy to operate the control

panel. At the same time easy access to the cabinet interior is obtained.
When UNISAB II is open, it is still fully opera-
UNISAB II has been programmed with values for

warning limits, alarm limits, set points, etc. This
makes it possible to start up the compressor immediately.
However, some of the values must always be
adapted to the actual operating situation. For this
purpose use the enclosed leaflet Quick Reference. It is also recommended to read this manual
carefully to acquire a thorough knowledge of how
to operate UNISAB II.
UNISAB II is operated exclusively by means of the
front panel keys. Reading of operating conditions
as well as changing of limiting values and set
0178-445 - ENG
Rev. 03.09
tional.
Display
Pos. 1
Has a constant background illumination and displays 4 lines each with 20

characters. The contrast has been
factory set, but can be adjusted if required. See subsection Contrast
(display) in section Languages.
Pressure levels, temperatures, set
points as well as warning and alarm
limits can be read in the display.
13/222
UNISAB II 2.03
Front panel
is not possible to change to automatic. See section Control Mode.
The UNISAB II front panel is divided into two sections:

The control section, pos. 2 to 10, by means of
which the compressor is controlled.
The recording section, pos. 11 to 15, by means
of which menu pictures are selected and values
changed.
Pos. 8
D Key used to acknowledge alarms.
Pos. 9
E Loading of capacity during manual

operation. On screw compressors
the slide moves towards higher capacity as long as the key is held
down. On reciprocating compressors
a new capacity stage is loaded every
time the key is pressed.
Pos. 10
F Unloading of capacity during manual operation. On screw compressors the slide moves towards lower
capacity as long as the key is held
down. On reciprocating compressors
one capacity stage is unloaded every
time the key is pressed.
Control section:
Pos. 2
Green lamp indicating whether the

compressor is running. At start-up
this lamp will flash until UNISAB II
has received feedback from the motor starter. At the same time the text
"STARTING" (lamp flashes) and
"OPERATING" (lamp light steady)
can be seen in the bottom line of an
operating picture.
Pos. 3
Pos. 4
Pos. 5
Pos. 6
Pos. 7
14/222
Yellow lamp indicating whether the

state of operation is automatic or
manual. Yellow light = manual operation.
Recording section
Pos. 11
When pressing the G key, a change

will be made between Bar (PSI) and
C/R (F/R) for saturated vapours
when the display shows a suction or
discharge pressure.
Red lamp indicating warning or

alarm.
Slow flashes = warning;
Quick flashes = alarm.
Changing the set values can only be

carried out by using the password
shown on page 1 in the instruction
A Compressor start at manual

operation by pressing the key once.
Works only if yellow lamp pos. 3 is lit.
B Compressor stop at manual operation by pressing the key once.
Works only if yellow lamp pos. 3 is lit.
C A change between manual
(yellow lamp on) and automatic
(yellow lamp off) takes place by
pressing the key once.
Please note that if manual was selected from the CONTROL menu, it
The G key has several functions.
manual for the UNISAB II in question.

As to the encoding of a password,
see section Changing Set Values.
Pos. 12
H Used for moving left in the menu

system. Used for selecting pictures
or a digit when changing a value.
Pos. 13
I Used for moving right in the menu

system. Used for selecting pictures
or a digit when changing a value.
0178-445 - ENG
Rev. 03.09
UNISAB II 2.03
Pos. 14
K Used for moving downwards in a

picture in order to point at a certain
value, or when changing to a lower
value.
Menu structure
UNISAB II includes a number of different pictures
on compressor operation, set values, configuration, etc. These pictures are built up in a menu
system in which a certain picture can be selected
by means of the arrow keys.
Fig. 5.1-3 show the structure and the number of
pictures in the menu systems for:
- Screw compressors
- One-stage reciprocating compressors
- Two-stage reciprocating compressors.
0178_426_en_2.02.fm
Pos. 15
J Used for moving upwards in a picture in order to point at a certain value, or when changing to a higher value.
0178-445 - ENG
Rev. 03.09
15/222
UNISAB II 2.03
Fig. 1.5
UNISAB II - Ver. 2.02/2.03
Menu Tree
Screw Compressor
PARAMETER SETTING
HIGH ALARM
HIGH WARN.
LOW WARN.
LOW ALARM
ACTUAL SP.
SETPOINT 1
SETPOINT 2
NEUTRALZONE
PROP.BAND
T.INT.
T.DIFF.
P.PART
I.PART
D.PART
REG.OUTPUT
Suction
SUCT.PRES.
C/R
SUCT.TEMP.
C
SUCT.SUPERH.
C
RUNNING
100%
Discharge
DISCH.PRES.
C/R
DISCH.TEMP.DI
C
SCH.SUPERH.
C
RUNNING
100%
Oil
OIL PRES.
DIFF.PRES.
OIL TEMP.
RUNNING
Multisab state
BAR
BAR
C
100%
START NO.
SYSTEM NO.
SYS.CONTROLLER
RUNS BY ITSELF
Motor
Main picture
SUCT.PRES.
DISCH.PRES.
MOTOR CURR
RUNNING
C/R
C/R
A
100%
Main menu
SUCTION
DISCHARGE
OIL
MOTOR
BRINE
ALARM
WARNING
SETUP
C/R
C/R
C/R
C/R
C/R
C/R
C/R
C/R
C/R
SEC
SEC
%
%
%
%
All compressors
MOTOR CURR
0A
MOTOR POWER 0 kW
MOTOR FREQ 0 RPM
READY
0%
COMPR. # 01 MANUAL
SYSTEM # 01
START # 01
100%
RUNNING
Brine
BRINE TEMP.
SUCT.BRINE
EXT.INPUT
RUNNING
Timers
C
C/R
START START
STOP START
START DELAY
STOP DELAY
100%
Alarms
Control
NO ALARMS
COMPRESSOR CTRL.
MANUAL
Warnings
Multisab
NO WARNINGS
MULTISAB
MULTISAB STATE
ALL COMPRESSORS
PARALLEL CONTR.
SEC
SEC
SEC
SEC
Service-timers
ON TIME
HOUR
SINCE START
Date-time
HOUR
MIN
SEC
DAY
Dig. input
Timers
Setup
CONTROL
MULTISAB
TIMERS
DIAGNOSIS
CALIBRATE
CAPACITY
CONFIG
LANGUAGE
Diagnosis
Capacity
CAPACITY
CAP POS
VI POSITION
READY
TIMERS
TIMERS
TIMER SETUP
SERVICE TIMERS
0%
0%
0%
0%
DIAGNOSIS
INSPECT OLD ALARMS
MISC.FUNCTIONS
SOFTWARE VERSION
Calibrate
D.INPUT
D.INPUT
D.INPUT
D.INPUT
Dig. output
D.OUTPUT
D.OUTPUT
D.OUTPUT
D.OUTPUT
Analog. input
PRES. INP 1
PT 100 INP 1
EXT.
CALIBRATE
PRESS TRANSDUCER
BRINE TEMP.
CAPACITY
4-20 MA input
4 MA
20 MA
CAPACITY SETPOINT
Config.
Auxiliary output
CONFIG
CONTROL
COMPRESSOR
OIL SYSTEM
AUXILIARY OUTPUT
ACTIVE WHEN
AT MAX.CAP
Language
16/222
CONTRAST
LANGUSGE
GB
0178-445 - ENG
Rev. 03.09
UNISAB II 2.03
Fig. 1.6
I
PARAMETER SETTING
Suction
UNISAB II - Ver. 2.02/2.03

Menu Tree
One-stage
Reciprocating Compressor
HIGH ALARM
HIGH WARN.
LOW WARN.
LOW ALARM
ACTUAL SP.
SETPOINT 1
SETPOINT 2
NEUTRALZONE
PROP.BANDD
SUCT.PRES.
C/R
SUCT. TEMP.
C
SUCT.SUPERH.
C
RUNNING
100%
Discharge
C/R
C
C
100%
DISCH.PRES.
DISCH. TEMP.
DISC.SUPERH.
RUNNING
Multisab state
START NO.
SYSTEM NO.
SYS. CONTROLLER
NOT MY TURN
Oil
SUCT.PRES.
OIL PRES.
OIL TEMP.
RUNNING
BAR
BAR
C
100%
All compressors
COMPR. # 01 MANUAL
SYSTEM # 01
START
# 01
RUNNING 100%
Motor
MOTOR CURR
0A
MOTOR POWER 0 kW
MOTOR FREQ 0 RPM
READY
0%
Main picture
0178_426_en_2.02.fm
SUCT.PRES.
DISCH.PRES.
MOTOR CURR
RUNNING
C/R
C/R
A
100%
Timers
Main menu
SUCTION
BRINE
DISCHARGE ALARM
OIL
WARNING
MOTOR
SETUP
C/R
C/R
C/R
C/R
C/R
C/R
C/R
C/R
C/R
START START
STOP START
START DELAY
STOP DELAY
Brine
BRINE TEMP.
C
SUCT.PRES.
C/R
EXT.INPUT
100%
RUNNING
SEC
SEC
SEC
SEC
Service timers
ON TIME HOUR
SINCE START
Control
Alarms
COMPRESSOR CTRL.
NO ALARMS
MANUAL
Warnings
Multisab
NO WARNINGS
MULTISAB
MULTISAB STATE
ALL COMPRESSORS
PARALLEL CONTR.
Setup
CONTROL
MULTISAB
TIMERS
DIAGNOSIS
K
Dig. input
D. INPUT
D. INPUT
D. INPUT
D. INPUT
Timers
CALIBRATE
CAPACITY
CONFIG
LANGUAGE
Capacity
CAPACITY
NOT USED
NOT USED
READY
Datetime
HOUR
MIN
SEC
DAY
0%
0%
0%
0%
TIMERS
TIMERS
TIMER SETUP
SERVICE TIMERS
Diagnosis
DIAGNOSIS
INSPECT OLD ALARMS
MISC. FUNCTIONS
SOFTWARE VERSION
Dig. output
D. OUTPUT
D. OUTPUT
D. OUTPUT
D. OUTPUT
Analog input
PRES. INP 1
PT 100 INP 1
EXT.
4-20 MA input
Calibrate
CALIBRATE
PRESS TRANSDUCER
BRINE TEMP.
CAPACITY
Config.
4 MA
20 MA
CAPACITY SETPOINT
Auxiliary output
AUXILIARY OUTPUT
ACTIVATE WHEN
AT MAX.CAP
CONFIG.
CONTROL
COMPRESSOR
OIL SYSTEM
Language
0178-445 - ENG
Rev. 03.09
CONTRAST
LANGUAGE
GB
17/222
UNISAB II 2.03
Fig. 1.7
I
UNISAB II Ver. 2.02/2.03

Menu Tree
Two-stage reciprocating compressor
PARAMETER SETTING
Suction
HIGH ALARM
HIGH WARN.
LOW WARN.
LOW ALARM
ACTUAL SP.
SETPOINT 1
SETPOINT 2
NEUTRALZONE
PROP.BAND
SUCT.PRES.
C/R
SUCT.TEMP.
C
SUCT.SUPERH.
C
RUNNING
100%
Discharge
C/R
C/R
C/R
C/R
C/R
C/R
C/R
C/R
C/R
C/R
DISCH.PRES.
C
DISCH.TEMP.
DISCH.SUPERH. C
100%
RUNNING
Multisab state
Oil
SUCT.PRES.
OIL PRES.
OIL TEMP.
RUNNING
START NO.
SYSTEM NO.
SYS. CONTROLLER
BAR
BAR
C
100%
All compressors
Motor
Main picture
SUCH.PRES.
DISCH.PRES.
MOTOR CURR
RUNNING
C/R
C/R
A
100%
Main menu
SUCTION
INTERMED
DISCHARGE
ALARM
OIL
WARNING
MOTOR
SETUP
COMPR. # 01 MANUAL
SYSTEM # 01
START # 01
RUNNING 100%
MOTOR CURR
0A
MOTOR POWER 0 kW
MOTOR FREQ 0 RPM
READY
0%
Timers
Intermed.
START START
STOP START
START DELAY
STOP DELAY
INTERM.PRES. C/R
INTERM.TEMP. C/R
EXT.INPUT
RUNNING
100%
SEC
SEC
SEC
SEC
Service timers
Alarms
HOUR
ON TIME
SINCE START
Control
NO ALARMS
COMPR.CTRL MODE
MANUAL
Warnings
Multisab
MULTISAB
ALL COMPRESSORS
PARALLEL CONTRS
NO WARNINGS
Setup
Timers
CONTROL CALIBRATE
MULTISAB CAPACITY
CONFIG.
TIMERS
DIAGNOSIS LANGUAGE
Diagnosis
Capacity
CAPACITY
NOT USED
NOT USED
READY
TIMERS
TIMERS
TIMER SETUP
SERVICE TIMERS
0%
0%
0%
0%
DIAGNOSIS
INSPECT OLD ARLAMS
MISC. FUNCTIONS
SOFTWARE VERSION
Calibrate
CALIBRATE
PRES. TRANSDUCER
BRINE TEMP.
CAPACITY
Date-time
HOUR
MIN
SEC
DAY
Dig. input
D.INPUT
D.INPUT
D.INPUT
D.INPUT
Dig. output
D.OUTPUT
D.OUTPUT
D.OUTPUT
D.OUTPUT
4-20 MA input
PRES. INP 1
PT 100 INR 1
EXT.
4-20 MA input
4 MA
20 MA
SUCT. PRES.
Config.
Auxiliary output
TYPE
REFRIGERAN
CONTROL ON
VOLUME RATIO.
AUXILIARY OUTPUT
ACTIVATE WHWN
AT MAX. CAP
Language
18/222
CONTRAST
LANGUAGE
GB
0178-445 - ENG
Rev. 03.09
UNISAB II 2.03
In the menu tree the selection of pictures is carried

out by means of the arrow keys in the recording
panel.
The H and I keys make it possible to move to the
left or the right in the menu tree by pressing the
keys .
The J and K keys make it possible to move up
and down in the menu picture by moving the dark
cursor from line to line.
Selecting a picture
On delivery UNISAB II will display the following
0178_426_en_2.02.fm
Main picture when voltage is applied.

SUCT.PRESS
0.0 BAR
DISCH.PRES
0.0 BAR
MOTOR CURR
0A
BLOCKED
0%
It is always possible to return to this picture by

pressing the H key.
To see Set point 1 for suction pressure regulator, do as follows:
With the Main picture in the display, press I
HIGH ALARM
XX
HIGH WARNING
XX
LOW WARNING
XX
LOW ALARM
XX
ACTUAL SP
XX
SETPOINT 1
XX
SETPOINT 2
XX
NEUTRAL ZONE
XX
PROP. BAND
XX
T.INT.
XX
T.DIFF.
XX
P.PART
XX
I.PART
XX
D.PART
XX
REG. OUTPUT
XX
Note: The items from NEUTRAL ZONE and

downwards are only shown when the suction
pressure unit of measure is C/R. See below for information on how to change the unit.
Press K until the cursor is at the desired line, SET
POINT 1, which is read.
Press H until the Main picture appears.
SUCTION
BRINE
DISCHARGE
ALARM
OIL
WARNING
MOTOR
SETUP
To see the set value for the timer START-DELAY,

do as follows:
With the main picture in the display, press I
Press I
SUCT.PRESS
XX
SUCT.TEMP
XX
SUCH.SUPERH.
XX
BLOCKED
Press I
0178-445 - ENG
Rev. 03.09
SUCTION
BRINE
DISCHARGE
ALARM
OIL
WARNING
MOTOR
SETUP
Press K until the cursor is at SETUP.

Press I
19/222
UNISAB II 2.03
POS.NO
CONTROL
CALIBRATE
19
DISCH. OVERL.
MULTISAB
CAPACITY
20
CURR OVERLD.
XX
TIMERS
CONFIG
21
MOTOR START
XX
DIAGNOSES
LANGUAGE
22
PMS FEEDBACK
XX
23
FULL FLW M.
XX
Press K until the cursor is at TIMERS.

Press I
XX
24
OIL PUMP M.
XX
25
RECT. START
XX
26
RECT DELAY
XX
27
RECT DISABLl
XX
28
START HP
XX
TIMERS
29
NO CHILLER
XX
TIMERS SETUP
30
CAP. NEGATIVE
XX
SERVICE TIMERS
31
START UNLOAD
XX
DATE-TIME
32
LOW SUCT. PRESS.
XX
OIL CHARGING
33
LUBR.PRESS.
XX
MOTOR FAN
34
Vi-PAUSE
XX
TIMERS
PBAND FACTOR
TRANSFER
TAKE-OVER
Press K until the cursor is at

TIMERS SETUP.
Press I
This example applies to screw compressors.

Press K until the cursor is at the desired timer
START-DELAY.
Display in Bar or C/R

POS.NO
START START
STOP START
XX
START DELAY
XX
STOP DELAY
XX
SUCTION RAMP
XX
SLIDE MAX.
XX
PRELUB
XX
OIL FLOW
XX
FLOW DELAY
XX
10
NO OIL FLOW
XX
11
LUBRIC.TIME
XX
12
DIF.PRES. OK
XX
13
OIL PRES LO
XX
14
OIL PRES HI
XX
15
OIL TEMP. LOW
XX
16
OIL TTEMP. HIGH
XX
17
SUPERH. LOW
XX
As it appears from the menu tree, there is a whole
18
SUPERH. HIGH
XX
range of operating pictures in UNISAB II. Howev-
20/222
XX
Refrigerant pressure levels as eg suction pressure, discharge pressure or intermediate pressure

can be displayed in either Bar orC/R. It is possible
to switch between these two units when the cursor
is at the relevant value by briefly pressing the G
key.
To see suction pressure in C/R, first select the

picture with SUCT. PRESS. With the cursor on
SUCT. PRESS, briefly press G and the unit displayed will change from Bar to C/R or vice versa.
Pressure levels displayed in C/R are dew point
values.
The user's own picture
0178-445 - ENG
Rev. 03.09
UNISAB II 2.03
er, if no suitable combination of measuring values

can be found in the same picture, a new picture
can be constructed.
Thus, it is possible to compose a standard picture
appearing in the display.
If the Main picture is required to include eg OIL
PRESS instead of SUCT. PRESS, proceed as follows:
0178_426_en_2.02.fm
SUCT.PRESS
0,0 BAR
DISCH.PRES
0,0 BAR
MOTOR CURR
0A
BLOCKED
0%
Press I and next K until the cursor reach OIL.
SUCTION
BRINE
DISCHARGE
ALARM
OIL
WARNING
MOTOR
SETUP
XX
MOTOR CURR
XX
OIL TEMP
XX
READY
Before changing the main picture, it is recommended to plan how to compose the picture and
in which sequence the values should appear.
Please note that the new value is entered into line
3 and that the value in line 1 disappears.
If SUCT. PRESS is to appear again in the main
picture, proceed as follows:
DISC. PRESS
XX
MOTOR CURR
XX
OIL TEMP
XX
READY
Press I and again I until
Press I
OIL PRESS
XX
DIFF.PRESS
XX
OIL TEMP
XX
READY
DISC. PRESS
Press and keep G until the cursor covers the

whole line. OIL PRESS and value are moved to
line 3 in the main picture and SUCT. PRESS, line
1, has disappeared from the main picture.
SUCT.PRESS
XX
SUCT.TEMP
XX
SUCT.SUPERH
XX
BLOCKED
By a quick pressure on G it is possible to switch

between Bar and C/R.
Press G , until the cursor covers the entire line.
SUCT. PRESS and value are moved to line 3 in
the main picture and DISCH.PRES in line 1 has
disappeared from the picture:
0178-445 - ENG
Rev. 03.09
21/222
UNISAB II 2.03
MOTOR CURR
XX
OIL PRESS
XX
SUCT.PRESS
XX
READY
Changing of set values

The set values in UNISAB II can be changed by
means of the keys G H I K J
Password
To safeguard against unwanted changes of the
set values, a password must be used before the
change can take place.
When a password has been entered, the system
will be open for 60 minutes. During this period it is
possible to change the system values before it
closes again.
If the system is required to close earlier, press H
until the main picture appears. By pressing H
once more the system will close.
Using the H I and K J keys, enter the correct

password.
Press G and the password will be open for 60
minutes for changing of values.
Changing of password
On delivery the UNISAB II password is set for a
standard four-figure password. All
YORK Refrigeration companies and agents are
able to inform of this standard password.
It is possible to change this standard password to
a personal password.
Please note that not more than one password can
be used at a time.
Change the password in menu:
SETUP I DIAGNOSIS I NEW
PASSWORD
NEW PASSWORD
Passwords are required for changing CONFIG,

TIMERS, ALARMS, WARNINGS as well as REGULATING PARAMETERS.
RESET PASSWORD
Application of password
When the set value to be changed appears in the
display and has been marked by the cursor, press
G for approx 2 seconds till the following picture
appears:
With the cursor on NEW PASSWORD, press the

G key and enter the current password, cf section
Application of password.
It is now possible to enter a personal password by
changing the current (shown) password to the one
chosen. The password can be set anywhere between 0001 and 9999.
PASWORD
1
NEW PASSWORD
SET TO ACCEPT / QUIT
+09999
RESET PASSWORD
22/222
0178-445 - ENG
Rev. 03.09
UNISAB II 2.03
Important!
It is essential to remember the changed password
as any changes of the set values will require the
application of the personal password. The standard password, of which it is possible to be informed by contacting YORK Refrigeration, is no
longer applicable.
Changing a value
To change the alarm value for
LOW SUCTION PRESSURE, do as follows:
Resetting of password
0178_426_en_2.02.fm
In case the password has been changed to a personal password and this is no longer known, it is
possible to get a special password by contacting
YORK Refrigeration. This password must be used
to reset the personal password to
YORK Refrigeration's standard password.
The password is reset to the standard password in
the menu: SETUP I DIAGNOSIS I NEW PASSWORD
NEW PASSWORD
Changing of functions
(compressor type, regulators, etc.)
From the main picture, press I until this picture appears:
SUCT.PRESS
XX
SUCT.TEMP
XX
SUCT.SUPERH
XX
READY
Select Bar or C/R by a quick pressure on

G.
Press I until the following picture appear:
HIGH ALARM
XX
HIGH WARNING
XX
LOW WARNING
XX
LOW ALARM
RESET PASSWORD
NO
ACTUAL SP
XX
ETC
With the cursor on RESET PASSWORD, press

the G key, then enter the special password. See
section Application of password.
It is now possible to reset the personal passwordto the standard password by changing NO into
YES by pressing the G key followed by the H
key.
Procedure for changing of set values

There are two types of changes:
Changing of values
(alarms, set points, etc.)
0178-445 - ENG
Rev. 03.09
With the K key move the cursor to LOW

ALARM.
Press G . Enter password if not already

open (see section Application of password)
The cursor is now moved to the first digit,

eg 0 as shown in the picture.The signs "+" or
"-" may be seen in front of the digit.
HIGH ALARM
XX
HIGH WARNING
XX
LOW WARNING
LOW ALARM
XX
-0,3 BAR
23/222
UNISAB II 2.03
Using the arrow keys H I K J, enter the

new value, eg - 0.5 BAR.
COMPRESSOR CONTROL
AUTO
Press G - the cursor moves to LOW

ALARM, and enter the new value.
HIGH ALARM
XX
HIGH WARNING
XX
LOW WARNING
XX
LOW ALARM
Using the K J keys, change between

STOPPED-MANUAL-AUTO-REMOTE.
Press G to confirm.
-0,5 BAR
Changing a function, example 2
It is now possible to change other values

during the 60 minutes the password is open.
Changing a function, example 1

To change the state of operation from AUTO to
REMOTE, proceed as follows:
From the Main picture, press I once.
With the K key, move the cursor to

SETUP.
SUCTION
If required to change the regulating function to

BRINE regulation, do as follows:
From the Main picture, press I once.
With K, move the cursor to SETUP.
Press I once more
CONTROL
CONFIG
With K, move the cursor to CONFIG.
Press I once more

CONFIG
CONTROL
SETUP
COMPRESSOR
OIL SYSTEM
Press I once.
CONTROL
Press I once more.
CONTROL ON
YES
AUTO STOP
YES
COLD STORE
Press I once.
COMPRESSOR CONTROL
AUTO
SUCTION
AUTO START
NO
Press G for approx 2 seconds and enter

the password, if necessary. The cursor
moves to the text at the right side of the line.
Press G and the cursor moves to the next

line.
CONTROL ON
24/222
SUCTION
0178-445 - ENG
Rev. 03.09
UNISAB II 2.03
With the J K keys, it is now possible to

change between:
SUCTION - BRINE - DISCHARGE - HOT
WATER - EXT. COOL - EXT. HEAT.
Press G to confirm. In the same way other
functions may be changed by using the cursor to point them out.
Select G to confirm.
Press H and FACTORY RESET is carried out.
UNISAB II is now restored to its Factory setting.
Languages
When selecting the menu LANGUAGE, the following picture will appear:
Factory settings
On delivery UNISAB II is programmed with facto-
0178_426_en_2.02.fm
ry settings for all values such as: Alarms, Warnings, Timers, Set points. These values are stated
in tables for reciprocating and screw compressors
respectively.
See tables 1, 2, 3, 4 and 5 in section Alarms and
warnings, tables 7 and 8 in section Timers and tables 9A, 9B and 9C in section Compressor regulation.
Although other values may have been entered after delivery, it is always possible to return to the
factory settings in the following way:
For safety reasons, first make sure the compressor is stopped.
From the main picture, press I once.
With K, move the cursor to SETUP.
Press I once to the picture CONTROL.
Press I once more to COMPRESSOR CONTROL.
Press G to move the cursor to the second line.
Press J until STOPPED appears.
Press G to confirm.
Carry out factory reset:
Press H to CONTROL and K to CONFIG. and I
to CONTROL. With K move the cursor to FACTORY RESET. Press I to Factory Reset menu.
Press G and the cursor moves to the right. Enter
password if not open. Select YES by means of J .
0178-445 - ENG
Rev. 03.09
CONTRAST
50
LANGUAGE
GB
Contrast (display)
The contrast setting of the display takes place automatically, but it is still possible to make a manual
adjustment.
The contrast of the display is adjusted in the main
menu or any other menu in the following way:
Press the alarm button and K = darker contrast
(lower contrast value) or the alarm button and J =
lighter contrast (higher contrast).
The value is changed just like any other parameter and has an adjusting area from 20-80.
The value 20 gives a dark display.
The value 80 gives a light display.
Changes can be made during compressor operation. The contrast setting for the best display lies
usually between 30 and 50.
The contrast can be adjusted from any menu picture by using the keys D and J or K.
Important!
A setting within the minimum (20) or maximum
(80) area may cause a dimming of the display text.
However, it is usually still possible to read the text
by means of a heavy illumination and by viewing
from an angle of approx 20 degrees. Should this
not be possible - ie the display is impossible to
read - carry out a "blind operation" as follows:
25/222
UNISAB II 2.03
1.Make sure you are in the Main picture, if neces-
French
sary by switching the UNISAB II off/on.
Spanish
DK
Danish
German
CZ
Czech
Swedish
RUS
Russian
PL
Polish
Portuguese
NL
Dutch
Italian
Norwegian
Hungarian
Languages
GR
Greek
Like any other function setting (see section Procedure for changing set values), the language can
be changed to any of the following, even when the
compressor is running:
TR
Turkish
2. Press the following keys, one time each, and in

the following order: I, J, I J and I (see
Fig. 1.5),
3.Keep G pressed for 5 seconds.
4.Press J and/or K. The contrast of the display
should now change gradually, possibly to the other extreme. However, it should be possible to select a reasonable value (40 or the like). See also
section Procedure for changing of set values.
GB
English
FIN
Finnish
26/222
When UNISAB II is switched on for the first time or

when a program RESET has been performed, the
set language will be English (GB).
0178-445 - ENG
Rev. 03.09
UNISAB II 2.03
2. Configuration
2. Configuration
UNISAB II can be configured to a number of different functions depending on compressor type, refrigerant, etc. Some of the settings have already
been made by the factory, but it will always be
necessary to make some final settings before
start-up.
The immediate configuration can always be
checked during operation, BUT if one or more
configuration points have to be changed, always
STOP the compressor and activate the emergency stop while making the changes.
0178_427_en_2.02.fm
After changing the configuration, the first pressure

on H will in some cases display the following picture:
CONFIGURATION
CHANGED
RESTARTING
- PLEASE WAIT
Wait a few seconds - the main picture will appear

and UNISAB II will be reconfigured. At this stage
the picture may be dark as the contrast is being
0178-445 - ENG
Rev. 03.09
adjusted. This is quite normal. RELEASE the

emergency stop.
Changes in the points that will lead to the above
situation are marked with ** in the following configuration table.
The configuration points are common for 1) reciprocating and 2) screw compressors and their use
is marked in the list.
The configuration points have been divided into
sub-menus available from the menu SETUP I
CONFIG.
CONFIG
CONTROL
COMPRESSOR
OIL SYSTEM
ECONOMIZER
MOTOR
MULTISAB
COP
COMMUNICATIONS
MEASURING UNIT
UNIT/PLANT
FACTORY RESET
In case of a screw compressor, the sub-menus

are composed as follows:
27/222
UNISAB II 2.03
2. Configuration
SETUP I CONFIG I MULTISAB
SETUP I CONFIG I CONTROL

3 CONTROL ON
SUCTION
11 PREF. MASTER
COMPR#
5 AUTO START
YES
15 COMMON EVAP/COND
N/N
6 AUTO STOP
YES
16 HP ON TWO STAGE
NO
31 TAKE OVER
NO
21 COLD STORE
NO
22 CLIMA COMP
NO
SETUP I CONFIG I COMPRESSOR

1 TYPE
20 SWEPT VOLUM
.20 l/pls
400m3/h
37 LIQ. SUBCOOL
3.0 C
NO
MAN
NO
27 MECH. ZERO
NO
34 VI MODE
0.0%
70.0%
23 ADD. UNLOAD
NO
SETUP I CONFIG I
COMMUNICATIONS
38 DANBUSS
YES
10 COMPR. NO
24 BAUD RATE
19200
29 PORT1
SETUP I CONFIG I OIL SYSTEM
EVOL. FX2N
39 NODE NO
7 PRELUBRICATION
NO
40 BAUD RATE
8 FULL FLOW PUMP
NO
41 PORT 2
18 OIL COOLING
NO
36 FLOW FACTOR
12 ECONOMIZER
28 MANUAL ZERO
30 COP ACTIVE
SMC106E
9 BOOSTER
4 VOLUME RATIO
SETUP I CONFIG I COP
NONE
0
9600
QUANTUM
42 NODE NO
77
17 WATER COOLED
NO
43 BAUD RATE
1200
25 OIL RECTIFIER
NO
50 PROFIBUS
YES
51 NODE NO
SETUP I CONFIG I ECONOMIZER

13 ECO. LO. CAP
14 ECO. HI. SUCT. TEMP
0.0%
0.0 C/R
52 BAUD RATE
45 PRESS
19 RANGE MOTOR CUR.

47 RANGE MOTOR kW
35 MOTOR SIZE
46 ROTATUNE
BAR/C
-1/9-1/25
44 MOTOR SIGNAL
53 MOTOR INPUT
1200 A
54 CAP/FREQ
kW
4-20 mA
CAP.POS
1000 kW
500 kW
YES
48 MIN FREQ
1000 RPM
49 MAX FREQ
6000 RPM
28/222
12M
SETUP I CONFIG I MEASURING

UNIT
26 PRESS/TEMP
SETUP I CONFIG I MOTOR
SETUP I CONFIG I UNIT/PLANT

2 REFRIGERANT
32 CHILLER
R22
NO
0178-445 - ENG
Rev. 03.09
UNISAB II 2.03
2. Configuration
SETUP I CONFIG I FACTORY RESET

33 FACTORY RESET
Use the H I and J K keys to enter the

new configuration.
Press G to confirm.
With J or K move the cursor to the next

value to be changed.
When finished changing the values, use H

to quit the sub-menu and thereby to activate
the possible changes, which will make
UNISAB II restart.
NO
Carry out configuration as follows:
Select the picture SETUP, move the cursor

to CONFIG. and press I once.
Move the cursor with K and J to the relevant sub-menu and press I .
Move the cursor with K to the function that

is going to be changed.
Press G and enter password if not already

open.
The following table (cf next page) gives a description of each configuration point as well as possible
choices with reference to the position numbers in
the previous pictures.
0178_427_en_2.02.fm
CONFIGURATION
No
Function
*1*
TYPE
*2*
REFRIGERANT
1)2)
R717; R22; R502; R23; R404a;

R134A; R507; R410A; R407C; R744; R1270,
R290, R000
CONTROL ON
1)2)
Suction; Brine; Discharge;

Hot water; Ext.cool; Ext.heat.
VOLUME RATIO
AUTO START
1)2)
Yes; No
AUTO STOP
1)2)
Yes; No
PRELUB.
2)
Yes; No
FULL FLOW PUMP
2)
Yes; No
BOOSTER
2)
Yes; No
COMPR.NO.
1)2)
1 to 14
11
PREF. MASTER
1)2)
Compressor; Start
12
ECONOMIZER
2)
Yes; No
13
ECO LO CAP
2)
0% to 100%
14
ECO HI SUCT
2)
-100C/Rto 100 C/R
15
COMM. EVAP/CONDENS
*10*
0178-445 - ENG
Rev. 03.09
for
Possible choices
1) Reciprocating and 2) Screw
2)
1)2)
Man; Auto
N/N; N/Y; Y/N; Y/Y
29/222
UNISAB II 2.03
2. Configuration
CONFIGURATION
No
Function
16
HP ON TWO STAGE
17
WATER COOLED
18
OIL COOLING
1)2)
No; Normal; HLI/BLI; Thermo pump;

3-way valve; AKV
19
RANGE M.CURR
1)2)
0 Amp to 2500 Amp
20
SWEPT VOLUME
1)2)
0 m3/h to 12000 m3/h
21
COLD STORE
1)2)
Yes; No
22
CLIMA CONTROL
1)
Yes; No
23
ADD. UNLOAD
1)
Yes; No
*24*
25
*26*
BAUD RATE
OIL RECTIFIER
PRESS/TEMP
for
Possible choices
1)2)
Yes; No
1)
Yes; No
1)2)
2)
1)2)
1200 Baud to 19200 Baud

Yes; No
BAR / C;PSI / F; KPA /C
27
MECHANICAL ZERO
2)
Yes; No
28
MANUAL ZERO
2)
0% til 40%
*29*
PORT 1
1) 2)
NONE; EVOLUTION A1S; EVOLUTION FX2N
30
COP ACTIVE
1) 2)
Yes; No
31
TAKE OVER
1)
Yes; No
32
CHILLER
1) 2)
Yes; No
FACTORY RESET
1)2)
Yes; No
*33*
34
VI MODE
2)
70% to 97%
35
MOTOR SIZE
1)2)
0 to 2500 kW
36
FLOW FACTOR
1)2)
0.01 to 10 litres per pulse
37
LIQ. SUBCOOL
1)2)
0 C to 99.9 C
38
DANBUSS
1)2)
Yes (not changeable)
39
NODE NO (Port 1)
1)2)
0 (not changeable)
40
BAUD RATE (Port 1)
1)2)
1200 baud to 38400 baud
41
PORT 2
1)2)
NONE or QUANTUM
42
NODE NO (Port 2)
1)2)
1 to 99
43
BAUD RATE (Port 2)
1)2)
1200 (not changeable)
44
MOTOR SIGNAL
1)2)
kW or Amp
30/222
0178-445 - ENG
Rev. 03.09
UNISAB II 2.03
2. Configuration
CONFIGURATION
Function
for
Possible choices
45
PRESSURE
1)2)
-1/9 - -1/25; -1/25 - -1/59
46
ROTATUNE
1)2)
Yes; No
47
RANGE MOTOR (kW) POWER
0-2500 kW
48
MINIMUM FREQUENCY
700 to 2000 revolutions
49
MAXIMUM FREQUENCY
50
PROFIBUS
Yes; No
51
NODE NO
1 to 254
52
BAUD RATE
12 mbit (not changeable)
53
MOTOR INPUT
0-1 amp / 4-20 mA
54
CAP/FREQ
Cap. pos./Freq.
0178_427_en_2.02.fm
No
0178-445 - ENG
Rev. 03.09
31/222
UNISAB II 2.03
2. Configuration
Pos. 1: TYPE
NOT-DEF
SMC 104 S/L
SMC 104 E
SMC 106 S/L
SMC 106 E
SMC 186
SMC 108 S/L
SMC 108 E
SMC 188
SMC 112 S/L
SMC 112 E
SMC 116 S/L
SMC 116 E
CMO 24
CMO 26
CMO 28
TSMC 108 S/L
TSMC 108 E
TSMC 188
TSMC 116 S/L
TSMC 116 E
TCMO 28
TCMO 28NEW
HPC 104 S
HPC 106 S
HPC 108 S
HPO 24
HPO 26
HPO 28
SAB 110 S
SAB 110 L
SAB 128HMK1
SAB 128HMK2
SAB 163HMK1
SAB 163BMK1
SAB 163HMK2
VMY MK2
VMY 347 H
VMY 347 M
VMY 447 H
32/222
VMY 447 M
SAB 202 S
SAB 202 L
SAB 128H MK3
SAB 163H MK3
SAB 330S
SAB 330 L
SAB 330E
SAB 80
FV 17/19
*SV 17/19
FV 24/26
SV 24/26
S 50
S 70
S 93
SAB 128 HR
SAB 163 HR
GST 13 - 16 - 20
GST 25 - 31 - 41
GSV 50 L
GSV 64 L
GSV 84 L
GSV 111 L
GSV 147 L
GSV 185 L
GSV 224 L
RWF 270 L
GSV 263 L
GSV 331 L
GSV 339 L
RWF 480 L
GSV 412 L 0153 L
GSV 412 L 0154 L
GSV 562 L 0222 K
GSV 562 L 0222 K
GSV 715 L 0109 XL
GSV 715 L 0110 XL
GSV 900 L
GSV 50 H
GSV 64 H
0178-445 - ENG
Rev. 03.09
UNISAB II 2.03
0178_427_en_2.02.fm
2. Configuration
GSV 84 H
GSV 111 H
GSV 147 H
GSV 185 H
GSV 224 H
RWF 270 H
GSV 263 H
GSV 331 H
GSV 339 H
RWF 480 H
GSV 412 H 0153 L
GSV 412 H 0154 L
GSV 562 H 0222 K
GSV 562 H 0222 K
GSV 715 H 0109 XL
GSV 715 H 0110 XL
GSV 900 H
GSB 84 - GSB 465
SAB 283 L
SAB 283 E
SAB 355 L
SAB 110 SR/LR
Note: Please note that the screw compressors
SV 17/19 and GSB 84 - GSB 465 are not yet supported.
R407C
R744
R 1270
R 290
R000
For R407C (and all other refrigerants) the converted pressure is always shown as dew point values.
Before the user-defined refrigerant R000 is chosen, the refrigerant curve must be entered in picture SETUP I CALIBRATION I DEF. REFRIGERANT R000. See also section Compressor control and surveillance, Define refrigerant R000.
Pos. 3: CONTROL ON:
SUCTION
BRINE
DISCHARGE
HOT WATER
EXT. COOL
EXT. HEAT
SUCTION: Pressure is measured by the built-in
pressure transducer on the compressor suction side.
Set point is set in the picture
SUCT.PRESS I PARAMETER.
Note: Choose GVS/RWF L for compressors with

low volume range (1.7 - 3.0) and GSV/RWF H
for compressors with high volume range (2.2 5.0). See compressor name plate for indication af
volume range.
BRINE:
Pos. 2: REFRIGERANT
NOT-DEF.
R717
R22
R502
R23
R404A
R134A
R507
R410A
DISCHARGE:
Pressure is measured by the built-in
pressure transducer on the compressor discharge side.
Set point is set in the picture
DISCH.PRES I PARAMETER.
0178-445 - ENG
Rev. 03.09
Temperature is measured by an extra Pt 100 sensor in the water output

of the evaporator.
Set point is set in the picture BRINE
TEMP. I PARAMETER.
HOT WATER:
Temperature is measured by an extra Pt 100 sensor in the water output
of the condenser. Set point is set in
33/222
UNISAB II 2.03
2. Configuration
the picture BRINE I BRINE TEMP.

I PARAMETERS.
EXT.COOL: At this stage it is possible to connect
an external 4-20 mA transducer as
cooling function, ie at a rising signal
the compressor will load capacity.
Furthermore, select EXTERNAL INPUT SIGNAL in picture SETUP I
CALIB I 4-20 mA input. The points
4 mA as well as 20 mA must be set
as the max (20 mA) and min (4 mA)
values of the sensor.
If NO is selected, start compressor manually

even though in AUTO/REMOTE. Howver, during operation compressor regulates automatically.
Pos. 6 :AUTO STOP
NO
YES
If YES is selected, compressor will stop automatically at minimum capacity by decreasing demand.
Select BRINE I EXT. INPUT I PARAMETER and enter regulator set

point, neutral zone and prop.band.
If NO is selected, compressor must be stopped

manually even if AUTO or REMOTE has been selected in COMPRESSOR CTRL. MODE.
See also section Regulators
Pos. 7: PRELUBRICATION (screw compr.)

NO
YES
EXT.HEAT: At this stage it is possible to connect

an external 4-20 mA transducer as
heating function, ie at a falling signal
the compressor will load capacity.
Select EXTERNAL INPUT SIGNAL
in picture SETUP I CALIB I 4-20
mA input. The points 4 mA as well as
20 mA must be set as the max (20
mA) and min (4 mA) values of the
sensor.
Select BRINE I EXT. INPUT I PARAMETER and enter regulator set
point, neutral zone and prop.band.
See also section Regulators
Pos. 4: VOLUME RATIO (screw compr.)
MANUAL/AUTO
If AUTO is selected, compressor must be fitted
with solenoid valves, etc for automatic regulation
of Vi slide.
Pos. 5: AUTO START
NO
YES
34/222
If YES is selected, compressor will start by itself in

AUTO/REMOTE depending on what is required.
Regulation is now automatic.
a.
Select YES for SAB Mk1, SAB Mk3,

SAB 202, SAB 250, SAB 330, VMY Mk3,
VMY Mk2, FV 19, SV 24/26 and FV 24/26.
Prelubrication time is set in picure TIMERS I
TIMER SETUP.
b.
Select NO for all other screw compressors.
When compressor has received starting signal,

prelubrication will start. When prelubrication is
completed, compressor will start. See also section
Timer Setup, which includes time settings.
Pos. 8: FULL FLOW PUMP (screw compr.)
NO
YES
Select YES for VMY Mk3 compressor provided it
is fitted with FULL FLOW PUMP.
Select NO for all other compressor types.
Use pump for prelubrication before start-up and to
maintain minimum oil pressure during operation.
At the same time remember to set set points 1 and
2, which determine at which pressure levels the
0178-445 - ENG
Rev. 03.09
UNISAB II 2.03
2. Configuration
pump is going to start and stop. Select picture OIL

PRESS I PARAMETER.
XX
LOW WARNING
XX
SET POINT 1
XX
SET POINT 1
XX
SET POINT 1 is the pressure at which the pump

will start; SELECT 5.5 Bar.
will stop; SELECT 7.0 Bar.
For more details, see Compressor control and
surveillance.
0178_427_en_2.02.fm
Pos. 9: BOOSTER (screw compr.)

NO
YES
YES means that the oil pump will run continuously
during compressor operation. The capacity slide
can thus be moved at low pressure conditions.
Note that both SAB Mk3, SAB 202, VMY Mk3,
SV/FV and GSV/SGC compressors are fitted with
differential pressure controlled oil pumps (see table 1) and consequently do not use this configuration point.
Pos.10: COMPR. NO. 1 to 14
This no must be entered into UNISAB II. The compressor has now been "named".
Two compressors must under no circumstances have the same number.
Pos. 11: PREF. MASTER
START#
COMPR#
COMPR#: If COMPR# is selected, the compressor with the lowest no (pos 10) will always be the
regulator in a MULTISAB system, independent of
the starting sequence.
0178-445 - ENG
Rev. 03.09
START#: If START# is selected, the compressor

which has the lowest starting number and which is
in REMOTE (MULTISAB) will be the regulator.
Pos. 12: ECONOMIZER (screw compr.)
NO
YES
If the compressor is connected to an economizer,
this function must be selected. Thus the economizer is connected/disconnected according to the
compressor operation. The connection is important as regards the regulation of the compressor
volume ratio.
Pos. 13: ECO LO CAP (screw compr.)
0 to 100%
If the immediate slide position is higher than the
set value, connect the economizer. If the slide position is 20% below this value, disconnect the
economizer again.
Pos. 14: ECO HI SUCT (screw compr.)
-100 to +100C/R
With ECO operation it is possible to enter a suction pressure value in C/R. If the suction pressure
of the economizer is above this value, the solenoid valves connected in the economizer system
will be closed. Hysteresis of 2C/R.
By a combined ECO and HLI operation the set
value must not be above -20C/R.
Pos. 15: COMMON EVAP/COND
N/N
N/Y
Y/N
Y/Y
This point can be configured to the following four
values:
N/N - separate evaporator and condenser for
each compressor.
N/Y - separate evaporator for each compressor,
35/222
UNISAB II 2.03
2. Configuration
but common condenser.

Y/N - common evaporator, but separate condenser for each compressor.
Y/Y - common evaporator and condenser for each
plant (ie compressors with a MULTISAB system
no).
On plants with a common evaporator the suction
pressure limiter cannot start the next compressor
in the sequence. This is only possible if a separate
evaporator has been configured.
On plants with a common condenser the discharge limiter cannot start the next compressor in
the sequence. This is only possible on plants with
separate condensers.
Pos. 16: HP ON TWO STAGE
NO
YES
Usually NO is chosen
In special cases on a two-stage plant YES can be
selected for HP compressors. The compressors
can thus be forced to start by means of the input
"External starting permission".
Please note that the compressor does not stop
before the starting permission has been removed
even though there is no cooling requirement. See
detailed description in section Compressor control
and surveillance, HP on TWO-STAGE
Pos. 17: WATER COOLED (recip.compr.)
NO
YES
36/222
Water cooling output is activated by a rising discharge pipe temperature. The set point for this
value is set in picture DISCH. TEMP I PARAMETER, SET POINT 1. The set point has fixed hysteresis of 5K.
Ex.: Sp 1 = 100C:
Cooling starts at 100C and stops at (100-5) =
95C.
Water cooling output is closed at compressor stop
according to adjustable time delay. In picture TIMERS I TIMER SETUP adjust time delay OIL
COOL ON.
Intermediate pressure liquid injection (twostage reciprocating compressors)
The intermediate pressure liquid injection for
TSMC/TCMO compressors is active whenever
the compressor is configured to TCMO or TSMC.
The solenoid valve for intermediate pressure liquid injection is activated when the compressor has
started and the discharge pipe temperature gets
too high.
The set point for this value is entered in picture:
DISCH.TEMP I PARAMETER, SET POINT 2.
The set point has fixed hysterisis of 5K.
Ex.: Sp2 = 90C. Cooling starts at 90C and stops
at (90-5) = 85C.
Adjusting range: -20C-+150C.
Factory value: 100C.
The regulator controls the solenoid valve through
the liquid injection digital output.
0178-445 - ENG
Rev. 03.09
UNISAB II 2.03
2. Configuration
Pos. 18: Oil cooling - setting

No.
Type of regulator
Minimum
Maximum
Factory
setting
Unit
RECIPROCATING COMPRESSORS
0178_427_en_2.02.fm
Set point 1/oil temp.

Difference
Oil cooling
+35
+75
+55
5(fixed)
C
C

Difference
Oil heating
+75
+35
5(fixed)
C
C
Set point 1/disch.pipe

temp. Difference
Water cooling
-20
+150
+100
5(fixed)
C
C
Set point 2/disch.pipe

temp. Difference
Interm.pressure
liquid injection
-20
+150
+100
5(fixed)
SCREW COMPRESSORS
2
Set point 1/oiltemp.

Difference
Oil cooling,
normal
+35
+75
+50
5(fixed)
C
C
Set point 1/disch. pipe

temp. Difference
HLI/BLI cooling
-20
+150
+40
2(fixed)
C
C

Neutral zone
Prop.band
Oil cooling
Three-way valve
+35
0
0
+75
100
100
+50
4
5
C
C
C
Set point 1/pressure pipe

temp.
Neutral zone
Prop. Band
AKV (HLI) oil cooling
-20
+150
40
0
1
10
100
0
10
C
C
0178-445 - ENG
Rev. 03.09
37/222
UNISAB II 2.03
2. Configuration
for oil cooling, which is regulated according

to oil temperature. The set point for this
value is set in picture OIL TEMP I PARAMETER. SET POINT, NEUTRAL ZONE and
PROPORTIONAL BAND can now be set.
This regulator is usually not used. However,
it can be used provided that a valve with motor drive is fitted.
Pos. 18: OIL COOLING

1)
NONE
2)
NORMAL (Screw and recip. compr.)
3)
HLI/BLI (Screw compressors)
4)
TH.PUMP (Thermo pump, reciprocating

compr.)
5)
THREE-WAY (Screw compressor)
6)
AKV
1)
NONE
Oil cooling disconnected.
2)
NORMAL
Oil cooling output is activated by rising oil
temperature.
The set point for this value is set in picture
OIL TEMP I PARAMETER I SETPOINT
1. The set point has fixed hysteresis of 5K.
Ex.: Set point 1 = 40C:

Cooling starts at 40C and stops at (40-5) = 35C.
Oil cooling output is closed at compressor stop according to adjustable time delay. In picture TIMERS I TIMER SETUP adjust time delay OIL
COOL ON.
3)
HLI/BLI
Oil cooling output is activated by rising discharge temperature.
The set point for this value is set in picture
DISCH.TEMP I PARAMETER, SET
POINT 1. The set point has a fixed hysteresis of 2K.
Ex.: Set point 1 = 40C:

Cooling starts at 40C and stops at (40-2) = 38C.
4)
TH.PUMP
Output for activating thermo pump takes
place at compressor start-up. No regulation
is connected to this function.
5)
THREE-WAY
Used for controlling three-way motor valve
38/222
6)
AKV
Direct regulation of HLI cooling by pulse
width modulated AKV valve. During a period
of 6 seconds, the AKV valve is kept open
from 0 to 6 seconds depending on the regulator output signal.
The HLI-AKV cooling outlet is activated by rising

discharge pipe temperature.
The set point for discharge pipe temperature is
adjusted in the parameter picture DISCH.TEMP
I PARAMETER, SET POINT 1.
In the same picture NEUTRAL ZONE and PROPORTIONAL BAND can be adjusted.
Example:
Set point 1= 60C
Neutral Zone= 4C
Proportional Band= 5C
The regulator keeps the discharge pipe temperature between 58C and 62C.
Pos.19: RANGE M. CURR 0 to 2500A
This value can be read on the current transformer
at the compressor motor guard (not on the compressor motor) so that the 0-1 Amp. signal is read
correctly on UNISAB II as the current absorbed by
the motor.
Enter current in picture MOTOR I MOTOR
CURR I PARAMETER. Any indication errors can
be eliminated from the reading on the display by
multiplying the measuring range with a correcting
0178-445 - ENG
Rev. 03.09
UNISAB II 2.03
2. Configuration
factor:
Correction =
Measured current
Display reading
before entering the current in the UNISAB II display.

Pos. 20: SWEPT VOLUME
0 to 12000 m3/h
The compressor swept volume must be entered in
plants which only consist of:
Screw compressors
Screw and reciprocating compressors in the

same system.
0178_427_en_2.02.fm
On plants consisting solely of reciprocating compressors the above is not relevant.

Read the swept volume on the compressor name
plate.
Pos. 21: COLD STORE
NO
YES
If this function is chosen, it will affect the way the
MULTISAB system starts and regulates the compressors in a common system. See detailed description under the function Cold store.
Pos. 22: CLIMATE CONTROL
NO
YES
If the compressor is used for water/brine cooling
or for heating water, the flow temperature can be
raised or lowered, depending on the outside temperature.
An extra 4 - 20 mA temperature transducer must
be connected.
For detailed description see section Climatic control.
0178-445 - ENG
Rev. 03.09
Pos. 23: ADD. UNLOAD (reciprocating compr.)

NO
YES
Select YES for SMC compressors fitted with additional solenoid valve for add. unload.
Select NO for all other reciprocating compressors
and always for CMO, TCMO and TSMC.
When the compressor is started, it will still activate
the first capacity stage, but during operation
MAN/AUTO/REMOTE it will be able to unload
down to 0% capacity. To avoid a high oil temperature at this stage of operation, a fixed time limit of
300 seconds which will stop the compressor on
expiry has been corporated.
Pos. 24: BAUD RATE
1200
2400
4800
9600
19200
In this position the speed at which several
UNISAB II units communicate with each other can
be set.
The new UNISAB II allows a communication
speed of up to 19,200 baud.
This only applies to UNISAB II versions manufactured from May 1998 supplied with revision G relay prints (relay no 7 will in such cases be mounted in the socket).
For older UNISAB II units, the maximum is 9600
baud.
Usually always select the highest baud rate that
all units on the network can use.
If UNISAB II is connected with UNISAB I and/or
PROSAB II, adjust speed to 1200 baud.
39/222
UNISAB II 2.03
2. Configuration
Pos. 25: OIL RECTIFIER

NO
YES
The oil rectifying function is used on brine plants
in marine execution. In case this function is selected, check also the timers Oil Rectifying Start, Oil
Rectifying Delay and Oil Rectifying Blocked.
Pos. 26: PRESS/TEMP
BAR/C
PSI/F
KPA/C
Pressure levels and temperatures can be displayed in either SI units: Bar, kPa and C or US
units: PSI and F.
Pos. 27: MECHANICAL ZERO
NO
YES
Only in case the compressor has a built-in spacer
block as well as automatic Vi regulation, MECHANICAL ZERO must be set for YES. In this
way the travel of the capacity slide is automatically
reduced by the percentage (0-40%) entered in
MANUAL ZERO. Thus corrected capacity is calculated and shown correctly - see the following table.
Pos. 28: MANUAL ZERO
0 to 40%
For screw compressors without automatic zero
point setting, it is possible manually to set a "zero
point" below which the compressor capacity slide
is not allowed to fall while the compressor is operating.
In case the compressor has a built-in spacer
block as well as automatic Vi regulation, MANUAL ZERO is used for reducing the travel of the
capacity slide by the entered percentage. Thus
corrected capacity is calculated and shown correctly.
40/222
The value [0-40%] to be entered in MANUAL

ZERO must be of the following size:
Manual zero
Lenght of spacer block 4 x 100
Max movement of capacity slide 2
[%]
See the following table.

For SAB 202, which has automatic zero point setting, the value 0% must be kept in FACT. setting.
See also pos. 27 MECHANICAL ZERO.
Pos. 29: PORT 1
Note that the use of PORT 1 requires UNISAB II
to be fitted with the add-on printed circuit board
UNICOM IF.
NONE
EVOLUTION A1S
EVOLUTION FX2N
Select EVOLUTION A1S or EVOLUTION FX2N if
UNISAB II is to be used as an EVOLUTION control, ie an extended (PLCY) control in which
UNISAB II is integrated with a PLC control.
Select NONE if UNISAB II is to be used as an EVOLUTION control.
Pos. 30: COP ACTIVE
Note that the use of COP ACTIVE requires
UNISAB II to be fitted with the add-on printed circuit board UNICOM IF.
NO
YES
Select YES if UNISAB II is fitted with a function for
COP measuring (Coefficient Of Performance, ie
cooling efficiency of compressor). COP measuring requires an extra card for flow measuring as
well as a motor efficency measuring device, cf
UNISAB II COP Manual.
Select NO if UNISAB II is not used for COP measuring.
0178-445 - ENG
Rev. 03.09
UNISAB II 2.03
2. Configuration
Pos. 31: TAKE OVER (reciprocating

compressors)
NO
YES
Select YES if UNISAB II is configured as a reciprocating compressor, operates in a combined
plant of reciprocating and screw compressors and
the function MULTISAB TAKE OVER/TRANSFER is required.
Pos. 32: CHILLER
NO
YES1) Chiller
2) Evolution
0178_427_en_2.02.fm
Select YES if UNISAB II is used as part of a chiller

unit control, ie UNISAB II and a UNISAB II chiller
control are connected via a communication cable.
See UNISAB II-Chiller Manual.
Always select NO if UNISAB II is not connected to
a UNISAB II chiller
Pos. 33: FACTORY SETTING
NO
YES
With this function it is possible to restore the original values as determined ex factory.
See section Factory settings.
Current configuration as well as calibration values
for pressure transducers and brine temperatures
will remain unchanged.
Pos. 34: VI MODE
70 to 97%
This selection is identical to MOTOR SIZE found

in menu CALIBRATE I CALIBRATE COP. See
section COP setting.
Pos. 36: FLOW FACTOR
0.01 to 10 l/pls
This selection is identical to FLOW FACTOR
found in menu CALIBRATE I CALIBRATE COP.
See section COP setting.
Pos. 37: LIQ. SUBCOOL
0 to 99.9 C
This selection is identical to LIQ. SUBCOOL found
in menu CALIBRATE I CALIBRATE COP. See
section COP setting.
Pos. 38: DANBUSS
YES (not changeable)
Functions as header of the menu Communication.
Shows that the succeeding COMPR. NO and
BAUD RATE refer to the main communication
port, which always runs the Danbuss protocol.
Pos. 39: NODE NO ( Port 1)
0 (not changeable)
When the optional communication port 1 is not
used or used for EVOLUTION (see Pos. 29), the
NODE NO is fixed and cannot therefore be
changed.
Pos. 40: BAUD RATE ( Port 1)
1200 to 38400 baud
Selection of communication speed for the optional
communication port 1 (see Pos. 29).
This point is only relevant for screw compressors

with electrical slide control. See section Electrical
slide control.
Pos. 41: PORT 2

Note that the use of PORT 2 requires UNISAB II
to be fitted with the add-on printed circuit board
UNICOM IF.
Pos. 35: MOTOR SIZE

0 to 2500 kW or Amp
NONE or QUANTUM
0178-445 - ENG
Rev. 03.09
Select QUANTUM if UNISAB II is to work together

with one or more Quantum compressor control-
41/222
UNISAB II 2.03
2. Configuration
lers (also manufactured by YORK Refrigeration)

and/or with one or more Grammatic 2502 compressor controllers. See also QUANTUM manual
S90-010-M and S90-010-O.
Select NONE, if Port 2 is not used.
Pos. 42: NODE NO (Port 2)
1 to 99
If UNISAB II is to communicate with QUANTUM
(Pos. 41), select a node number which is not identical to any of the Quantum node numbers.
Pos. 43: BAUD RATE (Port 2)
1200 (not changeable)
Selection of communication speed for the optional
communication port 2 (see Pos. 41). As Quantum
reguires 1200 baud fixed, the speed cannot be
changed.
Pos. 44: MOTOR SIGNAL
kW or Amp
When not using UNICOM IF print, the measured
signal can be either an ampere or a kW signal.
In case of Amp signal input, use terminals 35-36
for 0 - 1 Amp AC.
In case of kW signal input, use terminals 35-40 for
4-20 mA DC.
However, it is also possible to use the 4-20 mA
terminals 35-40 for reading Ampere. In this case
choose 4-20 mA in configuration point pos. 53.
Pos. 45: PRESS
- 1/9 - 1/25
-1/25-1/59
Shows the pressure range for pressure transmitters mounted on compressor. Usually -1/9 -1/25 is
selected for ordinary compressor operation (default) and - 1/25 -1/59 for heat pump operation or
operation with R744 (CO2).
42/222
Pos. 46: ROTATUNE

NO
YES
Select YES if UNISAB II is fitted on a compressor
with frequency converter and if this compressor is
to run in sequence with one or more conventional
screw or reciprocating compressors.
Select NO if this compressor is to run in seqence
with another Rotatune compressor.
Note: This function will be active from EPROM
version 2.01 ROTA and later versions.
For further information, please see ROTA Appendix to UNISAB II manual. This appendix describes
the use of frequency converters together with
UNISAB II.
Pos. 47: RANGE MOTOR (kW) 0-2500 kW
POWER
Enter the value corresponding to 20mA input. For
use of Vacon converter, this value is read on the
frequency converter name plate and multiplied by
two so that the 4-20 mA signal is read correctly in
UNISAB II as the motor power. Enter the motor
nominal power in the picture MOTOR I MOTOR
SIZE I PARAMETER.
Pos. 48: MINIMUM FREQUENCY
The minimum number of revolutions which can be
shown on the UNISAB II display when the analog
output signal is 4 mA from the UNICOM IF add-on
printed circuit board to the frequency converter.
The frequency converter must of course be configured correctly, ie in minimum permissible frequency. See converter instruction manual and list
of settings for details. See moreover ROTA Appendix to UNISAB II manual. This appendix describes the use of frequency converters together
with UNISAB II.
0178-445 - ENG
Rev. 03.09
UNISAB II 2.03
2. Configuration
Pos. 49: MAXIMUM FREQUENCY

The maximum number of revolutions which can
be shown on the UNISAB II display when the analog output signal is 20 mA from the UNICOM IF
add-on printed circuit board to the frequency converter. The frequency converter must of course be
configured correctly, ie in maximum permissible
frequency. See converter instruction manual and
list of settings for details. See moreover ROTA
Appendix to UNISAB II manual. This appendix describes the use of frequency converters together
with UNISAB II.
Pos. 50: PROFIBUS
NO
0178_427_en_2.02.fm
YES
If UNISAB II is to communicate with Mitsubishi

PLC (Pos. 50), select node number which is different from the node numbers of the PLC control.
Pos. 52: BAUD RATE
12 mbit (cannot be changed)
Pos. 53: MOTOR INPUT
0 - 1 amp / 4 - 20 mA
Select 0-1 amp when the measured motor current
is supplied from a current transformer with ampere ratio xxx/1 amp connected to the terminals
35-36.
Select 4-20 mA when the measured motor current
is supplied from a 4-20 mA transmitter, for instance a frequency converter or other equipment.
The terminals 35 and 40 are used here.
Only for internal use within YORK Marine

Group.
Pos. 54: CAPACITY/FREQUENCY

Cap.Pos.
Frequency
Select YES if UNISAB II is fitted with UNICOM IF

add-on printed circuit board and is to communicate with Mitsubishi PLC via PROFIBUS communication.
Select Cap.Pos. if the terminal input for capacity

(terminal row 29-30-31) is connected to a capacity
slide transmitter.
Select NO if the above is not the case.

Pos. 51: NODE NO
1 to 254
0178-445 - ENG
Rev. 03.09
Select Frequency if the terminal input for capacity

(terminal row 29-30-31) is connected to a frequency converter so that changes in the motor frequency are shown as changes in the capacity.
43/222
UNISAB II 2.03
2. Configuration
Table 2.1
Screw compressor
type
1
SAB 110SM
SAB 110SF
SAB 110 LM
SAB 110 LF
Max movement
Evaporating
of capacity slide temp.R717/R22
2
3
mm
SAB 128 HM Mk3
Mechanical
zero
5
(pos 27)
Manual
zero
6
(pos 28)
84.5
< -20C
22
NO
0%
96
> -20C
NONE
NO
FACT 0%
< -20C
31.5
NO
0%
> -20C
NONE
NO
FACT 0%
< -20C
38.5
NO
0%
> -20C
NONE
NO
FACT0%
< -20C
38.5
YES
24 %
> -20C
NONE
NO
FACT 0%
245
ALL
NONE
**
NO
*
FACT 0%
317
ALL
NONE
**
NO
*
FACT 0%
Not
relevant
Not
relevant
Not
relevant
Not
relevant
Not
relevant
Not
relevant
Not
relevant
Not
relevant
SAB 128 HM Mk2

SAB 128 HF Mk2
Length of
spacer block
4
mm
126
SAB 128 HF Mk3

SAB 163 M Mk1, Man Vi
SAB 163 F Mk1, Man Vi
SAB 163 HM Mk2, Man Vi
SAB 163 HF Mk2, Man Vi
160
SAB 163 HM Mk3, Man Vi

SAB 163 HF Mk3, Man Vi
SAB 163 HM Mk2, Aut Vi
SAB 163 HF Mk2, Aut Vi
SAB 163 HM Mk3, Aut Vi
160
SAB 163 HF Mk3, Aut Vi

SAB 202 SM, Man Vi
SAB 202 SF, Man Vi
SAB 202 SM, Aut Vi
SAB 202 SF, Aut Vi
SAB 202 LM, Man Vi
SAB 202 LF, Man Vi
SAB 202 LM, Aut Vi
SAB 202 LF, Aut Vi
SAB 283 L
314
SAB 283 E
391
SAB 355 L
350
SAB 330 S
262
SAB 330 L
371
SAB 330 E
480
* If another value than the factory set value of 0% is inserted, the automatic zero setting is eliminated.
Therefore, only insert a value different from 0% after having contacted YORK Refrigeration.
44/222
0178-445 - ENG
Rev. 03.09
UNISAB II 2.03
2. Configuration
0178_427_en_2.02.fm
** If another value than NO is inserted, the automatic zero setting is eliminated.

Therefore, only insert a value different from No after having contacted YORK Refrigeration.
0178-445 - ENG
Rev. 03.09
45/222
UNISAB II 2.03
2. Configuration
46/222
0178-445 - ENG
Rev. 03.09
UNISAB II 2.03
3. Alarms and Warnings

Analog alarms and warnings
ALARM and WARNING limits can be set separately as described in section Changing the set
values.
0178_428_en.fm
UNISAB II does not check whether ALARM and

WARNING limits have been interchanged by a
mistake (eg if warning limit for high discharge
pressure is set higher than the alarm limit). Consequently, during adjustments check that the
settings are correct.
If a warning limit is exceeded, the red light diode
above the D key will begin to flash slowly, and
the warning relay will be activated. The reason for
the warning can be seen in the picture WARNING,
which also shows whether there are several simultaneous warnings.
Note that in case of warning, a limiter might be active as described in section Limiting functions.
When the warning disappears, it is automatically
removed from the picture WARNING and the relay returns to its normal position.
0178-445 - ENG
Rev. 03.09
In case an alarm limit is exceeded, the compressor will stop immediately. The red light diode
above the D key will start to flash quickly. In the
picture ALARM the reason for the alarm can be
read, and at the same time the alarm relay will
change its position.
The alarm relay works by connecting the
alarm/common switch during alarm and by disconnecting it once the alarm is reset.
The picture ALARM also shows the exact time of
the alarm. See also under Diagnosis.
The alarm is reset by pressing the D key, and the
warning and alarm relays will return to their normal position. However, if the alarm value is still
outside the limit, the red light diode will continue to
flash. When the situation has returned to normal,
the D key must be pressed once more,
The set values for high and low alarms as well as
the factory values are stated in the following tables 1-5. These are followed by explanatory
notes.
47/222
UNISAB II 2.03
Table 1
Screw compressors
Measured and calculated pressure levels
Measuring
Min
Max
Factory
Note
3+4+5
3+4+5
3+4+5
Suction pressure
(bar)
High alarm
High warning
Low warning
Low alarm
1.5
-1.0
-1.0
9.0
6.0
6.0
5.0
1.5
1.0
Discharge pressure
(bar)
High alarm
High warning
Low warning
Low alarm
4.0
3.0
-1.0
24.0
22.0
-1.0
16.0
15.0
-1.0
1+6
1+6
Oil pressure (bar)

Calculated value
SAB Mk 1 compressors
Low warning
Low alarm
1.5
1.0
6.0
5.0
4.0
2.5
2+7
2+7
Oil pressure (bar)

Calculated value
SAB Mk 2 compressors
Low warning
Low alarm
0.0
0.0
6.0
5.0
0.0
0.0
2+9
2+9
Oil pressure (bar)

Calculated value
SAB Mk 3, Mk 4 compressors
SAB 202, 283, 330, 355
FV 19, SV 24/26, FV 24/26
Low warning
Low alarm
1.0
0.5
6.0
5.0
1.5
1.2
2+9
2+9
Set point 1
Set point 2
0.0
0.0
10.0
10.0
2.5
4.0
21
21
Oil pressure (bar)

Calculated value
VMY Mk 2-2.5 compressor
Low warning
Low alarm
1.5
1.0
6.0
5.0
2.0
1.5
2+9+17
2+9+17
Oil pressure(bar)
Calculated value
VMY Mk 3 compressors
Low warning
Low alarm
Set point 1
Set point 2
1.5
1.0
0.0
0.0
6.0
5.0
10.0
10.0
4.0
3.0
5.5
7.0
2+9
2+9
22
22
Oil pressure (bar)

Calculated value
SAB 80
Low warning
Low alarm
Set point 1
Set point 2
1.5
1.0
0.0
0.0
6.0
5.0
10.0
20.0
2.0
1.5
0.5
16.0
2+9
2+9
20
20
Diff. pressure
across oil filter (bar)
Calculated value
All types but SAB 80
High alarm
Low warning
0.0
0.0
1.5
1.3
1.0
0.7
2+11
2+11
Diff. pressure
across oil filter (bar)
Calculated value
SAB80
High alarm
High warning
0.0
0.0
2.5
2.2
1.6
1.4
2+11+19
2+11+19
48/222
1+5
0178-445 - ENG
Rev. 03.09
UNISAB II 2.03
Table 2
Screw compressors
Measured and calculated temperatures
0178_428_en.fm
Measuring
Min
Max
Factory
Note
Discharge temp.
(C)
High alarm
High warning
Low warning
Low alarm
60.0
50.0
-65.0
-
130.0
120,0
-65.0
-
100.0
90.0
-65.0
-
1+6
1+6
Oil temperature
(C)
High alarm
High warning
Low warning
Low alarm
40.0
30.0
10.0
0.0
80.0
70.0
50.0
40.0
60.0
55.0
25.0
20.0
2+7
2+7
2+7
2+7
Brine temperature
(C)
High alarm
High warning
Low warning
Low alarm
-60.0
-60.0
-100.0
-100.0
100,0
100.0
100.0
100.0
60.0
50.0
4.0
2.0
1+6
1+6
1+6
1+6
Suction gas superheat

(C)
High alarm
High warning
Low warning
Low alarm
6.0
5.0
0.0
0.0
120.0
120.0
40.0
40.0
110.0
100.0
2.0
0.0
2+7+12
2+7+12
2+7+10
2+7+10
Low warning
Low alarm
5.0
0.0
40.0
40.0
10.0
0.0
2+7+10
2+7+10
Min
Max
Factory
Note
-999.9
-999.9
-999.9
-999.9
999.9
999.9
999.9
999.9
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
3+18
3+18
3+18
3+18
Calculated value
Disch. gas superheat
(C)
Calculated value
4-20 m Auxiliary input signal

Measuring
Auxiliary input
(4-20 mA)
0178-445 - ENG
Rev. 03.09
High alarm
High warning
Low warning
Low alarm
49/222
UNISAB II 2.03
Table 3
Reciprocating compressors
Measured and calculated pressure levels
Measuring
Min
Max
Factory
Note
3+4+5
3+4+5
3+4+5
Suction pressure
(bar)
High alarm
High warning
Low warning
Low alarm
1.5
-1.0
-1.0
9.0
6.0
6.0
5.0
2.5
1.5
Discharge pressure
(bar)
High alarm
High warning
Low warning
Low alarm
4.0
3.0
-1.0
24.0
22.0
-1.0
16.0
15.0
-1.0
1+6
1+6
Intermediatepressure
(bar)
For two-stage
compressors only
High alarm
High warning
Low warning
Low alarm
4.0
3.0
-1.0
-1.0
24.0
22.0
10.0
10.0
7.0
6.0
-1.0
-1.0
1+6
1+6
1+6+16
1+6+16
Oil pressure (bar)
High alarm
High warning
Low warning
Low alarm
5.0
5.0
0.5
0.5
7.0
7.0
5.0
5.0
6.0
5.5
4.0
3.5
2+5+16
2+5
2+5+14
2+5+14
Min
60.0
50.0
-65.0
40.0
30.0
0.0
0.0
-60.0
-60.0
-100.0
-100.0
50.0
50.0
-20.0
-20.0
Max
155.0
155.0
-65.0
105.0
105.0
50.0
40.0
100.0
100.0
100.0
100.0
155.0
120.0
50.0
50.0
Factory
125.0
120.0
-65.0
80.0
75.0
30.0
25.0
60.0
50.0
4.0
2.0
100.0
95.0
4.0
2.0
Note
1+6
1+6
Calculated value
1+5
Table 4
Measuring
Discharge temp.
(C)
Oil temperature
(C)
Brine temperature
(C)
Intermediate gas
temperature (C)
For two-stage
compressors only
50/222
High alarm
High warning
Low warning
Low alarm
High alarm
High warning
Low warning
Low alarm
High alarm
High warning
Low warning
Low alarm
High alarm
High warning
Low warning
Low alarm
2
2
2+7
2+7
1+6
1+6
1+6
1+6
2+7
2+7
2+7
2+7
0178-445 - ENG
Rev. 03.09
UNISAB II 2.03
Measuring
(C)
Calculated value
(C)
Calculated value
High alarm
High warning
Low warning
Low alarm
Low warning
Low alarm
Min
6.0
5.0
0.0
0.0
5.0
0.0
Max
120.0
120.0
40.0
40.0
40.0
40.0
Factory
110.0
100.0
4.0
2.0
10.0
0.0
Note
2+7
2+7
2+7+13
2+7+13
2+7+10
2+7+10
Min
Max
Factory
Note
-999.9
-999.9
-999.9
-999.9
999.9
999.9
999.9
999.9
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
3+18
3+18
3+18
3+18
Min
Max
Factory
Note
3+4+5
3+4+5
3+4+5

Measuring
Auxiliary input
(4-20 mA)
High alarm
High warning
Low warning
Low alarm
Table 5
0178_428_en.fm
Reciprocating compressors HPO/HPC

Measured and calculated pressure levels and
temperatures
Measuring
Suction pressure
(bar)
High alarm
High warning
Low warning
Low alarm
1.5
-1.0
-1.0
25.0
25.0
25.0
10.0
3.5
2.5
Discharge pressure
(bar)
High alarm
High warning
Low warning
Low alarm
4.0
3.0
-1.0
40.0
40.0
-1.0
35.0
33.0
-1.0
1+6
1+6
High alarm
High warning
Low warning
Low alarm
5.0
5.0
0.5
0.5
7.0
7.0
5.0
5.0
6.0
5.5
4.0
3.5
2+7
2+7
High diff. pressurePc - Pe (bar)

Calculated value
High alarm
High warning
26.0
25.2
1+15
Discharge temperature
(C)
High alarm
High warning
Low warning
Low alarm
60.0
50.0
-65.0
-
170.0
170.0
-65.0
-
160.0
155.0
-65.0
-
1+6
1+6
Oil temperature
(C)
High alarm
High warning
Low warning
Low alarm
40.0
30.0
0.0
0.0
105.0
105.0
70.0
70.0
95.0
90.0
55.0
50.0
2
2
2+7
2+7
Oil pressure
(bar)
Calculated value
0178-445 - ENG
Rev. 03.09
1+5
51/222
UNISAB II 2.03
Measuring
Min
Max
Factory
Note
Water temperature
(C)
High alarm
High warning
Low warning
Low alarm
-20
-20
-20
-20
100.0
100.0
100.0
100.0
75.0
70.0
4.0
2.0
1+6
1+6
1+6
1+6

(C)
High alarm
High warning
Low warning
Low alarm
6.0
5.0
0.0
0.0
120.0
120.0
40.0
40.0
110.0
100.0
4.0
2.0
2+7
2+7
2+10+13
2+10+13
Low warning
Low alarm
5.0
0.0
40.0
40.0
10.0
0.0
2+7+10
2+7+10
Min
Max
Factory
Note
-999.9
-999.9
-999.9
-999.9
999.9
999.9
999.9
999.9
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
3+18
3+18
3+18
3+18
Calculated value
(C)
Calculated value

Measuring
Auxiliary input
(4-20 mA)
Notes:
Note 1
High alarm
High warning
Low warning
Low alarm
The alarm cannot be switched off until the problem has been solved.
Note 9
Alarm monitoring 45 sec delayed after compressor start.
Note 10
A setting of 0.0 impedes monitoring.
Note 2
The alarm can be switched off immediately (RESET key).
Note 11
Delay of 300 sec, regardless of when

limits are exceeded.
Note 3
The alarm is switched off automatically.
Note 12
Note 4
The safety limits can be entered in

bar or C/R.
The compressor must have been

above 5% capacity. Below 5% capacity monitoring is impeded.
Note 13
Note 14
Delay of 60 sec, regardless of when

limits are exceeded.
Note 15
Only applies to HPO and HPC compressors.
Note 16
Note 17
For VMY Mk 2-2.5, calculate the following (see Fig. 3.1): Oil pressure =
Oil pressure 3 (after oil filter) - Discharge pressure 2. For all other
Note 5
Note 6
Alarm monitoring active when digital

output "compressor starting signal"
has been selected.
Alarm monitoring always active - except when "BLOCKED" has been selected in picture COMPRESSOR
CTRL MODE.
Note 7
Alarm monitoring 300 sec delayed

after compressor start.
Note 8
Alarm monitoring 180 sec delayed

after compressor start.
52/222
0178-445 - ENG
Rev. 03.09
UNISAB II 2.03
compressor types (except for SAB

80, see Note 20), calculate the following: Oil pressure = Oil pressure 3
(after oil filter) - Suction pressure 1 .
Note 18
The limits are not active until AUX.

INPUT SIGNAL has been selected in
the menu CALIBRATION 4-20 mA.
Note 19
For SAB 80 the differential pressure

across the oil filter is calculated as
follows (see Fig. 3.1): Oil filter diff.
pressure = Discharge pressure 2 Oil pressure 4 (after oil filter).
0178_428_en.fm
The shown oil filter pressure will thus

be 0.1 to 0.7 bar higher than the actual pressure loss across the filter
due to the pressure loss across the
oil separator and the oil cooler.
The maximum allowed pressure
drop across the oil filter is 1.2 bar.
Consequently, the warning limit
should be set between 0.8 and 1.4
bar or lower. The alarm limit should
0178-445 - ENG
Rev. 03.09
be set between 1.1 and 1.7 bar or

lower.
Note 20:
Set points 1 and 2 are used for alarm

monitoring of the mechanical oil
pump, cf description of the alarm under "Oil pump error" in section Other
Alarms. For SAB 80, the oil pressure
is calculated as follows (see
Fig. 3.1): Oil pressure = Oil pressure
3 (after pump) - Suction pressure 1.
Note 21:
The set points are used for controlling the oil pump. When the pressure
falls below set point 1, the oil pump
will start. When the pressure exceeds set point 2 for 60 seconds, the
oil pump will stop.
Note 22:
The set points are used for controlling the full flow pump. When the
pressure falls below set point 1, the
full flow pump will start. When the
pressure exceeds set point 2 for 60
seconds, the full flow pump will stop.
53/222
UNISAB II 2.03
Fig. 3.1
SAB 80
Oil
separator
Oil filter
Oil pump
Compressor
Oil cooler
Others
Oil
separator
Oil filter
Oil pump
Compressor
Oil cooler
Suction pressure
Discharge pressure
Oil pressure
(before compressor)
Oil pressure 2
(between pump and filter)
Suction gas superheat, alarm

The superheat alarm is an alarm which in many
cases will protect the compressor against liquid
strokes. However, there are many aspects which
may affect superheating for which reason this
alarm must not be considered as full protection
against liquid strokes.
54/222
If the superheat falls below the set value, the compressor will stop on the relay. However, on R717
pump circulation plants with a short distance between liquid separator and compressor, the suction gas superheat may drop below 0 K during
normal operation.
0178-445 - ENG
Rev. 03.09
UNISAB II 2.03
In such cases adjust LOW ALARM to 0, thus

making it inactive.
alarm will be issued. The compressor will

stop.
3)
Auxiliary input signal (4-20 mA)

The alarm and warning limits are activated when
AUX. INPUT SIGNAL has been selected under
CALIBRATION 4-20 mA.
Other alarms and warnings

Oil system error (screw compressors)
0178_428_en.fm
The reason for the alarm is that the oil float switch
is not activated within the time set in the timer OIL
FLOW during prelubrication; or that there is a
drop-out on the oil float switch for a longer period
than the one set in the timer NO OIL during operation.
If the compressor is REMOTE CONTROLLED by a PC/PLC-system, a warning will

be issued as well. The monitoring is possible by means of a 4-20 mA signal in the aux.
input or via communication.
The reason for the difference between situation 1) and 2) is: If the system runs in sequence - REMOTE (MULTISAB), the compressor must be stopped to start any subsequent compressors in the sequence.
When a compressor is remote controlled (3)
it is not a part of the sequence - REMOTE
(MULTISAB) system - thus stopping this
compressor will not start up subsequent
compressors.
Capacity error (screw compressors)
PMS error
The reason for the alarm is that the capacity slide

is not below 5% within the time set in the timer
SLIDE MAX at compressor stop; or that the slide
- during operation - has not moved within 30 mins,
although the regulator is to regulate up or down
and the output signal from the regulator is above
20%; or that the slide - in connection with automatic setting of variable zero point - cannot reach
the position corresponding to calculated or adjusted zero point (ie positive read capacity) before the
expiry of the timer "cap.negative".
If the control is to start the compressor and consequently adjusts the output START REQUEST
(PMS) to ON, the input START REQUEST OK
must be set on ON within the time set in the timer
PMS FEEDBACK - or the alarm will be activated.
1)
If the compressor is set on "MAN" or "AUTO" and in operation, and the slide does not
react to the regulating signal within 30 mins,
a warning will be issued. The compressor
does not stop.
2)
If the compressor is set on "REMOTE" and

in operation, and the slide does not react to
the regulating signal within 30 mins, an
0178-445 - ENG
Rev. 03.09
No starting permission
The reason for the warning is that the regulator in
REMOTE/MULTISAB cannot start this compressor, even though the regulator demands more capacity and this compressor is the next in line to
start. The reason is that AUTO START has not
been configured to YES, or the input EXTERNAL
STARTING PERMISSION-NORMAL STOP is not
ON.
Compressor motor error

The reason for the warning is that feedback from
the motor is not set/does not disappear within the
time set in the timer MOTOR START when the
55/222
UNISAB II 2.03
compressor motor is started/stopped (ie the output compressor start is activated/deactivated), or

that feedback from the motor disappears even
briefly during operation.
The alarm may also occur at compressor start if
the emergency stop or an optional high pressure
control has been activated.
Compressor motor overload

The reason for the alarm is that, within the time set
in the timer CURR OVERL, a motor current has
been measured continually. This current exceeds
the highest of the set point values that have been
set in SET POINT 1 and SET POINT 2 for MOTOR CURR.
Discharge pressure, overload

The reason for the alarm is that, within the time set
in the timer DISCH.PRES, OVERLOAD, a discharge pressure level has been measured continually. This pressure level exceeds the warning
limit for high discharge pressure.
High motor temperature

The reason for the alarm is that the input THERMISTOR is open, ie the load on the input is above
3990 .
Oil pump error (SAB 80)

The reason for the alarm is that the differential
pressure across the mechanical oil pump is too
low, ie lower than 0.5 Bar. This value can be set
as set point 1 for the oil pressure.
The alarm is delayed 45 seconds after compressor start (same timer as for "low oil pressure").
The alarm is only activated when the discharge
pressure is lower than 16 Bar. This value can be
set as set point 2 for the oil pressure.
At a discharge pressure level of approx 16 Bar,
the pump cannot be expected to generate a positive relative pressure because of the shunt valve.
There is therefore no alarm surveillance of the differential pressure across the oil pump.
Full flow pump error (screw

compressors)
The reason for the alarm is that feedback of the
full flow pump motor is not set/does not disappear
within the time set in the timer FULL FLOW M,
when the motor starts/stops (ie the output full flow
pumps start is activated/deactivated), or that
feedback from the motor disappears even briefly
during operation.
The alarm functions as a warning during operation, ie after the prelubrication sequence has been
completed.
Oil pump error (screw compressors)

The reason for the alarm is that feedback from the
oil pump motor is not set/does not disappear within the time set in the timer OIL PUMP M. when the
compressor starts/stops (ie the output oil pump
start is activated/deactivated), or that feedback
from the motor disappears even briefly during operation.
The alarm functions as a warning during operation, ie after the prelubrication sequence has been
completed.
56/222
Cooling fan error

The alarm will be activated when feedback from
the electrical cooling fan motor is not set/disappears within the time limit set in the timer FULL
FLOW M. when the motor is started/stopped (ie
the cooling fan is activated/deactivated), or when
feedback from the motor disappears even briefly
during operation.
0178-445 - ENG
Rev. 03.09
UNISAB II 2.03
Oil rectifier error (screw compressors)
Limiting discharge temperature
The reason for the alarm is that suction gas superheat has not exceeded the value set in SET
POINT 1 before the timer RECT. DISABL has expired, although the OIL RECTIFIER has been set
and the compressor is running.
The warning indicates that the discharge pipe

temperature limiter is active. See section Limiting
functions, High discharge pipe temperature.
Wrong starting number in sequence

The reason for the warning is that two or more
compressors have got the same starting number
and the same system number.
Error in diagnosis - EEPROM
0178_428_en.fm
The reason for the alarm is that it has become impossible to read and write in the serial EPROM
(EEPROM) fitted on the CPU card, ie the serial
EPROM is either missing or defective.
Limiting suction pressure

The warning indicates that the suction pressure
limiter is active, ie the suction pressure is within
the limiter neutral zone or below the warning limit.
No communication to Chiller
The alarm/warning will only be activated if
UNISAB II is configured as part of a Chiller control, ie as SETUP I CONFIG I CHILLER = YES.
The alarm will only be activated if the communication between UNISAB II and the connected Chiller
disappears for a longer period than the one set in
the timer NO CHILLER.
Chiller, alarm from Chiller

The alarm will only be activated if UNISAB II is
configured as part of a Chiller control, ie as
SETUP I CONFIG I CHILLER = YES.
The alarm will be activated if the alarm of the connected Chiller goes off.
Watch the oil pressure
The warning indicates that the discharge pressure

limiter is active, ie the discharge pressure is within
the limiter neutral zone or above the warning limit.
The warning will appear if the oil pump for oil

charging is started by means of the picture
TIMERS I OIL CHARGING
and the compressor is in operation at the same
time.
Limiting brine temperature
Vi position error
The warning indicates that the brine temperature

limiter is active, ie the brine temperatureis within
the limiter neutral zone or below the warning limit.
The alarm will only be activated if UNISAB II is

configured for automatic Vi regulation, ie
SETUP I CONFIG I VOLUME RATIO = AUTO
Limiting discharge pressure
Limiting hot water

The warning indicates that the hot water temperature limiter is active, ie the hot water temperature
is within the limiter neutral zone or above the
warning limit.
0178-445 - ENG
Rev. 03.09
The alarm indicates that the display of capacity in

connection with automatic Vi regulation is incorrect. The real capacity of the compressor is lower
than the one shown in the display.
57/222
UNISAB II 2.03
Evolution, alarm from PLC
The alarm will only be activated if there is no communication between UNISAB II and the connected PLC.
Evolution, warning from PLC

The alarm/warning will only appear if UNISAB II is
configured as part of an Evolution control, ie as
SETUP I CONFIG. I COMMUNICATIONS I
PORT 1 = EVOLUTION XXX
The alarm will be activated if the alarm of the connected PLC goes off.
Evolution, no communication to PLC

The alarm will only appear if UNISAB II is configured as part of an Evolution control, ie as SETUP
I CONFIG. I COMMUNICATIONS I PORT 1 =
EVOLUTION XXX
Low lubricating pressure monitoring

(screw compressor)
The reason for this alarm is that the differential
pressure across the compressor and thus the effective lubricating pressure is too low. The differential pressure is calculated in the following way:
measured oil pressure - 1.1 x suction pressure.
The differential pressure must be higher that the
set alarm limit for low oil pressure, see the drawing below. A warning will be issued after 25 seconds and an alarm after 145 seconds.
Fig. 3.2
LOW LUBRICATING PRESSURE
Pomeasured - 1.1 x
P suc < lim A
No
t1 > 25 sec
yes
yes
WARNING
Pomeasured = Measured oil

pressure
lim A = Alarm for low oil pressure
LOW LUBRICATING
PRESSURE
No
t1 > 145 sec
ALARM
Yes
RESET
t1 = 0
t1 = 145 sec fixed
No
58/222
0178-445 - ENG
Rev. 03.09
UNISAB II 2.03
Table 6
Identification numbers for alarms / warnings
This is a list of alarms and warnings with identification numbers for both screw and reciprocating compressors.
Designation
Screw compr.
Recipr. compr.
Id
Low suction pressure
Warn + alrm
Warn + alrm
31
High suction pressure
Warn only
Warn only
32
Low suction gas superheat
Warn + alrm
Warn + alrm
33
High suction gas superheat
Warn + alrm
Warn + alrm
34
Low discharge pressure
Alrm only
Alrm only
35
High discharge pressure
Warn + alrm
Warn + alrm
36
High discharge temperature
Warn + alrm
Warn + alrm
37
Low oil pressure (differential pressure)
Warn + alrm
Warn + alrm
38
Low brine / intermed. gas temperature
Warn + alrm
Warn + alrm
39
Warn only
Warn only
40
Low oil temperature
Warn + alrm
Warn + alrm
41
High oil temperature
Warn + alrm
Warn + alrm
42
High oil filter differential pressure
Warn + alrm
43
Oil system error ( oil flow switch )
Alrm only
44
Warn + alrm 1)
45
0178_428_en.fm
Low discharge temperature
Capacity error
Compressor motor overload
Alrm only
Alrm only
46
Compressor motor error/emergency stop/HP
Alrm only
Alrm only
47
Oil pump error
Warn + alrm 2) 4)
48
High motor temperature (thermistor)
Alrm only
Alrm only
49
PMS error
Alrm only
Alrm only
55
No starting permission
Warn only
Warn only
56
Warn + alrm 3)
57
Warn + alrm
58
High oil pressure
Warn + alrm
59
High intermed. pressure
Warn + alrm
60
Low intermed. pressure
Warn + alrm
61
High differential pressure (Pc - Pe)

High brine / intermed. gas temperature
Full flow pump error
0178-445 - ENG
Rev. 03.09
Warn + alrm
Warn + alrm 2)
62
59/222
UNISAB II 2.03
Designation
Screw compr.
Recipr. compr.
Id
63
Oil rectifier error
Warn only
Wrong starting number in sequence
Warn only
Warn only
65
Error in diagnosis - EEPROM
Alrm only
Alrm only
66
Low auxiliary input signal (univ. reg.)
Warn + alrm
Warn + alrm
67
High auxiliary input signal (univ. reg)
Warn + alrm
Warn + alrm
68
Low discharge gas superheat
Warn + alrm
Warn + alrm
69
Discharge gas overload
Alrm only
Alrm only
70
Evolution, alarm from PLC
Alrm only
Alrm only
71
Evolution, no communication to PLC
Alrm only
Alrm only
72
Limiter, suction pressure
Warn only
Warn only
73
Limiter, discharge pressure
Warn only
Warn only
74
Limiter, brine temperature
Warn only
Warn only
75
Limiter, hot water
Warn only
Warn only
76
Evolution, warning from PLC
Warn only
Warn only
77
Limiter, discharge temperature
Warn only
Warn only
78
Watch the oil pressure
Warn only
Common alarm from Chiller
Alrm only
Alrm only
80
Warn + alrm
Warn + alrm
81
Chiller, no communication to Chiller
64
79
Cooling fan error
Alrm only
82
Vi position error
Alrm only
83
Warn + alarm
84
Lube press
1) May occur as Warning in MAN and AUTO.
2) Alarm at prelubrication. Warning during operation.
3) Applies only to HPO/HPC.
4) The alarm LOW OIL PUMP PRESSURE DURING OPERATION applies to the SAB 80. The alarm is only activated at a discharge pressure level below 16 Bar.
60/222
0178-445 - ENG
Rev. 03.09
UNISAB II 2.03
4. Timers
4. Timers
UNISAB II includes a number of timer functions
under the menu SETUP I TIMERS I .
0178_429_en.fm
TIMERS
1
TIMERS
TIMER SETUP
SERVICE TIMERS
DATE-TIMER
OIL CHARGING
MOTOR FAN
reached at that particular moment. In this way it is

possible to know for how long the compressor has
been running since the last operating period.
When the compressor is restarted, the counter begins from 0.
4. DATE - TIME - I
This picture shows:
1. TIMERS - I
TIME
MIN
SEC
DAY
MONTH
YEAR
This picture includes all the timers and shows

which timers are activated (they are counting
down).
Must be set correctly in order for the alarms to be

stored with the correct time. This function is provided with a battery back-up.
2.TIMER SETUP - I
5. OIL CHARGING - I (screw

compressor)
P BAND FACTOR
TRANSFER
TAKE - OVER
In this picture the set values of the timers can be

changed. The timers and their functions appear
from the following tables for screw compressors
and reciprocating compressors respectively.
Some of these timers can be changed using the
keyboard whereas others are fixed. The tables
also include the factory set values.
3. SERVICE COUNTER - I
ON TIME
SINCE START
00 HOUR
0 sec
On time
Indicates the total operating time of the compressor.
Since start
Shows how long time the compressor has been
running since it was last started. When stopping
the compressor, the counter will stay on the value
0178-445 - ENG
Rev. 03.09
The time in hours

The time in minutes
The time in seconds
Date
Month
Year
Provided that the compressor is fitted with a pump

for oil charging, this can be started in the picture
OIL CHARGING. This picture shows:
START OIL PUMP

TIMER
NO
0 sec
To start the pump, proceed as follows:

Place the cursor on TIMER with K and use G for
parameter changing. Set the time that the pump is
to run and place the cursor on START OIL PUMP
J which is changed to YES with G and J . Confirm by pressing G.
The pump will now start and run for the set period.
In case the pump is to stop before time expiry,
select NO in the top line. The pump will now stop
and the time drop to 0.
61/222
UNISAB II 2.03
4. Timers
6. MOTOR FAN I (Frequency

controlled screw compressor)
To start the cooling fan manually, carry out the following:
If the compressor is fitted with an electrical cooling

fan for cooling the compressor motor, this can be
started manually in the picture COOLING FAN.
The function is only available on frequency controlled compressors.
Place the cursor on TIMER SP with K and press

G to change the parameter. Set the fan running
time and place the cursor on START COOLING
FAN. Select YES with G,and J . Enter setting
with G .
The picture shows the following:
The cooling fan will now start and operate for the
set running time.
START COOLING FAN
NO
TIMER SP
10 sec
TIMER
0 sec
62/222
To stop the cooling fan before the end of the

running time, select NO in the upper line. The fan
will now stop and the time be reset to 0.
0178-445 - ENG
Rev. 03.09
UNISAB II 2.03
4. Timers
0178_429_en.fm
Table 7 - Screw compressors

No
Value
Factory
Low
High
Unit
Adjustable
Start-start delay
1200
600
3600
Sec
Yes
Stop-start delay
300
60
3600
Sec
Yes
Start delay
300
3600
Sec
Yes
Stop delay
300
60
3600
Sec
Yes
Suction ramp
1200
Sec
Yes
Slide max
300
60
600
Sec
Yes
Prelub1)/2)/3)/4)/5)/6)
10/60/0/6/50
120
Sec
Yes
Oil flow1)/2)/3)/4)/5)
600/90/60/120/600
--
--
Sec
No
Oil flow delay 1)/2)/3)
50/0/20
--
--
Sec
No
10
No oil/flow 1)/2)
10/2/60
Sec
No
11
Lubrication time/flow 1)/2)
60/300
Sec
No
12
Diff press OK
60
Sec
No
13
Oil press low 1)/2)
45/300
Sec
No
14
Filter diff high
300
Sec
No
15
Oil temp low
300
Sec
No
16
Oil temp high
300
Sec
No
17
Superheating low
300
Sec
No
18
Superheating high
300
Sec
No
19
Disch press overload
300
Sec
No
20
Current overload
300
Sec
No
21
Motor start
15
120
Sec
Yes
22
PMS feedback
60
10
300
Sec
Yes
23
F.F. Pump start
10
30
Sec
Yes
24
Oil pump start
10
30
Sec
Yes
25
Oil rectifier start
900
3600
Sec
Yes
26
Oil rectifier delay
300
3600
Sec
Yes
27
Oil rectifier disable
3600
7200
Sec
Yes
28
Start high pressure
30
120
Sec
Yes
29
No Chiller
10
Sec
No
0178-445 - ENG
Rev. 03.09
63/222
UNISAB II 2.03
4. Timers
No
Value
Factory
Low
High
Unit
Adjustable
30
Cap. negative
10000
60
20000
Sec
Yes
31
Start unload
15
60
Sec
Yes
32
60
Sec
Yes
33
Lubricating pressure
145
Sec
No
34
Vi-pause
60
Sec
No
64/222
0178-445 - ENG
Rev. 03.09
UNISAB II 2.03
4. Timers
Table 8 - Reciprocating compressors
0178_429_en.fm
No
Value
Factory
Low
High
Unit
Adjustable
Start-start delay
1200
600
3600
Sec
Yes
Stop-start delay
300
60
3600
Sec
Yes
Start delay
300
3600
Sec
Yes
Stop delay
300
3600
Sec
Yes
Suction ramp
1200
Sec
Yes
Delay up
60
1200
Sec
Yes
Delay down
60
1200
Sec
Yes
Take-over max
3600
Sec
Yes
Take-over delay
300
300
300
Sec
No
10
Intermediate pressure low
20
Sec
No
11
Filter diff. high
300
--
--
Sec
No
12
Not used
--
--
--
--
--
13
Oil pressure low
60
Sec
No
14
Oil pressure high
20
Sec
No
15
Oil temp low
300
Sec
No
16
Oil temp high
Sec
No
17
Superheating low
15
Sec
No
18
Superheating high
300
Sec
No
19
Disch pressure overload
300
Sec
No
20
Current overload
300
Sec
No
21
Motor start
15
120
Sec
Yes
22
PMS feedback
60
10
300
Sec
Yes
23
Oil cool on
60
60
1500
Sec
Yes
24
Oil return
1200
Sec
Yes
25
Oil rectifier start
900
3600
Sec
Yes
26
Oil rectifier delay
300
3600
Sec
Yes
27
Oil rectifier disable
3600
7200
Sec
Yes
28
Start high pressure
30
120
Sec
Yes
29
No Chiller
10
Sec
No
0178-445 - ENG
Rev. 03.09
65/222
UNISAB II 2.03
4. Timers
No
Value
Factory
Low
High
Unit
Adjustable
30
Not used
31
Not used
32
60
Sec
Yes
33
Not used
34
Not used
Timer description
Used only in case of suction pressure regulation.
Screw compressors
If the value is set at 0, this function is disconnected.
1. Start-start delay
States the number of seconds that must pass from
one compressor start to the next. If the compressor stops before the timer has counted down to 0,
the timer will block restart.
2. Stop-start delay
States the number of seconds that must pass before the compressor can be restarted after stop.
This function is not used in MANUAL mode.
3. Start delay
When UNISAB II is in AUTOMATIC or REMOTE,
the compressor start will be delayed for the stated
number of seconds.
4. Stop delay
When UNISAB II is in AUTOMATIC or REMOTE
and the compressor is below 5% slide stop position, the timer will start counting down and stop
the compressor at 0.
5. Suction ramp
This timer indicates how fast the compressor is allowed to lower its suction pressure 1C. The function is active as long as the compressor is working
itself down to its normal working point. When this
has been reached, the compressor will be regulated according to the set regulating values.
66/222
6. Slide max
At compressor stop the capacity slide will move
towards minimum position. In case it fails to get
below 5% within the set time, an error message
will be issued.
If UNISAB II tries to move the slide during operation, and the slide refuses to move within the set
time, an error message will appear.
7. Prelubrication
When starting compressors with prelubrication
pumps, the prelubrication time is calculated from
the time when the oil float issues a signal.
1)
For SAB 202, SAB Mk3 and VMY Mk3.
2)
For SAB 163 Mk1.
3)
For SV 10/20, FV 10/20, SAB 110 SR/LR,

SAB 128 HR and SAB 163 HR.
4)
For SAB 283, SAB 355, GSV, RWF and

SAB 330 B
5)
For SAB 330 HP (B is short for Booster,

which can be selected in the CONFIG
menu. HP means Booster = NO).
6)
For Rotatune compressors the time must be

changed from 10 sec. to 0 sec.
0178-445 - ENG
Rev. 03.09
UNISAB II 2.03
4. Timers
8. Oil flow
When prelubrication is initiated, a signal must be
issued from the float switch before the timer expires; otherwise an error message appears.
1)
For SAB 202, SAB Mk3 and VMY Mk3.
2)
For SAB 163 Mk1.
13. Oil pressure low

During start the alarm for low oil pressure is delayed for the stated time. No delay during normal operation.
3)
For SV 10/20 and FV 10/20
1.
4)
For SAB 283, SAB 355, GSV, RWF and

SAB 330 B
For SAB 202, SAB Mk2, SAB Mk3, VMY,

SAB 80, SV 10/20 and FV 10/20.
2.
For SAB 163 Mk 1
For SAB 330 HP (B is short for Booster,

which can be selected in the CONFIG
menu. HP means Booster = NO).
14. Filter diff. high

During start and operation the alarm for high filter
differential pressure is delayed for the stated time.
5)
9. Oil flow switch delay, start

When starting a compressor, a time delay ensures
that the oil float has time to lift.
0178_429_en.fm
after the desired differential pressure has been

reached.
1.
For SAB Mk 2 110/128/163 and SAB 80.
2.
For compressors with prelubrication delay =

0 sec.
3.
10. No oil/flow
During operation the oil float is allowed to be disconnected only for the period stated.
1.
For SAB and VMY compressors.
2.
3.
For GSV/RWF
11. Lubrication time/flow

After start-up of compressors with prelubrication
pump, the pump will run for the time stated after
compressor start.
1.
For SAB 202, SAB Mk3 and VMY Mk3, SV

10/20 and FV 10/20
2.
For SAB 163 Mk1.
12. Diff. pressure OK

For VMY Mk3, SAB Mk3, SAB 202, SV 10/20 and
FV 10/20 the oil pump will run for the stated time
0178-445 - ENG
Rev. 03.09
15. Oil temp. low

During start the alarm for low oil temperature is
delayed for the stated time. No delay during normal operation.
16. Oil temp. high
During start the alarm for high oil temperature is
17. Superheating low
During start the alarm for low superheating is delayed for the stated time. No delay during normal operation.
18. Superheating high
During start the alarm for high superheating is delayed for the stated time. No delay during normal operation.
19. Disch. pressure, overload
If the discharge pressure is higher than the warning limit in the time stated, the compressor will
stop and an error message will appear.
See also Limiters.
20. Current overload
If the motor current is higher than the set point in
the time stated, the compressor will stop and an
error message will appear.
67/222
UNISAB II 2.03
4. Timers
See also Limiters.

21. Motor start
When the compressor starts, the motor guard
must issue a feedback before the timer expires; if
not, an error message will appear.
The green light diode above the starting key A will
flash until feedback has been received whereupon the light will be steady.
22. PMS (Starting request) feedback
After the control has issued a starting request, it
must receive a feedback within the stated time; if
23. F. F. Pump start
In case the motor guard of the full flow pump has
failed to issue a feedback within the stated time after the starting signal, an error message will appear.
24. Oil pump start
In case the motor guard of the oil pump has failed
to issue a feedback within the stated time after the
starting signal, an error message will appear.
25. Oil rectifier start
Whenever the compressor starts, this timer will be
activated and start counting down. When 0 has
been reached, the solenoid valve to the oil rectifier
will be activated.
26. Oil rectifier delay
If suction gas superheating drops below set point
1 for superheating, the solenoid valve will close.
Once the superheating rises above this limit
again, the timer must expire before the solenoid
valve opens.
27. Oil rectifier disable
1 for superheating, the timer will start counting
down. Provided the superheating still remains below the limit once the timer has reached 0, a warning will be issued to a superior computer.
68/222
28. Start high pressure

On two-stage plants the HP compressors can be
started by force by activating the input
External starting permission, normal stop.
The start will be delayed for the set number of seconds.
With the compressors in sequence, number 1 in
the sequence will start and the system will now
operate normally.
29. No Chiller
When UNISAB II is configured as part of a Chiller
control, the timer will ensure that communication
between UNISAB II and the connected Chiller
does not disappear for a period longer period than
the set time. If this happens, both UNISAB II and
UNISAB II-Chiller will be stopped by the alarm.
30. Cap. negative
When the compressor is started, the slide must
move to the position corresponding to the set zero
point (ie positive read capacity) as quickly as possible before the expiry of the cap. negative timer.
Otherwise an error message will be issued. The
cap. negative timer counts down each second by
the value: (corrected capacity)2/5, where corrected
capacity may be negative values between -0 and
-30%, ie the timer will count down each second by
a factor between 1 and 180.
Each time the slide moves above 0% capacity, the
timer will stop.
The timer is reset and restarted, as soon as the
slide moves below -2% corrected capacity.
31. Unloaded start
The timer is used in connection with the compressors FV 17/19. When the compressor motor is
started, a by-pass solenoid valve for oil discharge
will open for the time set.
The timer is used in connection with the compressors FV 24/26. When the compressor motor is
0178-445 - ENG
Rev. 03.09
UNISAB II 2.03
4. Timers
started and stopped, the slide capacity down solenoid valve will open for the time set.
the timer will start counting down and stop the

compressor at 0.
32. Low suction pressure

During start-up and operation the alarm for low
suction pressure is delayed for the indicated period of time.
5. Suction ramp
This timer indicates how fast the compressor is allowed to lower its suction pressure1C/R. If the
value is set for 0, this function will be disconnected.
0178_429_en.fm
33. Lubricating pressure

suction pressure is delayed for the indicated period of time. A warning is issued after 25 seconds.
34. Vi-pause
The timer is used in connection with GST compressors, which have a three-stage automatic
regulation of the volume ratio, 2.2-3.5-5.0. Before
switching from one Vi-step to another, the actual
Vi ratio for the compressor must have been
present for at least the indicated time other wise
the change of the Vi step will be cancelled.
1. Start-start delay
States the number of seconds that must pass from
one compressor starts to the next. If the compressor stops before the timer has reached 0, the timer
will block restart.
2. Stop-start delay
States the number of seconds that must pass before the compressor can be restarted after stop.
This function is not used in MANUAL mode.
3. Start delay
the compressor start will be delayed for the stated
number of seconds.
4. Stop delay
and the compressor is at its lowest capacity stage,
0178-445 - ENG
Rev. 03.09
6. Delay up
Indicates the time that passes between the loading of stages at increasing capacity in AUTOMATIC or REMOTE mode.
7. Delay down
Indicates the time that passes between the unloading of stages at decreasing capacity in AUTOMATIC or REMOTE mode.
8. Take-over max
Only used in connection with MULTISAB. See this
instruction manual.
9. Take-over delay
Only used in connection with MULTISAB. See this
instruction manual.
10. Intermediate pressure low
During start the alarm for low intermediate pressure is delayed for the stated time. No delay during normal operation.
11. Filter diff. high
1.
SMC Mk4; during start-up and operation,
the warning for high oil filter differential pressure is delayed for the indicated period of
time.
2.
For SMC Mk3 and earlier versions, this timer is not used.
12. Not used

13. Oil pressure low
During start and operation the alarm for low oil
pressure is delayed for the stated time.
69/222
UNISAB II 2.03
4. Timers
14. Oil pressure high

During start the alarm for high oil pressure is delayed for the stated time. No delay during normal operation.
23. Oil cool on

At compressor stop the outlet for water cooling or
oil cooling will not close until after the set time has
run out.
15. Oil temperature low

During start the alarm for low oil temperature is
24. Oil return

At compressor start the outlets for oil return are
not opened until after the set time has run out.
16. Oil temp high

During start the alarm for high oil temperature is
17. Superheating low
During start the alarm for low superheating is delayed for the stated time. No delay during normal operation.
18. Superheating high
During start the alarm for high superheating is delayed for the stated time. No delay during normal operation.
19. Disch. pressure, overload
In case the discharge pressure is higher than the
warning limit within the stated time, the compressor will stop.
25. Oil rectifier start

Whenever the compressor starts, the timer will be
activated and start counting down. When 0 has
been reached, the solenoid valve to the oil rectifier
will be activated.
26. Oil rectifier delay
If the suction gas superheating drops below set
point 1 for superheating, the solenoid valve will
close. Once the superheating rises above this limit
again, the timer must expire before the solenoid
valve opens.
27. Oil rectifier disable
1 for superheating, the timer will start counting
down. Provided the superheating still remains below the limit once the timer has reached 0, a warning will be issued to a superior computer.
20. Current overload

In case the motor current is higher than the set
point within the stated time, the compressor will
stop.
28. Start high pressure

On two-stage plants the HP compressors can be
started by force by activating the input External
starting permission, normal stop. The start will
be delayed for the set number of seconds.
21. Motor start

When the compressor starts, the motor guard
must issue a feedback before the timer expires; if
With the compressors in sequence, number 1 in

the sequence will start and the system will now
operate normally.
22. PMS (Starting request) feedback

After the control has issued a starting request, it
must receive a feedback within the stated time; if
29. No Chiller
When UNISAB II is configured as part of a Chiller
control, this timer will ensure that the communication between UNISAB II and the connected Chiller
does not disappear for a period longer than the set
70/222
0178-445 - ENG
Rev. 03.09
UNISAB II 2.03
4. Timers
time. If this occurs, both UNISAB II and

UNISAB II-Chiller will be stopped by the alarm.
30. Not used
31. Not used
32. Low suction pressure
suction pressure is delayed for the indicated period of time.
34. Not used.
7. P BAND FACTOR - I
0178_429_en.fm
In case of a screw compressor, the following

picture will appear:
START DELAY
STOP DELAY
Start delay
Start delay can be changed in the range from 1 to
100. Stop delay can be changed in the range from
0 to 100. The function of these zones must be
seen in connection with the applied regulator (suction pressure, brine, etc).
If the value 1 is selected, the timer will not start to
count until the measured value of the regulator is
1% inside the proportional band above the neutral
zone.
If the value 100 is selected, the timer will not start
to count until the measured value of the regulator
is 100% inside the proportional band above the
neutral zone.
Whether 1% or 100% is selected, the timer - when
it is started - will count in seconds without extension (this is not the case with reciprocating compressors, see next section).
Rev. 03.09
If the value 0 is selected, the timer will start to

count when the measured value of the regulator is
in the neutral zone.
If the value 1 is selected, the timer will not start to
count until the measured value of the regulator is
1% inside the proportional band below the neutral
zone.
If the value 100 is selected, the timer will not start
to count until the measured value of the regulator
is 100% inside the proportional band below the
neutral zone.
33. Not used
0178-445 - ENG
Stop delay
Sp = Set point
Nz = Neutral zone
Pb = Proportional band
Example 1:
UNISAB II has been set for suction pressure regulation,
Sp = -10 C,
Nz = 2 K, Pb = 10 K,
START DELAY = 90 sec and FACTOR = 50.
STOP DELAY = 60 sec and FACTOR = 30.
In the neutral zone and up to -4C the compressor
will not be in operation. If the measured suction
pressure is a little higher than -4C, the START
DELAY timer will start counting and the compressor will start after 90 seconds. If necessary, a
compressor start can thus be delayed or blocked.
In the neutral zone and up to -14C the compressor will be in operation. If the measured suction
pressure is a little lower than -14C and the capacity slide is below 5%, the STOP DELAY timer will
start counting and the compressor will stop after
60 seconds.
Example 2:
UNISAB II has been set for suction pressure
change,
Sp = -20 C,
71/222
UNISAB II 2.03
4. Timers
Nz = 4K, Pb = 10 K,
START DELAY = 90 sec and FACTOR = 10.
Each of these factors can be selected in the range

1-10.
STOP DELAY = 60 sec and FACTOR = 0.
In AUTO and REMOTE mode, the various

P BAND FACTORs are influencing the decision of
when to start or stop the compressor or, for reciprocating compressors, when to engage or disengage another capacity stage.
In the neutral zone and up to -17C the compressor will not be in operation. If the measured suction pressure is a little higher than -17C, the
START DELAY timer will start to count and the
compressor will start after 90 seconds. If necessary, a compressor start can thus be delayed or
blocked.
As long as the measured suction pressure is in the
upper proportional band, the compressor will be in
operation. If the measured suction pressure is a
little lower than -18C and the capacity slide is below 5%, the STOP DELAY timer will start to count
and the compressor will stop after 60 seconds.
In case of a reciprocating compressor, the following picture will appear:
DELAY UP
DELAY DOWN
START DELAY
STOP DELAY
Basically, starting and stopping as well as engaging and disengaging are delayed by the timers
START DELAY, STOP DELAY, DELAY UP and
DELAY DOWN. See section Timer description.
The relevant timers start as soon as the regulated
input (eg suction pressure) is just outside the neutral zone.
There is one P BAND FACTOR for each of these
timers.
If the P BAND FACTOR is 1, the time delay will be
the same no matter if the regulated input is just
outside the neutral zone or far outside the neutral
zone.
By selecting a P BAND FACTOR higher than 1
(up to 10), it is possible to have the timer run slower when the regulated input is close to the neutral
zone as illustrated in the drawing.
Fig. 4.1
Timer step [sec]
PBF = P.Band Factor

Diff = Measuring value - Setpoint
PBF
1
Diff
-PB
-NZ
NZ
When the regulated input is outside the P band

(PB), the timer will run at normal speed, as it is
counting in seconds. When the regulated input is
72/222
PB
just outside the neutral zone (NZ), each countdown will last one PBF second.
0178-445 - ENG
Rev. 03.09
UNISAB II 2.03
4. Timers
In this way, a compressor start can be delayed or

blocked if there is no particular cooling requirement. However, if the deviation is large, the timer
will count down fast and start the compressor.
0178_429_en.fm
Example 1:
Suction pressure regulation has been selected.
The measured suction pressure equals the set
point. The compressor is stopped and ready to
start.
Set point Sp = -10C/R
Nz = 2C/R
Pb = 5C/R
START DELAY = 60 sec
P BAND FACTOR START DELAY = 5.
When the measured suction pressure exceeds
-9C/R, the START DELAY timer will begin to
count with an interval of 5 sec (P BAND FACTOR)
each time the value in the display counts one
down. If the pressure steadies, the timer will run
for 5 x 60 = 300 seconds.
Should the measuring value reach -6.5C/R, the
counting interval will be 3 sec.
If the pressure is still moving upwards and exceeds -4C/R (the Pb limit), the timer will count in
seconds.
The resulting total delay will range between 60
and 300 seconds, after which the compressor will
start.
Example 2:
Discharge pressure regulation has been selected
on a reciprocating compressor. The measured
discharge pressure equals the set point. The compressor is running at 100% capacity.
Set point Sp = 30C/R
Nz = 2C/R
Pb = 5C/R
DELAY DOWN = 30 sec
P BAND FACTOR DELAY DOWN = 3.
When the measured discharge pressure exceeds

31C/R, the timer DELAY DOWN will begin to
count with an interval of 3 sec (P BAND FACTOR)
each time the value in the display counts one
down. If the pressure steadies, the timer will run
for 3 x 30 = 90 seconds.
Should the measuring value reach 33.5C/R, the
counting interval will be 2 sec.
If the pressure is still moving upwards and exceeds 36C/R (the Pb limit), the timer will count in
seconds.
The resulting total delay will range between 30
and 90 seconds, after which the compressor will
disengage one capacity stage.
Special timers in connection with

MULTISAB
In the MULTISAB system which regulates and optimizes more than one compressor, there are a
number of factors attached to a TRANSFER/TAKE-OVER function between reciprocating
and screw compressors. These factors are described in detail in section MULTISAB regulation.
The factors are found in the pictures:
8.TRANSFER - I Reciprocating
compressors
FACTOR DOWN
ZONE
Rev. 03.09
15%
9.TAKE-OVER - I Reciprocating
compressors
FACTOR UP
FACTOR START
ZONE
0178-445 - ENG
15%
73/222
UNISAB II 2.03
4. Timers
MULTISAB
MULTISAB is a distributed compressor control
system, which is very useful when more compressors are working together (eg connection to the
same suction line). With MULTISAB it is possible
to start, stop and capacity regulate compressors
according to the varying cooling requirements.
MULTISAB is a standard function in UNISAB II.
MULTISAB is described in detail in section MULTISAB regulation.
MULTISAB is only able to work if all UNISAB II
units which are to participate in the distributed
control are physically connected via the Danbuss
communication network. The section Installation
of data communication cable describes how to
connect the units.
If MULTISAB is to function optimally, it is of vital

importance that certain key parameters are selected correctly by the user as explained in section
MULTISAB regulation. To understand the contents of the MULTISAB pictures, the following key
parameters are described here: COMPR. NO,
SYSTEM NO, PREF. MASTER, START NO and
CONTROL MODE.
Always make sure that all UNISAB II units on a
network have different COMPR. NOs, ie two units
are not allowed to have the same COMPR. NO.
See section Configuration.
SYSTEM NO informs MULTISAB which compressors are to work together. The drawing below
shows two examples.
Fig. 4.2
SYSTEM NO
= 1 or 2
Compr. 1
Compr. 1
Suction line, subplant 1
SYSTEM NO
= 1 or 2
SYSTEM NO = 1
Compr. 2
Compr. 2
Common
Multisab
network
Multisab
network
Suction main line 1

SYSTEM NO
= 1 or 2
SYSTEM NO = 1
Suction main line 2
SYSTEM NO = 2
Compr. 3
Compr. 3
Suction line, subplant 2

SYSTEM NO
= 1 or 2
SYSTEM NO = 2
Compr. 4
Separated compressor plants
In the example to the left, two separate compressor plants are connected on a common Danbuss
network. Here it is of vital importance that
UNISAB No 1 has the same SYSTEMNO as

UNISAB No 2
74/222
Compr. 4
Common compressor plant
UNISAB No 3 has the same SYSTEM NO

as UNISAB No 4
SYSTEM NO of UNISAB 1 and 2 differs

from SYSTEM NO of UNISAB 3 and 4.
0178-445 - ENG
Rev. 03.09
UNISAB II 2.03
4. Timers
In the example to the right, each of the four compressors can be connected independently to any
of the two suction main lines. In this example is is
also important that SYSTEM NO is correct. However, it is particularly important that when changing the valve settings, the SYSTEM NO in the
UNISAB II units in question is changed accordingly as this does not take place automatically.
START NO defines the priority of the compressors with common SYSTEM NO. The unit with the
lowest START NO will be the first to start.
0178_429_en.fm
PREF. MASTER must be indentical for all units

with the same SYSTEM NO. See section Configuration. PREF. MASTER specifies whether it is
COMPR. NO or START NO which is to define
which UNISAB II is to be SYS CONTROLLER.
SYS CONTROLLER is responsible for the co-ordination of the involved units. It is the sensor of the
SYS CONTROLLER (eg suction pressure input)
which is used for the regulation.
If PREF. MASTER = #COMPR, the unit with the
lowest COMPR. NO will be SYS CONTROLLER
except if the UNISAB II unit in question is shut off
or otherwise unable to communicate. In such cases the unit with the next COMPR. NO will take
over as SYS CONTROLLER.
If PREF. MASTER = #START, the unit with the
lowest START NO will be SYS CONTROLLER,
but only as long as it is available. If it is not available, the unit with the next START NO will take
over as SYS CONTROLLER. A unit is not available if it is shut off, not communicating, not in REMOTE mode or in shutdown alarm condition. An
alarm condition may be due to a sensor error, resulting in a change of SYS CONTROLLER and
thus of sensor.
In order for a compressor to become part of a
MULTISAB system, the above key parameters
must be set up. CONTROL MODE must be set for
REMOTE. In other words, by changing the CONTROL MODE, the user is able to include and exclude the compressor from the MULTISAB system. See section Compressor regulation.
The MULTISAB functions are found in the menu
SETUP I MULTISAB I
MULTISAB
MULTISAB STATE
ALL COMPRESSORS
PARALLEL CONTR.
1. MULTISAB STATE - I
START NO
SYSTEM NO
SYS. CONTROLLER
1
MAY START
Here START NO and SYSTEM NO can be adjusted in the range 1-14. Furthermore, SYS CONTROLLER shows which unit is the master as explained above.
In the fourth line of the picture, the MULTISAB
status of the UNISAB II in question is shown. The
status can be one of the following:
State
Explanation
BLOCKED
The compressor cannot (and is not going to) start MULTISAB now.
NOT MY TURN
Another compressor must start before this one / there is no cooling requirement.
MAY START
Starts when START DELAY expires as there is now a cooling requirement.
0178-445 - ENG
Rev. 03.09
75/222
UNISAB II 2.03
4. Timers
State
Explanation
RUNS AT MAX CAP
Must run at 100% capacity.
LEAD COMPR.
Runs in parallel operation as master.
LAG COMPR.
Runs in parallel operation as slave.
MAY STOP
Is below 5% capacity, stops when STOP DELAY expires.
RUNS BY ITSELF
Is the only compressor in the system that is in operation.
STOP RAMP UP
Stops parallel operation, as master - only screw compr.
STOP RAMP DOWN
Stops parallel operation, as slave - only screw compr.
2. ALL COMPRESSORS - I
COMPR. # 01
MANUAL
SYSTEM # 01
START # 02
READY
0%
This picture makes it possible - from a UNISAB II

unit - to see MULTISAB information about the other compressors in the communication network.
COMPR. #
The number of the observed UNISAB II unit. In
this example it is compressor no 01.
Control mode
Operating mode of compressor no 01. In this example compressor no. 01 is in MANUAL mode.
Control mode be one of the following: STOPPED,
MANUAL, AUTO or REMOTE.
SYSTEM #
SYSTEM NO of compressor no 01.
START #
START NO of compressor no 01.
Status
Compressor operating status of compressor no.
01. Operating status can be one of the following:
State
Explanation
READY
UNISAB II is ready to start.
RUNNING
Compressor in operation.
STARTING
Compressor motor start-up.
SHUTDOWN
In a state of alarm.
PAUSE
Waiting for a timer to expire.
PRELUB
Working on the prelubrication sequence.
CAP SLIDE DOWN
Runs the slide down after stop.
RUNS AT OVERL.
Motor current too high.
DISCHARGE LIM.
Discharge pressure too high.
SUCTION LIM.
Suction pressure too low.
STOPPED
Compressor cannot start.
Capacity
76/222
Capacity of compressor no 1.
0178-445 - ENG
Rev. 03.09
UNISAB II 2.03
4. Timers
The picture can of course be used for getting an

overall view of the MULTISAB operation of the
plant.
NEXT
The number of the compressor which is next in the
starting sequence - (higher START NO)
It may also be used for testing whether the communication between the UNISAB II units on the
network is working. In case there is no communication to one of the UNISAB II units, the status
field in line 4 will be replaced by a "?".
FOLLOWING
The number of the compressor which follows the
next compressor in the starting sequence (an
even higher START NO).
3. PARALLEL CONTR. - I
PRECEDING
NEXT
FOLLOWING
PARALLEL CAP
OFFSET
0178_429_en.fm
45.0 %
-10.0 %
This picture shows the numbers of the compressors which come before and after this compressor
in the starting sequence and which can start. The
last two lines only apply to screw compressors.
PRECEDING
The number of the compressor that comes before
this compressor in the starting sequence - (lower
START NO).
0178-445 - ENG
Rev. 03.09
PARALLEL CAP
The percentage at which MULTISAB is going to
stop this compressor, when this compressor is
one of the two screw compressors that run in parallel.
OFFSET
Can be set between 0.0% and -20.0%. The OFFSET value is added to the calculation of PARALLEL CAP. After entering an OFFSET value (not
0), the PARALLEL CAP value will be reduced accordingly. This means that the point at which the
lag (screw) compressor is stopped is reduced by
the OFFSET value. This may be useful when water chillers are running in parallel as these units
may have a relatively better COP at part load
(heat transfer being better at part load). Note that
the OFFSET value is not changed by a FACTORY
RESET.
77/222
UNISAB II 2.03
4. Timers
78/222
0178-445 - ENG
Rev. 03.09
UNISAB II 2.03
5. Compressor regulation
Control mode
The compressor can be adjusted for different
modes of operation. These are found in SETUP I
CONTROL I .
COMPRESSOR CONTROL
STOPPED
When this picture is selected, the cursor will be

positioned in the top line. Press G and the cursor
moves to the second line.
0178_430_en.fm
Select the desired mode of operation with J K.

There are the following possibilities:
STOPPED
MANUAL
AUTO
REMOTE
STOPPED means that the compressor is blocked
and thus cannot start.
MANUAL means that the compressor only operates manually, ie it is not possible to change to another mode by means of C .
The compressor can, however, be started with A
and stopped with B. Capacity is increased/decreased with E F.
AUTO means that the compressor runs in local
automatic operation according to the form of regulation chosen (suction pressure, brine, etc). It is
possible to change to MANUAL with C.
REMOTE means that the compressor works together with one or more compressors in a common MULTISAB control system.
Regulators
UNISAB II includes a number of compressor capacity regulators. In the modes AUTO and RE-
0178-445 - ENG
Rev. 03.09
MOTE, one (and only one) of these regulators is

responsible for adjusting the capacity according to
the cooling (or heating) requirements. Which regulator to use is specified in Pos. 3: CONTROL ON
in the menu CONFIG. See section Configuration.
CONTROL ON can be set to one of the following:
SUCTION
BRINE
DISCHARGE
HOT WATER
EXT.COOL
EXT.HEAT
Each regulator has its own set of parameters. This
means that when changing the CONTROL ON
setting from one regulator to another and back
again, the original parameters are kept.
The common regulator parameter set includes:
Set point (SP), Neutral zone (Nz) and Proportional band (Pb or P Band). On screw compressors PID parameters are also used. See section
PID controller below.
Set point is the pressure or the temperature desired in the plant.
Neutral zone indicates how much the pressure or
the temperature is allowed to fluctuate in relation
to the Sp without the compressor changing its capacity. The set value of Nz is positioned symmetrically around the set point (Sp +/- 1/2 Nz).
Proportional band indicates how powerful the
regulating signal to the compressor capacity regulation is going to be, depending on the difference
between the desired value (Sp) and the actual value.
In case the measured value is just outside the Nz,
the regulating impulses will be very short, whereas the regulating impules will be very long if the
79/222
UNISAB II 2.03
measured value is outside the P Band. The P

Band is positioned symmetrically around Sp outside the Nz.
Fig. 5.1
rapidly up
Very slowly up
SP
P.Band
P.Band
Error signal
NZ
Very slowly down
rapidly down
Screw compressors
Screw compressors are capacity regulated (hydraulically or electrically) by moving the capacity
slide. This takes place via two digital outputs
which are controlled by UNISAB II, so that the
slide moves towards max or min capacity according to demand. The setting is stageless from 0 to
100%. UNISAB II will usually pulse the digital outputs with a pulse/delay ratio. Consequently, a
constant up or down signal will rarely be given.
The capacity control must be seen as two PID
control loops.
The inner loop adjusts the slide position continuously according to the manually or automatically
selected capacity set point. As long as this set
point is constant, the inner loop will ensure that
the capacity slide remains in this position, inde-
80/222
pendent of any other outside influence on the capacity slide.

When active, the outer loop will adjust the capacity set point according to the selected control set
point and measured value, eg the suction pressure set point and measurement. In MANUAL
mode, the outer loop is not active. In AUTO, the
outer loop is active according to the CONTROL
ON setting. See section Regulators.
The inner loop set point can also be controlled via
the external input (see section Set point control
with current input) or via the communication network.
Inner loop parameters are set in picture SETUP I
CAPACITY I CAPACITY. The picture includes
the standard PID parameters and the points described in section PID controller below. Additionally the following parameters can be selected:
0178-445 - ENG
Rev. 03.09
UNISAB II 2.03
0178_430_en.fm
MIN PULSE is the shortest pulse that

UNISAB II will give on the relay output, eg it
takes time for a hydraulicvalve to open and
close, and for the hydraulic oil to move, so a
pulse shorter than about half a second
would have no effect and would only shorten the service life of the valve and the relay.
A longer MIN PULSE increases the service
life of the hardware, but it also makes the
regulation less accurate.
RUN TIME is the approximate time it takes
for the capacity slide to move from minimum
position to maximum position and vice versa
at constant signal. Please note that RUN
TIME for the capacity slide may be reduced
by variable slide end stop etc where this is
relevant.
Outer loop parameters are set in the relevant picture, eg SUCTION I SUCT. PRESS. The picture
includes the standard PID parameters and the
points described in section PID controller below.
The automatic Vi slide control works in the same
way as the inner loop. The parameters are available in picture CAPACITY I VI POSITION.
PID controller
On screw compressors a PID controller is used for
capacity control and possible Vi control. The theory of PID controllers is described in numerous
books on automatic control. Methods of optimizing the parameters are also included in these
books. The available parameters are described
briefly in the following.
In the relevant picture, eg SUCTION I SUCT.
PRESS., the following data are included:
Name
Description
ACTUAL SP.
The set point which the PID controller works with at the moment.
SET POINT 1
User selected set point 1
SET POINT 2
User selected set point 2
NEUTRAL ZONE
The neutral zone is a symmetrical area around ACTUAL SP. When the controlled value is inside the area, the controller will be passive. The purpose is to increase service
life of the output hardware (relays, valves, spindle motor, etc). However, with the PID
controller this is handled by MIN PULSE, so that the NEUTRAL ZONE should be set
for 0. A larger NEUTRAL ZONE makes the regulation less accurate.
PROP. BAND
This parameter decides the total gain in the control loop, as the gain K=n / (PROP.
BAND) where n is a constant that depends on RUN TIME. Thus changing PROP.
BAND does not only affect the proportional term, but also the integral and differential
terms. Increasing PROP. BAND will give a slower response.
T. INT.
Integral Time decides the gain of the integral term. A smaller T. INT means a larger
gain, ie the controller will try to reach the set point faster.
T. DIFF.
Differential Time decides the gain of the differential term. A larger T. DIFF means a
larger gain. Normally select T. DIFF = 0 as it is then working as a PI controller.
P. PART
This field shows the actual Proportional term calculated by the PID controller.
I. PART
This field shows the actual Integral term calculated by the PID controller.
0178-445 - ENG
Rev. 03.09
81/222
UNISAB II 2.03
Name
Description
D. PART
This field shows the actual Differential term calculated by the PID controller
REG. OUTPUT
The actual Regulator Output is the sum of P. PART, I. PART and D. PART.
PID regulator
With version 2.01, the PID regulator was introduced to replace the previous three-point I regulator. It is very important that the parameters appearing by a factory reset be used.
There are both an inner and an outer loop. As regards the outer loop, it is not recommended to adjust the P band further down than 10C and T.INT.
further down than 20 seconds. Higher values may
very well occur. T.DIFF. is usually always 0. The
neutral zone can be set for 0.4C or higher if it is
not required that the suction pressure is kept as
narrow as possible around the set point. If the
neutral zone is too high, the regulator may fluctuate too much.
As regards the inner loop it is recommended only
to use the default values for neutral zone (0.0), P
band (200%), T.INT. (30 seconds) and T.DIFF. (0
seconds)..The parameter MIN PULSE determines
the pulse duration up or down every time the solenoid valve is activated. If the value is high, a correspondingly large capacity change is required
before the regulator reacts with an up or down signal. This is a kind of neutral zone. Default value is
0.5 seconds and should not be higher than 2 seconds.
The parameter RUN TIME defines how long it will
take to run the slide from 0-100% at constant up
signal or from 100-0% at constant down signal.
Usually slide speed is always adjusted on the oil
needle valves positioned on the capacity regulating block so that the slide speed is approx 60 seconds when the oil is warm from operation. This adjustment is usually carried out by the service engineer who starts up the compressor unit.
82/222
If the slide speed for some reason cannot be adjusted for 60 seconds, the RUN TIME parameter
must be changed so that run time corresponds to
the actual operating conditions. If this is not done,
it will appear as if the PID regulator is out of control, ie it will increase capacity when it should decrease capacity as well as go far beyond its setpoint.
If it is necessary to set the RUN TIME value higher
than 60 seconds, YORK Refrigeration recommends increasing the integral-time (T.INT) correspondingly. Do not, however, use a T.INT. higher
than 120 seconds as this may prevent the capacity slide from reaching 100%. A T.INT increase
informs the system that slide function is slower
than expected.
Example 1
Screw compressor with a combination of slide
regulation and frequency regulation.
Slide velocity is 60 seconds from 0-100% slide
movement. This may be shown as 0-42% capacity
on the UNISAB II display. When the slide has
reached 100%, the frequency converter will start
to increase the frequency to the max frequency
set. This will take 60 seconds and be shown as
42-100% in the UNISAB II display. Thus the RUN
TIME parameter must be set for 60+60=120 seconds for correct regulation.
When switching between manual and automatic
control, another difference between the PID regulator and the previous regulator can be seen. A
suction pressure level which is much higher than
the set point will produce a very high output signal
from the regulator.
0178-445 - ENG
Rev. 03.09
UNISAB II 2.03
If switching from manual to auto and back again

rather quickly, the regulator will have produced a
very large output signal when regulating in auto.
This signal may make the regulator unstable in
case the setting of the oil valves mentioned above
is incorrect. If the regulator becomes unstable,
keep control mode in manual until the regulator
has stabilized (without activating the capacity up
and down keys).
Example 2
Nz = 0.0
0178_430_en.fm
P band = 10.0
T. I NT. = 60.0
T. DI FF. = 0.0
In case the compressor is running very unsteadily
during regulation or two compressors cannot find
one another in parallel operation, raise the P band
to eg. 50C.
If the running of the compressor has steadied, but
the regulator seems slow to reach its set point, reduce the P band a little at a time until the running
0178-445 - ENG
Rev. 03.09
of the compressor becomes unsteady again. Now

raise the P band to the last applicable value. If the
suction pressure still does not reach its setpoint
(depending on the setting of Nz) a reduction in the
integral-time can be necessary to fine-tune the
regulator.
If the regulator during a long period of time seems
to hunt, increase the T. INT. to eg. 100-200 sec. If
the hunting stops, reduce the T. INT. until the system starts hunting again. Now increase the T. INT.
to the last applicable value.
Usually it will never be necessary to change the T.
DIFF. to another value than 0 sec. However, in
special cases where the compressor is part of a
process plant, eg. in petrochemical plants, it may
be necessary to use another value than 0 sec.
This will only be necessary if the process requires
a very fast regulation upwards or downwards to
avoid that the suction pressure removes itself too
far from the set point.
83/222
UNISAB II 2.03
%
Input signal
10
15
Time
10
15
Time
Output signal
P-part
B
A
A: Proportional band=10C
B: Proportional band=5C
0
Output signal
I-part
C: Integral time=30 sec

D: Integral time=60 sec
0
84/222
10
15
Time
0178-445 - ENG
Rev. 03.09
UNISAB II 2.03
Output signal
D-part
F
E: Differential time=10 sec
F: Differential time=20 sec

0
10
15
Time
0178_430_en.fm
Output signal
PID-part
0
Reciprocating compressors are capacity regulated in stages by connection/disconnection of cylinders, typically in pairs, through solenoid valves
controlled by UNISAB II.
How fast the compressor loads/unloads stages is
determined by the timers DELAY UP and DELAY
DOWN, which will start counting as soon as the
value is outside the neutral zone.
The regulator is allowed to have a P Band of 0,
which means that the stages are loaded in seconds as set.
0178-445 - ENG
Rev. 03.09
10
15
Time
If the P Band is above 0, the delay times can be

prolonged as long as the value is within the P
Band.
The P Band is only relevant if the P Band factors
DELAY UP and/or DELAY DOWN are set in the
picture P BAND FACTOR at a value above 1. See
section P BAND FACTOR.
If the value is just outside the neutral zone and the
P Band factor DELAY UP is eg 10, counting will be
slow: "1 sec." becomes 10 sec.
If the value is just outside the P Band, counting will
be speeded up, "1 sec" becomes 1 sec.
85/222
UNISAB II 2.03
Table 9A - Settings - Regulating parameters, Reciprocating compressors

Regulator type
Suct. pressure
Brine temperature
Disch. side
Hot water
Ext. cool Universal regulator
Ext. heat Universal regulator
86/222
Minimum
Maximum
Factory
setting
Unit
Sp 1
-1
(-90)
+9
(+ 24.8)1*
+1
(-19.4)
BAR
C/R717
Sp 2
-1
(-90)
+9
(+ 24.8)1*
+1
(-19.4)
BAR
C/R717
Nz
100
Pb
100
10
Sp 1
- 60
+ 100
20
Sp 2
- 60
+ 100
20
Nz
100
Pb
100
Sp 1
-1
(-90)
+ 24
(+ 58)2*
+8
(+ 21.4)
BAR
C/R717
Sp 2
-1
(-90)
+ 24
(+ 58)2*
+8
(+ 21.4)
BAR
C/R717
Nz
100
Pb
100
10
Sp 1
- 60
+ 100
20
Sp 2
- 60
+ 100
20
Nz
100
Pb
100
Sp 1
- 999
+ 999
Sp 2
- 999
+ 999
Nz
+ 999
Pb
+ 999
Sp 1
- 999
+ 999
Sp 2
- 999
+ 999
Nz
+ 999
Pb
+ 999
0178-445 - ENG
Rev. 03.09
UNISAB II 2.03
Regulator type
Motor current limiter
Minimum
Maximum
Factory
setting
Unit
Sp 1
2500
2500
Amp
Sp 2
2500
2500
Amp
0178_430_en.fm
NOTE: 1* HPO/HPC +25 bar (+60/R717) 2* HPO/HPC +40 bar (+79.4/R717)
0178-445 - ENG
Rev. 03.09
87/222
UNISAB II 2.03
Table 9B - Settings - Regulating parameters, Screw compressors

Regulator type
Capacity control
Vi slide control,
Compressors with
automatic Vi regulation
Suct. pressure
Brine temperature
88/222
Minimum
Maximum
Factory setting
Unit
Nz
0.0
10.0
0.0
Pb
0.1
999.9
200.0
T.Int.
0.5
999.9
30.0
sec
T.Diff.
0.0
99.9
0.0
sec
Min Pulse
1.0
50.0
1.0
sec
Run Time
1.0
999.0
See note 1
sec
Nz
0.0
10.0
4.0
Pb
0.1
999.9
200.0
T.Int.
0.5
999.9
30.0
sec
T.Diff.
0.0
99.9
0.0
sec
Min Pulse
1.0
10.0
1.0
sec
Run Time
1.0
999.0
See note 1
sec
Sp 1
-1
(-90)
+9
(+24.8)
+1
(-19.4)
BAR
C/R717
Sp 2
-1
(-90)
+9
(+24.8)
+1
(-19.4)
BAR
C/R717
Nz
0.0
200.0
0.0
C/R717
Pb
0.1
999.9
10.0
C/R717
T.Int.
0.5
999.9
60.0
sec
T.Diff.
0.0
99.9
0.0
sec
Sp 1
-60
100
20
Sp 2
-60
100
20
Nz
0.0
100
Pb
0.1
999.9
50
T.Int.
0.5
999.9
30.0
sec
T.Diff.
0.0
99.9
sec
0178-445 - ENG
Rev. 03.09
UNISAB II 2.03
Regulator type
Minimum
Maximum
Factory setting
Unit
Sp 1
-1
(90)
+24
(+58)
+8
(+21.4)
BAR
C/R717
Sp 2
-1
(90)
+24
(+58)
+8
(+21.4)
BAR
C/R717
Nz
0.0
200
0.0
C/R717
Pb
0.1
999.9
10
C/R717
T.Int.
0.5
999.9
60.0
sec
T.Diff.
0.0
99.9
sec
Sp 1
-60
100
20
Sp 2
-60
100
20
Nz
0.0
100
Pb
0.1
999.9
50
T.Int.
0.5
999.9
30.0
sec
T.Diff
0.0
99.9
0.0
sec
Sp 1
-999
+999
Sp 2
-999
+999
Nz
999.9
Pb
999.9
100
T.Int.
0.5
999.9
30
sec
T.Diff
0.0
99.9
sec
Sp 1
-999
+999
Sp 2
-999
+999
Nz
999.9
Pb
999.9
100
T.Int.
0.5
999.9
30
sec
T.Diff
0.0
99.9
sec
Motor current
Sp 1
2500
2500
Amp
Limiter
Sp 2
2500
2500
Amp
Discharge
0178_430_en.fm
Hot water
Ext. cool
Universal
regulator
Ext. heat
Universal
regulator
Note 1. Run Time factory settings are as follows:
0178-445 - ENG
Rev. 03.09
89/222
UNISAB II 2.03
SAB 330 S
SAB 330 L
SAB 330 E
Others
Cap. Run Time
41
56
74
60
Vi Run Time
19
24
31
60
Table 9C - Settings - Regulating parameters, SAB 330

Regulator type
Factory setting
SAB 330
Hydraulic
Mechanical
Nz
Pb
200
200
T.Int.
30
30
T.Diff.
Min Pulse
Run time
See note 1
See note 1
Vi slide control,
Nz
10
Compressors with
Pb
200
200
automatic Vi
T.Int.
30
30
regulation
T.Diff.
Min Pulse
Run time
See note 1
See note 1
Capacity control
Set points on regulators

All regulators for capacity regulation (suction
pressure, brine temp, etc) can have two 2 set
points which are selected by opening/closing a
digital input named REGULATOR SET POINT 1
OR 2 (see wiring diagrams).
Note that also the Motor Current Limiter has two
set points, which are selected with another digital
input named MOTOR CURRENT SET POINT 1
OR 2.
CONTROL ON = SUCTION
The pressure is measured by the built-in pressure
transducer on the compressor suction side.
The regulator is set by selecting SUCTION I
SUCT.PRESS I PARAMETERS followed by repeated pressures on K until reaching the bottom
of the picture. Note that the Neutral zone and the
90/222
P Band can only be selected when the pressure is

shown in C/R.
CONTROL ON = BRINE
The brine temperature is measured by a Pt 100
sensor on the spot where the temperature is to be
regulated. The sensor is not built into the compressor.
The regulator is set by selecting BRINE I BRINE
TEMP I PARAMETERS followed by repeated
pressures on K until reaching the bottom of the
picture.
CONTROL ON = DISCHARGE
The pressure is measured by the built-in pressure
transducer on the compressor discharge side.
The regulator is set by selecting DISCH. SIDE I
DISCH.PRESS I PARAMETERS followed by repeated pressures on K until reaching the bottom
0178-445 - ENG
Rev. 03.09
UNISAB II 2.03
of the picture. Note that the Neutral zone and the

P Band can only be selected when the pressure is
shown in C/R.
The cursor is positioned on 4 mA. Press G and

the cursor moves to the right. Change the value to
-30 and press G .
CONTROL ON = HOT WATER

The hot water temperature is measured by a Pt
100 sensor connected to the brine temperature input (see wiring diagrams). Position the sensor on
the spot where the temperature is to be regulated.
The sensor is not built into the compressor.
Move the cursor down to 20 mA, press G and

the cursor moves right once more. Change the
value to +20 and press G .
0178_430_en.fm
The regulator is set by selecting BRINE I BRINE

TEMP I PARAMETERS followed by repeated
pressures on K until reaching the bottom of the
picture.
Move the cursor down to USED FOR, press G

and the cursor moves to the right. Select EXTERNAL INPUT SIGNAL by means of J or K.
The picture will now look like this:
4 mA
-30
20 mA
20
Note that the BRINE REGULATOR at this stage

functions as a HOT WATER REGULATOR. The
difference is that the compressor will load capacity
at decreasing temperature.
Each measuring signal can be scaled in accordance with the transducer measuring range.
Universal regulator (Ext. input)
In the menu CONFIG, select in line CONTROL

ON one of the following:
Besides the above-mentioned regulators it is also

possible to use the universal regulator.
To do so, connect a 4-20 mA sensor (pressure,
temperature or other) to the UNISAB II input
named POSSIBLE REMOTE COMPRESSOR
OPERATION.
When selecting 4-20 mA input in the menu CALIBRATE, the following picture will appear:
4 mA
20 mA
0
0
NOT USED
The signal must be scaled to fit the sensor measuring range.

Ex.: A temperature sensor of -30C to +20C is
used.
0178-445 - ENG
Rev. 03.09
EXTERNAL INPUT SIGNAL
Ext. cool
If selecting this function, the compressor will regulate the capacity upwards in case of increasing
measuring value.
Ext. heat
If selecting this function, the compressor will regulate the capacity upwards in case of decreasing
measuring value.
Now select menu BRINE I EXT. INPUT I PARAMETERS. Press to the bottom of the picture
with K where the set values of the regulator are
positioned. These can be set by pressing G followed by J or K.
Set point control with current input

The set points of SUCTION PRESSURE, BRINE
TEMPERATURE, DISCH.PRESSURE, HOT WATER and CAPACITY can all be changed through
a 4-20 mA signal.
91/222
UNISAB II 2.03
Connect these to the terminals as shown in the

wiring diagrams.
Suction pressure
In the menu CONFIG SUCTION SIDE must be selected in the line CONTROL ON. Select 4-20 mA
INPUT I in the menu CALIB, and the following
Brine temperature
In the menu CONFIG BRINE must be selected in
the line CONTROL ON. Select 4-20 mA INPUT I
in the menu CALIB, and the following picture will
appear:
4 mA
20 mA
0
NOT USED
4 mA
20 mA
Ex.: The set point is to vary from -10 to +20C corresponding to a change of the current signal from
4 - 20 mA.
NOT USED
Ex.: The set point is to vary from -50 to -10C/R

corresponding to a change of the current signal
from 4 - 20 mA.
The cursor is positioned on 4 mA. Press G until

-10 with K, then press G again.

the cursor moves to the right, and change the value to -50 with K, then press G again.
Move the cursor down to 20 mA. Press G until

+20, and press G.
Move the cursor to 20 mA, Press G until the cursor moves to the left, and change the value -10,
press G again.
Move the cursor down to CONTROL ON. Press

G until the cursor moves to the right, and select
BRINE TEMP SET POINT with J or K . Finish by
pressing G .
Move the cursor to third line, press G until the

cursor moves to the right, and select
SUCT.PRESSURE SETPOINT with J or K. Finish by pressing G .
4 mA
-10
20 mA
20
BRINE TEMP. SETPOINT

4 mA
-50
20 mA
-10
SUCTION PRESS. SETPOINT
The set point of the suction pressure regulator is

to vary from -50 to -10C/R corresponding to a
change in the current from 4-20 mA.
It is possible to follow the set point value by selecting SUCTION SIDE I SUCTION PRESSURE I
PARAMETERS and press downwards to ACTUAL SP with K.
92/222
The set point of the brine regulator is now going to

change from -10 to +20C corresponding to a
change of the current from 4-20 mA.
It is possible to follow the set point value by selecting BRINE I BRINE TEMP I PARAMETERS
and press downwards to ACTUAL SP with K.
Disch. pressure
In the menu CONFIG DISCH.SIDE must be selected in the line CONTROL ON. Select 4-20 mA
0178-445 - ENG
Rev. 03.09
UNISAB II 2.03


4 mA
4 mA
20 mA
20 mA
0178_430_en.fm
NOT USED
NOT USED
Ex.: The setpoint is to vary from +10 til +35C/R

corresponding to a change of the current signal
from 4-20 mA.
Ex.: The set point is to vary from +30 to +65C corresponding to a change in the current signal from
4-20 mA.

+10 with J, then press G again.

the cursor moves to the right, and change the value to +30 with K, then press G again.

+35, and press G.

+65, and press G.
Move the cursor down to third line. Press G until

the cursor moves to the right, and select DISCH.
PRESSURE SET POINT with J or K. Finish by
pressing G .
Move the cursor down to USED FOR, press G

until the cursor moves to the right, and select
HOTWATER SET POINT with J eller K. Finish
by pressing G.
The picture will now like this:
4 mA
10
4 mA
+30
20 mA
35
20 mA
+65
DISCH. PRESS. SETPOINT
The set point of the discharge pressure regulator

is now going to change from +10 to +35C/R corresponding to a change of the current from 4-20
mA.
HOT WATER SETPOINT
The setpoint in the hotwater regulator now changes from +30 to +65C, corresponding to a change
in the current from 4-20 mA.
It is possible to follow the setpoint value by selecting BRINE I BRINE TEMP I PARAMETERS
and press downwards to ACTUAL SP with K .
It is possible to follow the set point value by selecting DISCH.SIDE I DISCH.PRESS I PARAMETERS and press downwards to ACTUAL SP with
K.
Capacity control
Hotwater
UNISAB II must be set in REMOTE mode in the

picture CONTROL.
In the menu CONFIG, HOTWATER must be selected in the line CONTROL ON. Select 4-20 mA
In the menu CALIB, select 4-20 mA INPUT I, and

the following picture will appear:
0178-445 - ENG
Rev. 03.09
93/222
UNISAB II 2.03
4 mA
20 mA
0
NOT USED
Ex.: The set point of the capacity slide on a screw

compressor is to vary from 0 to 100% corresponding to a change in the current signal from 4-20 mA.
the cursor moves to the right, and change the value to 0 (skip this if the value is 0) with J or K, and
press G again.
the cursor moves to the right, and change the value to 100, and press G.
Move the cursor down to USED FOR. Press G
until the cursor moves to the right, and select CAPACITY SET POINT with J or K. Finish by pressing G.
4 mA
20 mA
0
100
CAPACITY SETPOINT
The capacity slide will now move from 0% to

100% corresponding to a change in the current
from 4 - 20 mA.
In the same way it is possible to control the capacity on a reciprocating compressor.
The reciprocating compressor changes one capacity stage up or down depending on whether
the signal is above or below the percentage corresponding to the capacity stage in question. The
timers DELAY UP and DELAY DOWN, which are
used during the loading/unloading of capacity
stages, are now active when capacity regulation
94/222
takes place with an external 4-20 mA signal (applies to version 1.08 and later versions). This
means that for an SMC 108 without total unloading the following changes apply:
0%
25%
50%
75%
100%
Signal < 25% = 0% capacity,

Signal = 100% capacity.
This works as follows:

Start
When the signal is above 5% (4.8 mA) and AUTO
START = YES has been configured, the timer
START DELAY will begin to count down (in case
of screw compressors).
For reciprocating compressors, the timer START
DELAY will start once the signal is above the lowest capacity stage. When the timer START DELAY has counted down, the compressor will start
and follow the signal up/down. Note, however,
that various limiters may reduce the compressor
capacity.
Stop
When the signal is below 5% (4.8 mA) and AUTO
STOP = YES has been configured, the timer
STOP DELAY will stop counting down (in case of
screw compressors). For reciprocating compressors, the timer STOP DELAY will start once the
signal is below the lowest capacity stage. For reciprocating compressors with total unloading, the
timer STOP DELAY will be activated when the signal is below 0%. When the STOP DELAY timer
has finished counting down, the compressor will
stop.
In case the current signal drops to -10% (2.4 mA),
there will be a change to the chosen form of regulation (eg suction pressure regulation, brine regulation, etc). If the signal exceeds -10% once more,
there will be a change to capacity remote control.
0178-445 - ENG
Rev. 03.09
UNISAB II 2.03
When UNISAB II is configured to "capacity set

point", the starting number is changed to 0. The
"old" starting number is stored and reinserted in
case UNISAB II is configured differently from "capacity set point".
Climatic Control
0178_430_en.fm
This function can be used for both reciprocating

and screw compressors without automatic Vi regulation. The function is included in the menu CONFIG and is further described in section Configuration.
The set point of the inlet temperature on the water
side of plants that are regulated on brine temperature or hot water temperature can be dislocated
by the outside temperature. This requires a 4 - 20
mA temperature transducer, which is connected
to the current inlet in UNISAB II as shown in the
wiring diagrams positioned at the end of this manual.
Use a standard temperature transducer with a
suitabe temperature range, eg -30 - +25C as
shown in Fig. 5.2. Note that the points of discontinuity in the diagram will be determined by the
transducer measuring range as seen in the following examples 1 and 2.
continuity and below the bottom point of discontinuity.

The factor by which the outside temperature will
influence the inlet temperature positively or negatively must be set in the BRINE, HOTWATER or
UNIVERSAL regulator. In the picture CONFIG,
select CONTROL ON = BRINE or HOTWATER,
or (UNIVERSAL regulator) EXT.COL/EXT. HEAT
as well as CLIMA CONTROL = YES in the menu
CONFIG.
Example 1:
On a water cooling unit, the inlet temperature is to
be corrected by the outside temperature.
1)
If the outside temperature is +30 C or more,

the inlet temperature should be +4C.
2)
If the outside temperature is+0C or less,

the inlet temperature should be +12C.
In the menu CONFIG, set CONTROL ON on

BRINE and CLIMA CONTROL on YES. Select an
outside sensor with a range of 0 - +30 C.
Fig. 5.3
T inlet
14
12
Fig. 5.2
T inlet
10
Sp 1 (+65 5
C)
Sp 2
(+25 C)
8
6
T out
5
4 mA
(30 C)
Sp 1
Sp 2
20 mA
(+25 C)
4
2
T out
No further compensation will be made once the

outside temperature is above the top point of dis-
0178-445 - ENG
Rev. 03.09
-10
10
20
30
40
95/222
UNISAB II 2.03
In the drawing the settings are SP1 = 12C at To

= 0C and SP2 = 4C at To = 30C.
Note that SP1 belongs to the lowest and SP2 to
highest outside temperature.
The straight line in Fig. 5.3 shows how the inlet
temperature is going to vary under the influence of
the outside temperature.
Select the menu BRINE I BRINE TEMP I PARAMETERS and go down to SET POINT 1 and
SET POINT 2 with K.
Give SET POINT 1 the value SP1 = 12C from
Fig. 5.3 by pressing G.
Example 2:
On a heat pump unit the inlet temperature is to be
corrected by the outside temperature.
1)
If the outside temperature is +30C, the inlet

temperature must be +40 C.
2)
If the outside temperature is-10C, the inlet

temperature must be +65 C.
In the menu CONFIG, adjust CONTROL ON to

HOTWATER and CLIMA CONTROL to YES.
Select an outside sensor in the range -10 - +30 C.
Fig. 5.4
Give SET POINT 2 the value SP2 = 4C from

Fig. 5.3 by pressing G.
T Inlet
80
At the same time set NEUTRAL ZONE = 3C and

PROP.BAND = 5C as starting points.
70
60
The system is now adjusted to the desired function.

SP1
50
SP2
40
30
20
10
SET POINT 1
12 C
SET POINT 2
0 C
NEUTRAL ZONE
3 C
PROP. BAND
5 C
The ACTUAL SP shows the value according to

which the inlet temperature is regulated at that
particular moment. If the outside temperature is
30C, this value must be 4C.
If the outside temperature is 0C, the value must
be 12C.
The outside temperature can be seen in % of the
measuring range in the picture MOTOR:
MOTOR CURR
EXT. INPUT
OUTSIDE TEMP.
96/222
XXX A
XX
XX %
-20 -10
T out
10
20
30 40
In the drawing the settings are SP1 = 65C at To

= -10C and SP2 = 40C at To = 30C.
Note that SP1 belongs to the lowest and SP2 to
the highest outside temperature.
The straight line indicates how the inlet temperature is going to vary under the influence of the outside temperature.
Select menu BRINE I BRINE TEMP I PARAMETERS and go down to SET POINT 1 and SET
POINT 2.
Give SET POINT 1 the value SP1 = 65C from the
figure by pressing G.
Give SET POINT 2 the value SP2 = 40C from the
figure by pressing G.
0178-445 - ENG
Rev. 03.09
UNISAB II 2.03
At the same time set NEUTRAL ZONE = 3C and

PROP.BAND = 5C as starting points.
Adjusting slide speed (screw

compressors with hydraulic slides)
The system is now adjusted to the desired function.
Capacity slide
SET POINT 1
65 C
SET POINT 2
40 C
NEUTRAL ZONE
3 C
PROP. BAND
5 C
The ACTUAL SP shows the value according to

which the inlet temperature is regulated at that
particular moment. If the outside temperature is
30C, this value must be 40C.
0178_430_en.fm
If the outside temperature is -10C, the value must

be 65C.
The outside temperature can be seen in % of the
measuring range in the picture CAPACITY:
MOTOR CURR
EXT. INPUT
CLIMA COMP.
XXX A
XX
XX %
Examples 1) and 2) precondition that the flow

temperature is measured with the normal Pt 100
input, but if a temperature transducer of 4-20 mA
is installed in a common reservoir, the outdoor
compensation will also be able to work here.
See section Universal regulator in which the procedure will be exactly the same as described in
above examples as this regulator can also be
used for both COOLING and HEATING functions.
In both examples the inlet temperature will rise at
falling outside temperatures.
If the opposite effect is required, ie rising inlet temperature at rising outside temperature, SP1 and
SP2 must be switched.
0178-445 - ENG
Rev. 03.09
The capacity slide is moved by adding or removing oil from the slide piston cylinder. The movement is controlled by UNISAB II, which activates
the solenoid valves in the oil lines, thus moving
the slide in the desired direction. If this movement
takes place too fast, the system will become very
unstable and give rise to unnecessary wear and
tear of the slide.
To prevent the above, adjustable throttle valves
have been built into the oil lines and by changing
the opening degree of the throttle valves, the slide
movement can be adjusted to a suitable speed.
The slide speed is checked with the compressor in
MANUAL mode, at normal oil temperature and by
activating E F used for capacity regulation.
With the slide in minimum position (< 5%) and with
a constant pressure on E (capacity up), it takes
about 60 sec for the slide to move to 100%, and
with a constant pressure on F (capacity down)
approx 60 sec to move down to 0%.
Is this not the case, adjust the throttle valves.
Volume ratio slide

The volume ratio slide is moved by adding or removing oil for the slide piston cylinder. The movement is controlled by UNISAB II, which activates
the solenoid valves in the oil lines, thus moving
the slide in the desired direction. If this movement
takes place too fast, the system will become very
unstable and give rise to unnecessary wear and
tear of the slide.
To prevent the above, adjustable throttle valves
have been built into the oil lines and by changing
the opening degree of the throttle valves, the slide
movement can be adjusted to a suitable speed.
97/222
UNISAB II 2.03
The speed is checked with the compressor in

MANUAL mode and at a normal oil temperature.
Bring the capacity slide to 20-30% position.
Select picture CAPACITY I VI POSITION I SET
POINT 1.
SETPOINT 1
0.0%
and change the value to -10% by pressing G and

K. This will make the slide move to minimum position.
Return to VI POSITION to check the slide movement.
When the slide has reached minimum, change
SET POINT 1 to 110%. The slide will now move to
maximum position. Check the speed of the movement from 0% to 100% in the picture with VI POSITION.
The movement from 0% to 100% must be adjusted on the throttle valves to last approx 120 sec.
This also applies to the movement from 100% to
0%.
Use SET POINT 1 with either - 10% or 110% to
move the slide back and forth until the speed is
correct.
Variable Zero position

In general
The flow of screw compressors at low slide positions seen in relation to the fully loaded "flow", is
strongly dependent on the operating conditions.
Thus, it has turned out to be expedient to enter a
"floating zero point", which ensures that the compressor operates with a correct slide position.
The program in UNISAB II ensures that the SAB
202 compressor always adapts to the variable operating conditions.
98/222
Based on discharge pressure, suction pressure,

compressor type and capacity, UNISAB II calculates a "zero point" below which the compressor
capacity slide is not permittted to drop while the
compressor is operating.
When the compressor starts, the new "zero point"
will be calculated, and the capacity slide moves as
quickly as possible from a physical zero point (mechanical impact) to the calculated zero. As long as
the slide position is below the calculated zero
point, the capacity is shown as a negative value in
the display.
In case the calculated zero point cannot be set
within a certain time limit, which is dependent on
the calculated movement, an alarm will be issued.
When the compressor stops, the slide will drop to
the calculated zero point. The motor will stop, and
hereafter the slide will be pushed down to the
physical zero position by the built-in spring.
Once the differential pressure across the compressor has been equalized (=1), the calculated
zero point and the physical zero position will be
the same.
If the pressure conditions are changed during operation so that the calculated "zero point" of the
slide is moved (whereby the corrected capacity is
changed), the capacity may be a negative value
for a certain period.
For all other screw compressor types than SAB
202 a "zero point" can be set manually, if required.
This manually set zero point has the same function as described above in the sections for compressor start and stop.
Corrected capacity
UNISAB II will automatically correct the capacity
reading in relation to both the new calculated zero
point and to the Vi slide position when automatic
Vi regulation is included.
0178-445 - ENG
Rev. 03.09
UNISAB II 2.03
With manual Vi regulation the capacity reading is

automatically corrected in relation to the new calculated zero point.
Remember that whenever the Vi slide is moved

manually, the position transmitter of the capacity
slide must be recalibrated at 100%.
The corrected capacity is calculated according to
the following principle:
Fig. 5.5
100%
0%
Corrected capacity
Pressure cond.
Cap. slide
Measured slide pos.
1.5
12
25
0178_430_en.fm
100%
Zero% pos.
Zero slide
The capacity slide signal from the position transmitter is scaled in such a way that 0% is read
when the slide position corresponds to the calculated/set zero point, and 100% is read when the
capacity slide meets the Vi slide, regardless of
whether the setting is carried out automatically or
manually.
Automatic setting of new zero point

(SAB 202)
The zero point for the various types of SAB 202 is
calculated according to a programmed algorithm.
The current calculated value of the zero point is
displayed in picture:
SETUP I DIAGNOSIS I ZERO CAPACITY
POS.
With manual Vi regulation the zero point is corrected and set automatically, corresponding to an optimum setting of the Vi slide. Consequently, it is of
great importance that the setting of the Vi slide
is correct.
Rev. 03.09
4.5
0%
0%
0178-445 - ENG
Volume cond.:
100%
0%
Vi slide
Manual setting of new zero point (all

types of screw compressors)
For all screw compressor types without automatic zero point setting, it is possible to set a "zero
point" manually, below which the compressor capacity slide is not allowed to drop while the compressor is operating.
For SAB 202S and SAB 202L, which have automatic settings of the zero point, manual setting is
usually not allowed.
The manual setting of the zero point is carried out
in the picture SETUP I CONFIG. in the configuration point:
MANUAL ZERO 0.0%
The setting ranges between 0-40% of max capacity slide travel (at Vi ratio = 2).
With manual Vi regulation the zero point is corrected automatically by a factor that depends on
an optimum (calculated) setting of the Vi-slide.
Consequently, it is very important that the setting of the Vi slide is correct.
99/222
UNISAB II 2.03
The setting will be stored when the compressor

stops and/or UNISAB II is switched off.
will be stopped. The timer is reset (set to the reset

value) and is restarted once the slide moves below -2% capacity.
Built-in spacer block
The timer is set in the picture SETUP I TIMERS

I TIMER RESET in the timer
If the compressor has a built-in spacer block and

Vi regulation is automatic, the MECHANICAL
ZERO must be set on YES. Thus, the travel of the
capacity slide will be reduced by the % value
[0-40%] which is entered in MANUAL ZERO so
that the corrected capacity may be calculated and
shown correctly.
The value [0-40%] that must be entered in MANUAL ZERO must have the following size:
CAP.NEG.
The reset value can be set in the interval of
60-20000. The factory value is 10000.
It is very important that the timer has been set correctly. Too low a value will result in the alarm Capacity error. Too high a value will make the compressor run for too long a period with a negative
capacity.
Fig. 5.6
Configuration
length of spacer block
manual zero =
100%
length of total capacity travel
Setting of MECHANICAL ZERO is carried out in

the picture SETUP I CONFIG. in the configuration point:
MECHANICAL ZERO [NO/YES]
MANUAL ZERO 0.0%
The position transmitter is calibrated with the
spacer block mounted and the Vi-slide in minimum
(0%).
The alarm
In case the slide cannot reach the position corresponding to a calculated or set zero point (ie a
positive read capacity) before the expiry of the
timer Tcap.neg., the compressor will be stopped with
the following alarm:
CAPACITY ERROR
Each second the timer Tcap.neg. is counting down by
a factor somewhere between 1 and 180 depending upon the read negative capacity. Each time
the slide moves above 0% read capacity, the timer
100/222
To obtain a correct calculation of the zero point, it

is important that the compressor type and swept
volume have been entered correctly.
The swept volume of the compressor is determined on the basis of:
Compressor type
RPM (50/60 Hz)
Male/female rotor
In case of SAB 202, UNISAB II will automatically
enter a swept volume value corresponding to the
S type with Male rotor and a 2-pole 50 Hz motor,
ie 1229 m3/h. The correct swept volume must be
based on the number of revolutions of the compressor, ie 50/60 Hz supply, and on whether the
compressor has male or female rotor drive:
SAB 202 SM/ 50 Hz, swept volume = 1229 m3/h
SAB 202 SM/ 60 Hz, swept volume = 1475 m3/h
SAB 202 SF/ 50 Hz, swept volume = 1843 m3/h
SAB 202 SF/ 60 Hz, swept volume = 2212 m3/h
SAB 202 LM/ 50 Hz, swept volume = 1590 m3/h
SAB 202 LM/ 60 Hz, swept volume = 1908 m3/h
SAB 202 LF/ 50 Hz, swept volume = 2385 m3/h
SAB 202 LF/ 60 Hz, swept volume = 2862 m3/h
0178-445 - ENG
Rev. 03.09
UNISAB II 2.03
The nominal swept volume at 50 Hz can be read

on the compressor name plate.
As mentioned earlier, two new configuration
points have been introduced in the picture SETUP
I CONFIG.:
Only if the compressor has a built-in spacer block

as well as automatic Vi regulation, the MECANICAL ZERO must be set on YES. In all other cases MECHANICAL ZERO is set on NO. See section Built-in Spacer Block.
0178_430_en.fm
See section Manual setting of new zero point.
Zero pos. picture
MECHANICAL ZERO NO [/YES]

MANUAL ZERO 0.0%
CALCULATED ZERO
MANUAL ZERO
CAP. POSITION
CAPACITY
Manual setting of the zero point is carried out by

entering a zero point between 0-40% of max capacity slide travel in MANUAL ZERO 0.0%
22.0%
0.0%
66.5%
100.0%
Reading of the current calculated zero point value

as well as any manual set zero point value takes
place in the diagnosis picture:
SET UP I DIAGNOSIS I ZERO
CAPACITY POS.
(current reading 0-40%)

(manual adjustment 0-40%)
(current slide position corresponds to 4-20 mA
(corrected capacity - as read)
Electrical slide control
Part load and full load
(Screw compressors SAB 250 and SAB 330)

These screw compressors are fitted with a capacity slide (master slide) driven by an AC motor
through magnetic transmission, gearbox and
spindle, as well as a hydraulical Vi slide (baby
slide) which is controlled by a solenoid valve. The
digital output for the valve is always controlled automatically by UNISAB II. Only the capacity slide
is fitted with a position transmitter.
As regards capacity control and Vi adjustment,

there are two operating modes: Part load and full
load.
Note that the minimum pulse when moving the capacity slide is 1 second. For a SAB 330L this corresponds to a minimum capacity position change
of 1.8%. It is very useful to have this in mind when
adjusting the PID regulators. Further, there is a
pause of at least 1 second when changing the rotation direction of the motor.
0178-445 - ENG
Rev. 03.09
At full load, the capacity is by definition 100%. By

activating the solenoid valve, the Vi slide is forced
in mesh with the capacity slide. The Vi is then adjusted by changing the capacity slide position,
which consequently moves the Vi slide. Note that
in the survey pictures, full load is indicated in the
fourth line by a solenoid valve symbol:
At part load, the Vi slide is reset to minimum position by deactivating the solenoid valve. The capacity slide is moved according to the capacity requirement.
UNISAB II changes from part load to full load
mode when the capacity exceeds the selected
limit, VI MODE included in the picture SETUP I
101/222
UNISAB II 2.03
CONFIG I COMPRESSOR. The default limit is

VI MODE = 97%, but it can be adjusted in the
range 70 to 97%.
UNISAB II returns to part load when the capacity
requirement decreases.
The changes described are performed automatically in any of the modes MANUAL, AUTO and
REMOTE.
moved as quickly as possible down into the area

where UNISAB II calculates that the power consumption will be reasonable. After this, UNISAB II
will move on to points 2 and 3.
Change to part load

When changing from full load to part load,
UNISAB II will run through the following steps:
1.
If necessary, move capacity slide (and thus

Vi slide) as close as possible to the limit VI
MODE to avoid undesirable capacity jumps.
However, stop movement if/when reaching
the limit for reasonable power consumption.
2.
Deactivate solenoid valve of Vi slide to release Vi slide and move it to minimum position.
3.
xcap [%] xVi =100 [%] -xVi [%] *

(Vi-slide [mm] /Cap-slide [mm])
If still necessary, move capacity slide to the

limit VI MODE.
4.
Change to normal capacity control.
While in full load mode, the xcap[%] xVi is the set

point of the capacity slide position regulator.
Position indications
Change to full load
In the picture MOTOR, CAPACITY and VI POSITION are indicated.
Calculated Vi position
When changing to or running in full load mode,
UNISAB II determines an optimal calculated Vi
position xVi [%] according to suction pressure/discharge pressure ratio, compressor type, refrigerant and whether there is an economizer. Furthermore, the corresponding capacity slide position is
calculated:
When changing from part load to full load,

UNISAB II will run through the following steps:
1.
Move capacity slide if necessary (see below).
2.
Activate solenoid valve of Vi slide to force Vi

slide into mesh with capacity slide.
3.
Move capacity slide (and thus Vi slide) to optimal position xcap [%] xVi.
As regards point 1, UNISAB II compares the

above defined xcap [%] xVi with the actual capacity
slide position. If the actual position is much higher
than xcap [%] xVi , the result would be an undesirable
power consumption if the Vi slide valve is activated immediately. Therefore, the capacity slide is
102/222
At full load, CAPACITY indication will show 100%,

while VI POSITION is calculated from the actual
capacity slide position.
At part load, CAPACITY indication will show the
actual capacity slide position, while VI POSITION
is 0%.
Slide brake control

The slide brake is released for a short time BRAKE DLY - before the slide motor is activated.
The brake is also released for the period of time
BRAKE DLY after deactivating the slide motor.
Brake DLY can be selected in the range 0 to 0.5
seconds in the picture DIAGNOSES I MISC.
FUNCTIONS.
0178-445 - ENG
Rev. 03.09
UNISAB II 2.03
Capacity alarm
0178_430_en.fm
If the slide does not move as expected, a capacity

alarm will be issued. This means that each time
the slide moves at least 0.5% in the chosen direction, a CAPACITY timer is reset to 100 seconds. If
a move is expected, the timer will count down. If

the timer reaches 0, the alarm will be issued. The
timer can be inspected in the picture DIAGNOSES I MISC. FUNCTIONS.
0178-445 - ENG
Rev. 03.09
103/222
UNISAB II 2.03
104/222
0178-445 - ENG
Rev. 03.09
UNISAB II 2.03
6. Limiting functions
0178_431_en.fm
UNISAB II includes a number of limiting functions
(in the following called limiters).
There is a standard limiter for each of the following:
The purpose of a limiter is to prevent shutdowns

by limiting or even changing the compressor capacity when the measured value exceeds the selected limits. In most cases, "changing the capacity" means decreasing it. However, this is not the
case with all limiters.
High motor current
Low brine temperature
High water temperature
In general, a limiter can be watching, passive or

active. While all limiters are watching, the compressor start/stop and the capacity regulation will
work normally.
High differential pressure

Pdiff =Pdisch - Psuct (HPO and
HPC reciprocating compressors)
While a limiter is passive or active, the compressor cannot be started. If the compressor is in operation, the capacity regulation will be partly disabled. Further, if a limiter is active, the capacity will
be changed actively.
All relevant limiters are permanently in operation.
If necessary, they will intervene in any of the operating modes MANUAL, AUTO and REMOTE.
In case the compressor is in MANUAL mode and
a limiter is active, the capacity slide will automatically be returned to its original value as soon as
the limiter is watching.
When a limiter is passive or active, the red lamp
will flash slowly, and the warning relay will be activated. Further, the display will show whether the
limiter is passive or active.
0178-445 - ENG
Rev. 03.09
Furthermore, the following special limiters exist:
Suction ramp
Standard limiters
The standard limiting function is based on the user
selected high/low alarm limit, high/low warning
limit and the limiting zone Lz. In the special case
of the high motor current limiter, the value of Lz is
2% for screw compressors and 5% for reciprocating compressors. In all other cases, Lz is calculated as half the difference between the alarm limit
and the warning limit.
Fig. 6.1illustrates how a standard limiter works
with the high discharge pressure limiter as example.
105/222
UNISAB II 2.03
Fig. 6.1
RECIPROCATING COMPRESSORS
(ALL LIMITERS EXCEPT MOTOR CURRENT
LIMITER)
SCREW COMPRESSORS (ALL LIMITERS) and

RECIPR. COMPRESSORS (MOTOR CURRENT
LIMITER)
ALARM
WARNING
Limiting zone
Time
Time
Limiter is watching. Normal control, capacity can increase or decrease. If compressor is not in operation, it can be started.
2
3
Limiter changes from watching to passive.
4
5
Limiter becomes active. Capacity is reduced at once, and timer begins to count.
6
7
8
Limiter is passive. Capacity cannot be increased. Capacity is not reduced by Limiter,

but possibly by egulator. If compressor is not running, it cannot be started.
Limiter is active. At each timeout, capacity is reduced and timer restarted, until compressor stops at low capacity. If compressor is not running, it cannot be started.
Limiter changes from active to passive.
Limiter changes from passive to watching.
Compressor is stopped (shutdown) immediately.
In the example, the alarm (= shutdown) limit for

high discharge pressure has been set for 16 bar,
while the warning limit is 14 bar. As indicated, the
size of the limiting zone (Lz) is then (16 -14) / 2 =
1 bar. The limit of the limiting zone is thus warning
limit - Lz = 14 -1 = 13 bar.
As shown in Fig. 6.1, most reciprocating compressor limiters differ from the corresponding limiters
for screw compressor in the way that when the
measured value is within the limiting zone, the status of the limiter will depend on whether the limiter
has been watching or active. If the limiter has
been watching, it will remain watching in the limiting zone. If the limiter has been active, it will become passive for as long as it is in the limiting
zone.
106/222
Motor current limiter

Even the high motor current limiter is special for
reciprocating compressors. When one stage is
disengaged due to the limiter, the resulting motor
current drop will be measured. It is assumed that
if the stage is re-engaged, the motor current will
increase by the size of the drop. To avoid disengaging and re-engaging in turn, the limiter will ensure that the stage will not be re-engaged until the
resulting current will be below 95% of the limit for
the limiter zone.
Note that the warning limit for motor current is
SET POINT 1 selected in the picture MOTOR I
MOTOR POWER. If SETPOINT 1 = 1000 kW,
the limit for the limiting zone will be 1000 - 2%

= 980 kW for screw compressors, and 1000 5% = 950 kW for reciprocating compressors.
0178-445 - ENG
Rev. 03.09
UNISAB II 2.03
High difference pressure limiter

Note in particular that this limiter only applies to
HPO and HPC compressors and that it has a fixed
warning limit of 25.2 bar and a fixed alarm limit of
26 bar. The limiter is released at 25 bar and it is
passive between 25-25.2 bar.
Special limiters
0178_431_en.fm
High suction pressure limitation

It is possible to have a high suction pressure limiting function. The effect of this high suction pressure limiting function is that the compressor capacity is limited to an adjustable max value whenever the suction pressure is above the suction
pressure warning limit.
Max capacity at "high suction pressure limitation"
is set in picture:
SETUP I CALIBRATE I CAP. LIMIT as: LIMIT
HIGH xxx.x%.
High limit can be set between 0% and 100%
where a setting of 100% disables the function.
In the WARNING picture the text "SUCT. PRESS
HIGH LIM" will appear.
Suction ramp
With the timer SUCTION RAMP it is possible to indicate the speed at which the compressor is allowed to lower its suction pressure 1C. The function, which is used for as long as the compressor
is working down towards its normal operating
point, is a combination of low suction pressure limiting function and a ramp function.
If the suction pressure ramp limiting function prevents the compressor from increasing its capacity
above 5%, the timer STOP DELAY will not be activated and the compressor will continue operating.
The suction pressure limitation without the ramp
function can stop the compressor if capacity
comes below 5% for a longer period.
0178-445 - ENG
Rev. 03.09
High discharge pipe temperature (one-stage reciprocating compressors)

From version 1.10 and onwards a capacity limiting
function has been entered for all one-stage reciprocating compressors using refrigerant R717.
This function is activated at certain operating conditions, especially at excessive differential pressure, corresponding to the operating diagram
zone 2 (zone 4, however, for CMO, SMC 100 S/L
and SMC 180).
At such operating conditions compressors of the
CMO/HPO and SMC/HPC type must as minimum
load 50% of their capacity when starting up and
during operation.
At present the limit curve (which is a straight line)
is fixed on the basis of a max permissible discharge pipe/oil temperature(T2max) of 150C as
well as suction superheating of 10C.
Whenever the limiting function is active, the following will occur at start-up:
Capacity stages corresponding to a minimum of 50% will be loaded.
When the limiting function is active during operation, with 50% capacity or more, the following will
occur:
It is impossible, both in MANUAL, AUTO
or REMOTE, to unload capacity stages
so that the capacity drops below 50%, ie
50/66% are the lowest capacity stages also when "total unloading" has been selected.
In AUTO and REMOTE the timer STOP
DELAY will be started at 50/66% if the
regulator sends out a down regulating
signal. If one of the limiting functions is
to unload capacity, the timer DELAY
DOWN will be started at 50/66%.
107/222
UNISAB II 2.03
If the compressor is operating at a capacity below

50% when the limiting function is active, the limiting function will not actively begin to load stages.
However, the following will take place:
In MANUAL the compressor will be
stopped on the "total unloading timer"
provided that the capacity stays below
50% for more than approx 4 mins.
In AUTO and REMOTE the compressor
will be stopped on the "total unloading
timer" provided the regulator is neutral
and capacity remains below 50% for
more than approx 4 mins.
If the regulator sends out a regulating
down signal, the timer STOP DELAY will
be started.
In the WARNING picture the text LIMITING DISCHARGE TEMP. will appear if the compressor is
to be stopped on the "total unloading timer" due to
insufficient capacity or if the limiting function prevents the capacity from being reduced in MANUAL, AUTO or REMOTE.
The limit curve (limiting zones 2/4) corresponds as
standard to suction superheating of 10C (factory
value).
Since the limit curve is directly dependent on the
suction superheating of the plant, the actual superheating of the plant must be entered as set
point 2 in picture: SUCTION SIDE I SUCTION
SUPERHEAT. I SETPOINT 2 if it differs from the
above factory value.
Adjusting range: -10 - +30C
If one of the other limiting functions is to

unload capacity, the timer DELAY
DOWN will stop at 50/66%.
By adjusting SET POINT 2 parameter for suction

superheating upwards or downwards, the limit
curve will be dislocated accordingly.
If the regulator sends out a regulating up

signal and the compressor is loading
stages so that capacity rises to 50% or
more, the situation will be the same as
the one described in the previous section.
If SET POINT 2 is set for -10C, the limit curve will

be dislocated so much upward - 20C compared
to normal - that the limiting fuction will be disconnected.
108/222
0178-445 - ENG
Rev. 03.09
UNISAB II 2.03
Display indications
The following tables show the texts appearing in
the display in connection with the various limiters.
Screw compressors
Limiter
Overview picture indication

Compressor
stopped
Compressor
running
WARNING picture,
Passive indication
WARNING picture,
Active indication
Standard Limiters:
READY
SUCTION LIM.
LIMITING SUCT. PRESS
SUCT. PRESS LOW LIM
READY
DISCHARGE LIM.
LIMITING DISCH. PRESS
DISCH. PRES HIGH LIM
Irrelevant
RUNN. OVERLOAD
None
None
READY
SUCTION LIM.
LIMITING BRINE TEMP and

BRINE TEMP LOW LIM and

LIMITING BRINE TEMP
READY
DISCHARGE LIM.
LIMITING HOT WATER and

LIMITING DISCH. PRESS
BRINE TEMP HIGH LIM and

LIMITING HOT WATER
Irrelevant
Irrelevant
Irrelevant
Irrelevant
High motor current
Special Limiters:
0178_431_en.fm
READY
SUCTION LIM. 1)
None2) 3)
SUCT. PRESS HIGH LIM3)
Suction ramp
Irrelevant
SUCTION LIM.
Irrelevant
High discharge temp.
Irrelevant
Irrelevant
Irrelevant
Irrelevant
Recipr. compressor
Overview picturei ndication

Compressor stopped or running
WARNING picture,
Passive indication
Limiter
WARNING picture,
Active indication
Standard Limiters:
SUCTION LIM.
None
SUCT. PRESS LOW LIM
DISCHARGE LIM.
None
DISCH. PRES HIGH LIM
RUNN. OVERLOAD
None
None
SUCTION LIM.
LIMITING BRINE TEMP
BRINE TEMP LOW LIM and

LIMITING BRINE TEMP
DISCHARGE LIM.
LIMITING HOT WATER
BRINE TEMP HIGH LIM and

LIMITING HOT WATER
DISCHARGE LIM.
None
HIGH DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE
SUCTION LIM. 1)
None2) 3)
SUCT. PRESS HIGH LIM3)
SUCTION LIM.
None
None
None
None
LIMITING DISCH. TEMP

High motor current
Special Limiters:
Suction ramp
0178-445 - ENG
Rev. 03.09
109/222
UNISAB II 2.03
pressure comes below the warning limit less

2C/R.
Notes:
1.
Only shown while capacity is limited.
2.
If limiter is active (at suction pressure >

warning limit), it will remain active until the
110/222
3.
Limiter is not active or passive like standard

limiters. It actively limits capacity so that it is
less than or equal to the selected LIMIT
HIGH.
0178-445 - ENG
Rev. 03.09
UNISAB II 2.03
7. Compressor control and surveillance
0178_432_en.fm

The various types of reciprocating and screw
compressors start in differents ways. Some types
have prelubrication whereas others start directly.
Under all circumstances certain alarms are suppressed at this stage as described in sections
Alarms and warnings and Timers.
Starting sequence
When the compressor has received starting permission, the oil full flow pump will start. Make sure
that the capacity slide is in minimum position. On
SAB 202 this is generally always the case as the
slide is pushed down by a spring.
SAB 202, SAB 163H/128H MK3 with oil

pump & VMY Mk3 with full flow pump
The oil is pumped into the compressor lubrication

system, and when the oil flow switch is activated,
the prelubrication period will start.
The pump is used for prelubrication and for maintaining of a minimum oil pressure level during operation. The pump is started and stopped in accordance with the compressor differential pressure during operation.
When the time has expired the compressor is

started and the pump will now run for min 60 sec.
The pump will stop when the differential pressure
is above SET POINT 2 as described above.
The difference is set in the picture OIL I OIL

PRESSURE I PARAMETER whereupon SET
POINT 1 and SET POINT 2 appear.
is to start, and SET POINT 2 is the pressure at
which the pump is to stop. Consequently, adjust
SET POINT 1 to the lowest pressure level.
Alarm surveillance
During start the following alarms are delayed:
Low oil pressature
45 sec
High filter diff. pressure
300 sec
Low superheat
300 sec
High superheat
300 sec
Low/high oil temperature
300 sec
Normal setting for SAB 202:

SET POINT 1 = 2.5 Bar
SET POINT 2 = 4 Bar
Move the cursor to SET POINT 1 and press G
until the cursor moves to the right in the picture.
With K and J set the value. When the value has
been set, press G once more.
In the same way adjust SET POINT 2.
If the compressor differential pressure (discharge
pressure - suction pressure) is below SET POINT
1 during operation, the pump will start immediately.
When the compressor differential pressure has
been higher than SET POINT 2 for 60 sec, the
pump will stop.
0178-445 - ENG
Rev. 03.09
SAB 128HR and 163HR with oil pump

The compressors SAB 128 and SAB 163 HR are
frequency regulated screw compressors, ie the
capacity slide is fixed in maximum position and
cannot be moved.
The electric oil pump is used for prelubrication and
for maintenance of a minimum oil pressure during
operation.
The pump is started and stopped in accordance
with the compressor differential pressure during
operation.
POINT 1 and SET POINT 2 will appear.
111/222
UNISAB II 2.03
Normal setting for SAB 128/163 HR:

SET POINT 2 =4.0 Bar
Set points are adjusted as described in the previous section.
Starting sequence
Once the compressor has received permission to
start, the oil pump will start and oil will be pumped
into the compressor lubrication system.
The oil flow switch must be activated within 600
seconds to avoid disconnection.
When the oil flow switch is activated, the solenoid
valve (capacity slide down) will be open for 15
seconds and the electric fan will start. The frequency converter will receive a signal to start.
The speed is increased to 1000 rpm in 10 seconds.
The pump will operate for a minimum of 60 seconds and stop if the differential pressure is higher
than SET POINT 2 as described above.
Alarm surveillance
See also section Timers.
Low oil pressure
45 sec
300 sec
Low superheat
300 sec
High superheat
300 sec
300 sec
SAB 283, SAB 330 and SAB 355 with oil

pump
The pump is used for prelubrication and for maintaining a minimum oil pressure level during operation. The pump is started and stopped in accord-
112/222
ance with the compressor differential pressure

during operation.
is to start, and SET POINT 2 is the pressure at
which the pump is to stop. Consequently, adjust
SET POINT 1 to the lowest pressure level.
Normal setting for SAB 250/330:
until the cursor moves to the right of the picture.
With K and J set the value. When the value has
been set, press G once more.
In the same way adjust SET POINT 2.
been higher than SET POINT 2 for 60 sec, the
pump will stop.
Starting sequence
When SAB 250/330 compressor stops, UNISAB II
will attempt to move the capacity slide below 5%
capacity. If this does not succeed, a CAPACITY
ERROR alarm will be issued and the compressor
will not start.
When the compressor has recieved starting permission, the oil full flow pump will start.
system, and when the oil flow switch is activated,
the prelubrication period will start.
When the time has expired, the compressor will
start and the pump will now run for min 60 sec.
0178-445 - ENG
Rev. 03.09
UNISAB II 2.03
The pump will stop when the differential pressure

is above SET POINT 2 as described above.
Alarm surveillance
Low oil pressure
45 sec
300 sec
Low superheat
300 sec
High superheat
300 sec
300 sec
The delayed alarms are described in section Timers.
0178_432_en.fm
SAB 80 with fitted (mechanical) oil

pump
Starting sequence
When the compressor has received starting permission, it must be checked if the capacity slide is
in minimum position. Before starting the compressor, the oil level switch in the oil separator must be
activated.
Start the compressor.
After a delay of 60 seconds from compressor
start, no signal from the level switch for more than
10 seconds will result in disconnection.
Alarm surveillance
Low oil pressure
45 sec
300 sec
Low superheat
300 sec
High superheat
300 sec
300 sec
GSV/RWF with oil pump

The pump is used for prelubrication and for maintaining a minimum oil pressure level during operation. The pump is started and stopped in accordance with the compressor differential pressure
during operation.
is to start whereas SET POINT 2 is the pressure
at which the pump is to stop. Consequently, set
SET POINT 1 for the lowest pressure level.
Normal setting for GSV/RWF:
SET POINT 1 = 2.5 bar.
SET POINT 2 = 4.0 bar.
until the cursor has moved to the right side of the
picture. Set the value by means of K and J .
When the value has been set, press G once
more.
SET POINT 2 is set in the same way.
been higher than SET POINT 2 for 60 seconds,
the pump will stop.
Starting sequence
When the compressor has received starting permission, check whether the capacity slide is still in
minimum position. In case of compressor stop,
make sure that the capacity slide and the volume
slide (if fitted with automatic Vi) are in minimum
position.
See also section Timers
0178-445 - ENG
Rev. 03.09
113/222
UNISAB II 2.03
Before start-up the oil level switch in the oil separator must be active. If this is not the case, an
alarm for oil system error will be issued.
Normal setting for SV24/26:
No signal from the oil level switch will result in disconnection after a delay of 60 seconds from compressor start or during operation.
If the oil level switch is active, the prelubrication

period will begin and the oil will be pumped into
the compressor lubrication system. When the time
period has expired, the compressor will start and
the pump will run for min 60 seconds. The pump
will stop if the differential pressure is higher than
SET POINT 1.
Alarm surveillance

Starting sequence
Once the compressor has received starting permission, check that the capacity slide is in minimum position. The oil pump is started and oil will
now be pumped into the compressor lubrication
system. To avoid disconnection, the oil flow switch
must be activated within 45 seconds.
When the oil flow switch is activated, the compressor will start.
Low oil pressure
45 sec
300 sec
Low superheat
300 sec
High superheat
300 sec
Low oil pressure
45 sec
300 sec
300 sec
Low superheat
300 sec
High superheat
300 sec
300 sec
The delayed alarms are described in section Timers.
Alarm surveillance
SV 24/26 with oil pump

The compressors SV 24 and SV 26 are small slide
regulated screw compressors.
The electrical oil pump is used for prelubrication
and maintenance of a minimum oil pressure during operation.
operation.
114/222
FV 24/26 with oil pump

The compressors FV 24 and FV 26 are small frequency regulated screw compressors, ie the
mounted slide is only used during start and stop.
and for maintenance of a minimum oil pressure
during operation.
operation.
0178-445 - ENG
Rev. 03.09
UNISAB II 2.03

Normal setting for FV 24/26:
Starting sequence
Once the compressor has received permission to
start, the oil pump will start and oil is pumped into
the compressor lubrication system.
0178_432_en.fm

When the oil flow switch is activated, the solenoid
valve (capacity slide down) will be open for 15
seconds and the electrical fan will start. The frequency converter will then receive a signal to
start.
The pump will operate for a minimum of 60 seconds and will stop if the differential pressure is
higher than SET POINT 2 as described above.
Alarm surveillance
Low oil pressure
45 sec
300 sec
Low superheat
300 sec
High superheat
300 sec
300 sec
See also section Timers
0178-445 - ENG
Rev. 03.09
FV 19 with oil pump

The compressor FV 19 is a small frequency regulated screw compressor without the stage regulated capacity control as featured in the SV 19.
and for maintenance of a minimum oil pressure
during operation.
operation.
Normal setting for FV 19:
Set points are adjusted as described in the previous chapter.
Starting sequence
Once the compressor has received starting permission, the oil pump will start and oil will be
pumped into the compressor lubrication system.
When the oil flow switch is activated, an oil
by-pass solenoid valve for unloading will open for
15 seconds and the electrical fan will start.
Starting signal is transmitted to the frequency converter.
115/222
UNISAB II 2.03
Alarm surveillance
The pump will run for 60 sec and stop.

Alarm surveillance
Low oil pressure
45 sec
300 sec
Low oil pressure
45 sec
Low superheat
300 sec
300 sec
High superheat
300 sec
Low superheat
300 sec
High/low oil temperature
300 sec
High superheat
300 sec
300 sec
VMY Mk 3
without full flow pump
Once the compressor has received starting permission, the oil pump will start. Check that the capacity slide is in minimum position.
system. As soon as the oil flow switch has been
activated, the prelubrication period will start.
When the time period has expired, the compressor will start and the pump will run for 60 sec.
Alarm surveillance
Low oil pressure
45 sec
300 sec
Low superheat
300 sec
High superheat
300 sec
300 sec
VMY Mk 2 and 2.5 with built-in oil pump

Once the compressor has received starting permission, the pump will start. Make sure that the
capacity slide is in minimum position.
The compressor will start working.
116/222
SAB 110/128/163 Mk 2
without oil pump
Once the compressor has received starting permission, make sure that the capacity slide is in
minimum position.
Start the compressor and wait for a signal from the
oil flow switch for max 50+10 sec.
If there is no signal from the oil flow switch for 10
sec during operation, the compressor will stop.
Alarm surveillance
Low oil pressure
45 sec
300 sec
Low superheat
300 sec
High superheat
300 sec
300 sec
SAB 128/163 Mk 2 Booster with oil

pump
Once the compressor has received starting permission, the pump will start. The built-in spring ensures that the capacity slide is in minimum position.
0178-445 - ENG
Rev. 03.09
UNISAB II 2.03
Start the compressor and wait for a signal from the

oil flow switch for max 50+10 sec.
If there is no signal from the oil flow switch for 10
sec during operation, the compressor will stop.
The oil pump runs continually during operation to
ensure sufficient pressure to move the capacity
slide.
0178_432_en.fm
Alarm surveillance
Low oil pressure
45 sec
300 sec
Low superheat
300 sec
High superheat
300 sec
300 sec
SAB 163 Mk 1 with oil pump
Low superheat
300 sec
High superheat
300 sec
300 sec
No particular starting up sequence exists for reciprocating compressors. However, some alarms are
delayed at this stage.
Alarm surveillance
Low oil pressure
60 sec
High oil pressure
20 sec
Low suct.gas superheat
15 sec
High suct.gas superheat
300 sec
300 sec
Low disch. gas superheat
300 sec
Low/high intermediate discharge

temperature
300 sec
Once the compressor has received starting permission, the pump will start. The built-in spring ensures that the capacity slide is in minimum position.

system and when the oil flow switch is activated,
the prelubrication period will begin.
The following descriptions of the various functions

must be compared with the wiring diagrams in
which the activating connections are included.
When this period has expired, the compressor will

start, and the pump will work for 300 sec and then
stop.
External starting permission immediate stop
In case of a booster compressor, the pump will

run continually during operation to ensure sufficient pressure to move the capacity slide.
Alarm surveillance
Low oil pressure
300 sec
300 sec
0178-445 - ENG
Rev. 03.09
The input must be connected in order for the compressor to run in MANUAL, AUTO or REMOTE. If
this input is opened during operation, the compressor will stop immediately.
When the input is open, STOPPED will appear in
the bottom line of the display.
117/222
UNISAB II 2.03
External starting permission normal stop
sued while the oil pump is in manual operation for

oil charging.
This input and IMMEDIATE STOP must be connected before the compressor is going to start in
AUTO or REMOTE. If the input has not been connected, the display will read STOPPED in the bottom line.
If the pump is to stop before time expiry, select NO

under START OIL PUMP.
If the input is opened during operation, the compressor capacity will move to its minimum position, and the compressor will stop on its delay before the actual time to stop.
In case the input CAPACITY DOWN BLOCKED is
connected, the compressor will not reduce capacity once the input EXTERNAL STARTING PERMISSION NORMAL STOP is opened.
Oil charging, manual (screw

compressors)
Oil charging cannot take place with UNISAB II in
"STOPPED". If the compressor is fitted with an oil
pump for oil charging, it can be started in the following way:
Select menu TIMERS I OIL CHARGING and the
following picture will appear:
START OIL PUMP
NO
TIMER
0 sec
Place the cursor on TIMER and press G until the

cursor moves to the right. Set the number of seconds the pump is to run. Press G and move the
cursor back to START OIL PUMP. Press G until
the cursor moves to the right, then select YES with
J or K .
The pump will now start and run for the time set.
For SAB 202, SAB Mk3 and VMY Mk3 compressors a warning "Watch the oil pressure" will be is-
Note: As from 2001 SAB 128/163 Mk3 and SAB

202 are no longer as standard fitted with a valve
for external connection to the oil pump suction
side. Thus it is not possible to charge oil with the
unit oil pump.
Motor current measuring

UNISAB II can be supplied with a signal 0-1 Amp
AC directly from a current transformer in the compressor motor starter.
The value for the voltage ratio of the current transformer must be entered in the menu CONFIG I
RANGE M. CURR to get a correct reading of the
current.
Next, select menu MOTOR I MOTOR CURRENT and the following picture will appear:
ACTUAL SP
XX A
SET POINT 1
XX A
SET POINT 2
XX A
In SET POINT 1 enter the motor full load current

of the motor as read on the name plate. In SET
POINT 2 a lower value may be entered if the absorbed current is to be limited in certain periods.
Set points are set by placing the cursor on SET
POINT 1 or SET POINT 2 respectively. Press G
until the cursor moves to the right. The correct
number can now be set by using J or K .
It is possible to change between two set points by
opening or closing a digital input. See wiring diagrams.
Open input = SET POINT 1.
See also Current limiters.
118/222
0178-445 - ENG
Rev. 03.09
UNISAB II 2.03
Motor power measuring

UNISAB II can be supplied with a 4-20 mA signal
from a power transmitter of 0-xxxx KW.
Enter the power ratio of the power transmitter in
the menu CONFIG I RANGE M. CURR to get a
correct reading of the power output.
In the menu CALIB I CALIBRATE COP, select
MOTOR SIGNAL for kW.
0178_432_en.fm
Then select the menu MOTOR I MOTOR POWER, and the following picture will appear:
ACTUAL SP
xxxx KW
SET POINT 1
xxxx KW
SET POINT 2
xxxx KW
In SET POINT 1 enter the motor top load power

read on the name plate. In SET POINT 2 a lower
value can be entered for periods when less power
is required.
Switch between the two set points by opening or
closing a digital input, cf wiring diagrams.
Open input = SET POINT 1.
See also Current limiter
COP set-up
UNISAB II can be set for measuring compressor
COP (Coefficient Of Performance), mechanical
efficiency as well as Carnot efficiency.
The measuring of these values are set in the picture CONFIG I COP.
COP ACTIVE
NO
FLOW FACTOR
0.20 l/pls
LIQ. SUBCOOL
3.0
The COP function is connected and disconnected

in the menu SETTING I CONFIG I COP ACTIVE, cf section Configuration.
The calculated COP values are shown in the picture SETTING I DIAGNOSIS I COP.
A more comprehensive description of the COP
funtion and its setting is included in the manual
UNISAB II-COP.
Thermistor connection
If the motor is fitted with thermistors for protection
of the motor temperature, these can be connected
directly to a digital input. See wiring diagrams.
Should the motor temperature rise excessively,
the compressor will stop.
Aux. output
In the menu CALIB I AUX. OUTPUT the following picture will appear:
AUX. OUTPUT
ACTIVATED WHEN
Together with suction and discharge pressure and

temperature, the following values form basis of
the calculations:
Temperature of chilled liquid before evaporator.
NOT USED
The cursor is on AUX. OUTPUT. Press G and

the cursor moves to NOT USED.
With J or K choose between:
Volume flow of cooling gas on pressure side

(m3/h).
READY
AT MIN CAP.
Motor power consumption in kW.
AT MAX CAP.
Motor efficiency.
RUNNING
0178-445 - ENG
Rev. 03.09
119/222
UNISAB II 2.03
READY-EXT.
This function is connected to a digital output. See

wiring diagrams.
1)
2)
in this state by closing a digital input. See wiring

diagrams. The input overrules EXTERNAL
STARTING PERMISSION, NORMAL STOP.
READY: If selecting this function, the output

will be activated when the compressor is
ready for operation in REMOTE. This
means that AUTO START has been configured (and AUTO STOP), EXTERNAL
START NORMAL STOP has been set.
There are no alarms - and the compressor
can start.
In case the compressor runs in limited operation,

it will, however, reduce its capacity. When the
state of operation is back to normal, the compressor will return to full load. See also Limitations.
AT MIN CAP: If selecting this function, the

output will be activated when the compressor is below LOW LIMIT, which is set in the
menu CALIB I CAP. LIMIT. The hysterisis
is 1%.
Power management system (PMS)
If the input is connected while the compressor is

READY to start in AUTO or REMOTE, the compressor will be started by force.
AT MAX CAP: Select this function and the

output is activated when the compressor is
above HIGH LIMIT, which is set in the menu
CALIB I CAP. LIMIT. The hysterisis is 1%.
This function works in MANUAL, AUTO or REMOTE operation. It is a kind of "an agreement to
start" system, consisting of one digital output
"Compressor ready to start", which is set when the
compressor is to start, as well as a digital input
"Permission to start OK". This input must be set
before the timer "PMS confirmation" expires in order for the compressor to start.
Please note that the line CAP.LIMITER is not included in the CALIBRATION menu until the auxiliary output has been selected as either AT MIN.
CAP. or AT MAX. CAP.
The alarm "Power management system error" is

activated if the input "Permission to start OK" has
not been set before the timer "PMS confirmation"
expires.
4)
RUNNING: If selecting this function, the output will be activated whenever the compressor is operating, ie when the start signal to
the compressor has been set.
The signal can be removed during operation without stopping the compressor.
READY-EXT.: This function corresponds to

the above READY function, but here it is not
required that EXTERNAL START NORMAL
STOP must be set for the output to be activated. The function works both in REMOTE
and AUTO.
This function is connected to the regulators for capacity regulation of the compressor.
3)
5)
Capacity down blocked

When the compressor is in max capacity in AUTO
or REMOTE, it is possible to lock the compressor
120/222
Cold store function
Usually, the compressor is going to start in AUTO

or REMOTE/MULITSAB if the measured value is
outside the neutral zone and a capacity requirement exists.
If COLD STORE FUNCTION has been selcected
in the menu CONFIG, the compressor will not
start until the measured value is outside the P
0178-445 - ENG
Rev. 03.09
UNISAB II 2.03
Band. After this, it will regulate normally in accordance with the set point.
pressor is now going to start within the period of

time set in the timer START HPRESS.
Fig. 7.1
After this, the compressors will regulate normally

on the capacity regulator.
Example of cold store function
Please note that the last compressor in operation

in a MULTISAB system (usually the no 1 compressor in the starting sequence) will not stop on
the timer STOP DELAY. It can only be stopped by
opening the input EXT START, NORMAL STOP,
which makes the compressor stop for a moment.
UNISAB II is set for suction

pressure regulation with
Set point (Sp) = -40C
Neutral zone (Nz) = 4 K
Proportional band (Pb) = 5 K
NORMAL
Suct.press (C/R)
-33
-38
-40
Pb = 5 K
Nz = 4 K
Pb = 5 K
1 Compressor start
(Just outside Nz)
0178_432_en.fm
COLD STORE FUNCTION

Suct.press (C/R)
1
-33
Pb = 5 K
-38
-40
Nz = 4 K
Pb = 5 K
1 Compressor start
(Just outside Pb)
Note on screw compressors

It is not recommended to use the cold store
function on screw compressors!
HP on TWO-STAGE
This function is used on two-stage plants to start
HP compressors by force.
HP on TWO-STAGE must have been selected in
the menu CONFIG. The function only works in
REMOTE/MULTISAB.
A compressor is started by force by closing the input EXT START, NORMAL STOP. The first com-
0178-445 - ENG
Rev. 03.09
Oil return (reciprocating compressors)

The solenoid valve for oil return from the oil separator/oil reservoir to the compressor will be open
when the compressor starts and an ON signal is
issued from one digital input (or in the case of
two-stage compressors two digital input).
In case of a one-stage compressor, only the digital
input for high-pressure oil separator is used. Here,
the input must be ON before the digital output oil
return is set.
In case of two-stage compressors where both the
IP and HP part may have their own oil separator,
the digital inputs INTERMEDIATE PRESSURE
OIL RETURN and HIGH PRESSURE OIL RETURN are used. Here, both inputs must be ON
before setting the digital output for oil return.
From version 1.10 the opening of the solenoid
valve(s) for oil return can be combined with an adjustable time delay.
At compressor start the output(s) for oil return
is/are not opened until the time set in the timer OIL
RETURN has expired.
The time delay function will be disconnected if the
timer OIL RETURN is set for 0 sec or when the
digital inputs for intermediate and high pressure
oil return are OFF.
121/222
UNISAB II 2.03
The time delay OIL RETURN is set in the timer

picture TIMER I TIMER SETUP.
DEF. REFRIGERANT R000
Oil heating
Oil heating is NOT a configuration point, but it has
various functions depending on whether the compressor in question is configured as a reciprocating or a screw compressor.
Screw compressors
A heating element will be connected while the
compressor is not in operation and there is no
temperature regulation.
The heating element outlet is activated by decreasing oil temperature. This function is active
both at compressor stand-still and when the compressor is in operation.
The set point of this value is set in picture OIL
TEMP I PARAMETER, SET POINT 2. The set
point has a fixed hysteresis of 5K.
Ex: Set point 2 = 35C:
Heating starts at 35C and stops at (35+5) = 40C.
Definition of refrigerant R000

If the refrigerant used cannot be found in the list of
refrigerants - see section Configuration - it is possible to select a user defined refrigerant designated R000 (the R000 designation does not refer to
any known refrigerant).
Before selecting R000 in SETUP I CONFIG enter the data for the substances (the refrigerant
curve) contained in the refrigerant used.
In the menu SETUP I CALIB I DEF. REFRIGERANT R000, the following picture will appear:
122/222
TEMP:
PRESS (ABS):
-90 C/R
00.00 BAR
-85 C/R
00.00 BAR
-80 C/R
00.00 BAR
-75 C/R
00.00 BAR
-70 C/R
00.00 BAR
-65 C/R
00.00 BAR
-60 C/R
00.00 BAR
-55 C/R
00.00 BAR
-50 C/R
00.00 BAR
-45 C/R
00.00 BAR
-40 C/R
00.00 BAR
-35 C/R
00.00 BAR
-30 C/R
00.00 BAR
-25 C/R
00.00 BAR
-20 C/R
00.00 BAR
-15 C/R
00.00 BAR
-10 C/R
00.00 BAR
-5 C/R
00.00 BAR
00 C/R
00.00 BAR
05 C/R
00.00 BAR
10 C/R
00.00 BAR
15 C/R
00.00 BAR
20 C/R
00.00 BAR
0178-445 - ENG
Rev. 03.09
UNISAB II 2.03
25 C/R
00.00 BAR
70 C/R
00.00 BAR
30 C/R
00.00 BAR
75 C/R
00.00 BAR
35 C/R
00.00 BAR
80 C/R
00.00 BAR
40 C/R
00.00 BAR
45 C/R
00.00 BAR
50 C/R
00.00 BAR
55 C/R
00.00 BAR
60 C/R
00.00 BAR
65 C/R
00.00 BAR
For BAR/C, enter the pressure as absolute pressure in 1/100 BAR. For temperatures enter values
between -90C and +80C with intervals of 5C.
Each pressure value in the table must be given a
certain value.
0178_432_en.fm
The pressure can be entered in the range of 00.00

and 99.99 BAR. The table has been initialized to
00.00 BAR.
0178-445 - ENG
Rev. 03.09
123/222
UNISAB II 2.03
124/222
0178-445 - ENG
Rev. 03.09
UNISAB II 2.03
8. Calibration
8. Calibration
Before initial compressor start-up and after
service1), adjustments of transducers and position
transmitters must be carried out. Their values
have usually been preset by the factory, but a recheck must be made before start-up. This is very
important as failure to adjust may lead to malfunction during operation.
Insufficient or incorrect setting of pressure

transducers may lead to compressor
breakdown or personal injury.
The temperature sensors must be calibrated as
they are connected electrically with four conductors, which automatically makes up for line resistance.
1) Eg in connection with replacement of CPU

prints, relay prints, pressure transducers or batteries. See also section Service.
Pressure transducers
Calibrate the pressure transducers at atmospheric pressure in the compressor.
Use the following pressure transducers:
Table 10
0178_433_en_2.02.fm
Unit = BAR
MEAS.POINT
COMPRESSOR TYPE
SAB/VMY
SMC
TSMC/
HPC/HPO
TCMO
SUCT.PRESS.
PRESS.
-1-+9
-1-+9
-1-+9
-1-+25
-1-+25
-1-+25
-1-+25
-1-+59
OIL PRESS
-1-+25
-1-+25
-1-+25
-1-+25
DIFF PRESS
-1-+25
DISCH.PRESS
INTERM.PRESS
0178-445 - ENG
Rev. 03.09
-1-+25
MAX.
33
55
55
Max.
permissible
deviation at
ATM.PRESS
+/- 0.2
+/- 0.5
200
+/- 0.5
+/- 1.2
55
+/- 0.5
55
+/- 0.5
55
+/- 0.5
125/222
UNISAB II 2.03
8. Calibration
Select the menu CALIBRATE, and the following

picture will be displayed:
Place the cursor on SUCT. ADJUST and use the

G key to change the value.
CALIBRATE
PRESS.TRANSDUCER
BRINE TEMP
Now change the value to the value SUCT. ADJUST is showin, ie 0.2 Bar with opposite sign.
Note that the adjusting value is in 1/100.
CAPACITY
MOTOR FREQ
Vi POSITION
Change SUCT. ADJUST to the value -.20.
4 - 20 mA INPUT
AUX. OUTPUT
CAP. LIMITS
DEF. REFRIGERANT
R000
Note that some of the entries in the CALIBRATE

menu are described in other chapters of this manual.
With the cursor on PRESS.TRANSDUCER, press
I and the following picture will appear:
SUCT. PRESS
SUCT. ADJUST
DISC. PRESS
As it appears from the above example, the measured pressure levels are not 0.0 Bar. Consequently calibration must be carried out.
.20 BAR
.00 BAR
-0.3 BAR
DISC. ADJUST
.00 BAR
OIL PRESS
0.1 BAR
OIL ADJUST
.00 BAR
DIFF. PRESS
-0.1 BAR
DIFF. ADJUST
.00 BAR
IMED. PRESS
0.1 BAR
IMED. ADJUST
.00 BAR
Adjust the other pressure levels in the same way.

However, note that DIFF. PRESS is relevant only
for screw compressors and IMED. PRESS only for
two-stage reciprocating compressors.
The following picture should now appear:
SUCT. PRESS
.00 BAR
SUCT. ADJUST
-.20 BAR
DISC. PRESS
0.0 BAR
DISC. ADJUST
.30 BAR
OIL PRESS
0.0 BAR
OIL ADJUST
-.10 BAR
DIFF. PRESS
0.0 BAR
DIFF. ADJUST
..10 BAR
IMED. PRESS
0.0 BAR
IMED. ADJUST
-.10 BAR
The pressure transducer calibration has now

been carried out correctly.
Note: The pressure values shown are examples

only. At atmospheric pressure the value of the
pressure transducer must be within the limits for
"Max. permissible deviation at atm.pressure" as
indicated in the above table. Is this not the case,
the value will be outside its tolerance and must be
replaced.
Brine temperature
The pressure levels are measured in BAR (relative pressure) and at atmospheric pressure the
reading must show 0.0 Bar to be correct.
The BRINE TEMP value is the immediate value

measured by the sensor. If a test measuring with
a precision thermometer shows eg 18.7C at the
sensor, adjustment can be made.
126/222
Place the cursor on BRINE TEMP and press the

I key once. The following picture will appear:
BRINE TEMP
BRINE ADJUST
18.9C
0.0C
0178-445 - ENG
Rev. 03.09
UNISAB II 2.03
8. Calibration
Place the cursor on BRINE ADJUST and change

the value to -0.2C. BRINE TEMP will now be
18.7C (18.9-0.2), and adjustment has taken
place.
Note that it is only possible to adjust BRINE TEMP
- not the other temperature sensors.
can be adjusted by software as described in section Software adjustment.

Software adjustment
When the capacity position transmitter has been
adjusted mechanically (see section Transmitter
adjustment), it can be fine adjusted by selecting
SETUP I CALIBRATE I CAPACITY.
Calibration of capacity slide signal

Software calibration of the capacity slide position
signal can be used if it is not possible to calibrate
the transmitter itself. See below for information on
software calibration.
0178_433_en_2.02.fm
Calibration of Vi slide signal

Software calibration of the Vi slide position signal
can be used if it is not possible to calibrate the
transmitter itself. See below for information on
software calibration.
Calibration of motor frequency signal
CAPACITY
XXX.X %
CAP. ZERO AD
XX.X %
CAP. 100 ADJ
XX.X %
Follow the same procedure as described for capacity slide calibration in section Transmitter adjustment.
0 % calibration is carried out with the capacity
slide in minimum position. If CAPACITY is not
showing 0.0 %, but eg 1.5 %, position the cursor
on CAP. ZERO AD and change the calibration value to -1.5 % with the G key.
When compressor capacity is regulated wholly or

partly by changes in the motor speed, the motor
frequency signal from the frequency converter
can be calibrated in this menu field.
100 % calibration is carried out with the capacity

slide in maximum position.
If CAPACITY is not showing 100.0 %, but eg 95.8
%, position the cursor on
CAP. 100 ADJ and change the calibration value to
4.2 % with the G key.
Motor current
Transmitter adjustment
The reading of motor current can be calibrated as

described in section Configuration, pos. 19.

(certain screw compressors)
The built-in capacity slide position transmitter as
well as the Vi slide position transmitter must be
adjusted correctly to ensure safe and stable slide
control. This adjustment must always be carried
out mechanically as described in section Transmitter adjustment. Additionally, the capacity signal
0178-445 - ENG
Rev. 03.09
To ensure a safe and stable movement of the

slides, the built-in position transmitter must be adjusted correctly in the mechanical minimum and
maximum of the slide. Furthermore, the slide velocity must be adjusted so that hunting is avoided.
See also Adjusting slide velocity in section Compressor regulation.
Position transmitter
For measuring of slide position, the compressor is
fitted with a position transmitter, which yields 4 20 mA to UNISAB II. There will always be fitted a
transmitter at the capacity slide whereas there
127/222
UNISAB II 2.03
8. Calibration
may be fitted a transmitter at the volume ratio slide

in case the compressor is made for automatic Vi
regulation.
There are four types of position transmitter.
Turning Transmitter(for capacity and Vi) for SAB
110, SAB 128, SAB 163 and SAB 202.
Short-Stroke Transmitter for SAB 283, SAB 355

Vi, from Gram Refrigeration to GSV, RWF capacity and Vi) and capacity for GST.
Fig. 8.4
Fig. 8.1
4.5 4.
3.5
2
3.
100%
2.5
SPAN + ZERO
No. 3
2.
0%
Long-Stroke Capacity Rod Transmitter for SAB

110, SAB 128, SAB 163, SAB 202, SAB 81, SAB
83, SAB 85, SAB 87, SAB 89 and SAB 330.
Adjusting capacity measuring system

for turning transmitter
Fig. 8.2
The turning transmitter has two ways of adjustment. The cover must be removed before adjustment.
ALU-Tube
3
2
Long-Stroke Capacity Rod Transmitter for SAB

283.
In the following drawing(see Fig. 8.5) the zero and

span adjusting screws of the position transmitter
are shown.
Fig. 8.3
ALU-Tube
3
2
128/222
0178-445 - ENG
Rev. 03.09
UNISAB II 2.03
8. Calibration
Fig. 8.5
Slide position
4.5 4.
Volume ratio
3.5
2
3.
Approx min pos

0%
100%
2.5
SPAN + ZERO
1 = 4 - 20 mA
2 = + 24 VDC
3 = GND
No. 3
2.
0%
T0177063_0
0178_433_en_2.02.fm
With the cap/Vi slide in minimum position, adjust

zero until the display shows 0%. With the cap/Vi
slide at maximum positon, adjust span until the
display shows 100%.
Capacity slide adjustment
Start the compressor in MANUAL and make sure
that the capacity slide is in minimum. Adjust the
zero screw of the transmitter until the display
shows 0%.
Now bring the slide to its maximum position (eg
when the current consumption is no longer rising),
and adjust the span until the display shows 100%.
Return the slide to minimum and check.
The following picture will appear:

KAPACITY
XX
CAP. POS
XX
VI POSITION
XX
RUNNING
XX
Select the Vi POSITION and press I to the following picture:
SETPOINT 1
0.0%
Capacity slide adjustment, manual Vi
0.0% in this picture indicates that UNISAB II will

adjust the Vi slide automatically.
Follow the same procedure as above, but note

that adjustment must be made each time the Vi
position is changed.
Change SETPOINT 1 to -10% which will change

the Vi adjustment to manual and place the Vi slide
in minimum position.
Capacity slide adjustment, auto V

To adjust the movement of the capacity slide the
Vi slide must be in minimum position. The Vi slide
is brought to minimum the following way: Start the
compressor in MANUAL, select SETUP I and
then CAPACITY I.
Adjust the capacity slide position as above under

Capacity slide adjustment.
Capacity slide adjustment, auto zero point

For SAB 202 compressors with automatic zero
point setting, there are two applicable methods to
ensure that the automatic zero point setting does
not influence the adjusting of the transmitter zero.
1) Do not set the zero until the compressor has
stopped and the slide is in mechanical zero.
0178-445 - ENG
Rev. 03.09
129/222
UNISAB II 2.03
8. Calibration
2) Disconnect the automatic zero point setting

while setting the transmitter zero. This can be
done by setting MANUAL ZERO = 0.1 in the picture SETUP I CONFIG I COMPRESSOR.
adjust the span screw of the transmitter until the

display shows 100%.
Remember to set MANUAL ZERO = 0.0 as soon

as the capacity slide adjustment is accomplished.
It is important that the compressor only runs for a
brief period of time when the automatic zero point
setting is disconnected.
Change SET POINT 1 to 0.0% for automatic Vi

control. Besides, UNISAB II will change to automatic Vi control itself after the compressor has
been stopped.
Volume ratio slide adjustment, auto Vi
See also Adjusting slide velocity in the Compressor regulation section.
It is assumed that the capacity slide has been set

correctly.
Start the compressor in MANUAL and take the
slide up to 20-30%.
Select CAPACITY I VI POSITION I and the following picture will appear:
Change SET POINT 1 to -10% and check minimum.
Adjusting capacity measuring system for

Long-Stroke Capacity Rod for SAB 110, SAB
128, SAB 163, SAB 202, SAB 81, SAB 83, SAB
85, SAB 87, SAB 89 and SAB 330
As shown below, the capacity transmitter is fitted
with a single calibration button surrounded by a
green and red LED.
Fig. 8.6
SETPOINT 1
0.0%
Calibration push botton

LED-Supply
LED-Digital output
In this picture 0.0% will always mean that the Vi

slide will be adjusted automatically by UNISAB II.
Plug Connection
Change SETPOINT 1 to -10%, which changes the

Vi adjustment to manual and places the Vi slide in
minimum position.
Return with H to the picture:
CAPACITY
XX
CAP. POS
XX
VI POSITION
XX
RUNNING
XX
and adjust the zero screw of the Vi position transmitter until the reading out for the Vi-position is 0%
in the display.
Change SET POINT 1 to 110% and return to the
above picture where the Vi position is now going
to rise. Wait until it does not rise any further and
130/222
Out 4-20mA
Supply +24V DC
CommonGND
During normal operation the red LED is flashing

rather slowly. The green LED is switched on constantly when the transmitter is in 100% position
whereas it flashes quickly when the transmitter is
in 0% position.
Calibration is carried out as follows:
Note: Make sure that UNISAB II is not in alarm.
0178-445 - ENG
Rev. 03.09
UNISAB II 2.03
8. Calibration
1)
Apply supply voltage for a minimum of five

minutes before calibration.
2)
Press the calibration button for five seconds

to get the transmitter in calibration mode.
The red LED will change from normal flash
to OFF.
With stopped compressor, press the calibration button once. The red LED will switch
ON immediately. After ten seconds the red
LED will turn OFF again, indicating that it is
ready for 100% calibration.
4)
Start the compressor and increase capacity

to its maximum, and press the calibration
button twice. The red LED will start flashing
quickly. After ten seconds the red LED will
change to normal flash rate, indicating that
the calibration has been completed.
To make sure that the slide is in maximum
physical position, (UNISAB II does not allow
the capacity button to be activated after
100% indication in the display has been
reached) it is recommended to set CAP
100 ADJ at -10% after 100% calibration of
the transmitter has been completed and the
slide remains in maximum position. See the
Software Calibration section earlier in this
section. The slide indication in the display
must now be 90%. If capacity can be increased further either automatically by UNISAB II or by pressing the UP capacity button, the slide has not yet been calibrated
correctly.
0178_433_en_2.02.fm
3)
5)
If capacity could be increased to more than

90%, cf. above, calibrate the slide again
from point 1 but keep -10% in CAP 100
ADJ.
0178-445 - ENG
Rev. 03.09
6)
Reset CAP 100 ADJ at what it was before

the calibration or until the capacity shows
100%.
7)
The calibration will be remembered even in

case of a power failure.
To return to Factory Set Point, press the CAL.

Switch for twenty seconds. The green and red
LED will give a short flash (one after the other).
The 4-20 mA signal from the transmitter is permanently available. However, during calibration the
signal is based on the default calibration values,
so it will not show 0% at minimum capacity nor
100% at maximum capacity!
Note that it is possible to return to the default calibration values by keeping the CAL Switch
pressed for twenty seconds. However, it is the
transmitter manufacturer's default values, which
are reset. These values may differ very much from
the correct values for the compressor in question.
Reset is indicated by the red and green LED flashing briefly a couple of times.
Adjusting Long-Stroke Capacity Rod

for SAB 283.
For type part no. 1373-038
Note: For long-stroke transmitters with part no.
1373-057 calibration and terminal connection are
similar to that of SAB 110, SAB 128 etc. Please
see section on preceeding page.
green and red LED. During normal operation the
red LED is flashing rather slowly. The green LED
is switched on constantly when the transmitter is
in 100% position whereas it flashes quickly when
the transmitter is in 0% position.
131/222
UNISAB II 2.03
8. Calibration
Fig. 8.7
Long-Stroke SAB 283
Calibrations push button
PLUG CONNECTION:
1 = SUPPLY, +11 to 32V DC

2 = COMMON -, 0V DC
3 = OUT, 4-20mA
LED-supply/operation
LED-digital
output (option)
= GND
2
DIA.
7mm
3
2
60mm
74mm
slide remains in maximum position. See the

Software Calibration section earlier in this
section. The slide indication in the display
must now be 90%. If capacity can be increased further either automatically by UNISAB II or by pressing the UP capacity button, the slide has not yet been calibrated
correctly.

1.

2.
ON. After ten seconds the red LED will turn
OFF to indicate readiness for 100% calibration.
3.
4)
Start the compressor and move the piston/alu tube to 100% position and press the
calibration button again. The red LED will
start flashing quickly. After ten seconds the
calibration will be completed and the red
LED will flash normally.
To make sure that the slide is in maximum
physical position, (UNISAB II does not allow
the capacity button to be activated after
100% indication in the display has been
reached) it is recommended to set CAP
100 ADJ at -10% after 100% calibration of
the transmitter has been completed and the
132/222
5)
If capacity could be increased to more than

90%, cf. above, calibrate the slide again
from point 1 but keep -10% in CAP 100
ADJ.
6)
Reset CAP 100 ADJ at what it was before

the calibration or until the capacity shows
100%.
Adjusting Short-Stroke Capacity Rod

For part no. 1373-037
Note: For short-stroke transmitters with part no.
1373-061 calibration and terminal connection are
similar to that of SAB 100, SAB 128 etc. Please
see preceeding section.
0178-445 - ENG
Rev. 03.09
UNISAB II 2.03
8. Calibration
for GST, GSV and RWF from Gram Refrigeration

and short-stroke volumen rod for GSV, RWF and
SAB 283 and SAB 355.
calibration button again. The red LED will

start flashing quickly. After ten seconds the
calibration will be completed and the red
LED will flash normally.
Fig. 8.8
Capacity slide adjustment, auto Vi

The capacity slide movement must be adjusted
with the Vi slide in minimum position.
Short-Stroke
Calibration push botton
LED-Supply
LED-Digital output
The Vi slide is taken to minimum position in the following way:

Start the compressor in MANUAL and select CAPACITY I . The following picture will appear:
Plug Connection
0178_433_en_2.02.fm
CAPACITY
1 = Supply, 24V DC
2 = Common -, 0V DC
3 = Out, 4-20mA
= GND

green and red LED. During normal operation the
red LED is flashing rather slowly. The green LED
is switched on constantly when the transmitter is
in 100% position whereas it flashes quickly when
the transmitter is in 0% position.
Capacity calibration is carried out as follows:
1.
Apply supply voltage for a minimum five

2.
ON. After ten seconds the red LED will turn
OFF to indicate readiness for 100% calibration.
3.
Start the compressor and move the piston/alu tube to 100% position and press the
0178-445 - ENG
Rev. 03.09
XX
CAP. POS
XX
VI POSITION
XX
RUNNING
XX
Select VI POSITION and press I to the following

picture:
SETPOINT 1
0.0%

minimum position.
Adjust the capacity slide position as described
above under Capacity slide adjustment.
Capacity slide adjustment, auto zero point
For SAB 202 compressors with automatic zero
point setting, two methods can be used to ensure
that the automatic zero point setting does not affect the adjustment of the transmitter zero.
1.
Do not set the zero until the compressor has

stopped and the slide is in mechanical zero.
133/222
UNISAB II 2.03
8. Calibration
2.
Disconnect the automatic zero point setting

while setting the transmitter zero. This is
done by setting MANUAL ZERO = 0.1 in the
picture SETUP I CONFIG.
Remember to set MANUAL ZERO = 0.0
once the capacity slide adjustment has
been completed. The compressor is only
allowed to run for a brief period of time
with the automatic zero point setting disconnected.
Volume ratio slide adjustment, auto Vi

It is assumed that the capacity slide has been set
correctly.
Start the compressor in MANUAL and take the
slide up to 20-30%.
Select CAPACITY I VI POSITION and the following picture will appear:
SETPOINT 1
0.0%

minimum position.
Return with H to the picture:
CAPACITY
XX
CAP. POS
XX
VI POSITION
XX
RUNNING
XX
Wait until Vi does not decrease any further and

push the calibration button once. The red LED is
now constantly ON. After 10 sec. the red LED will
turn OFF to indicate that it is ready for 100% calibration.
134/222
Change SET POINT 1 to 110% and return to the

above picture where the Vi position will increase.
Wait until it does not increase any further and
push the calibration button once again. The red
LED will flash quickly and after 10 sec. the calibration is completed and the red LED will flash normally.
Change SET POINT 1 to -10% and check minimum.
Change SET POINT 1 to 0.0% for automatic Vi
control. UNISAB II will change to automatic Vi
control after the compressor has been stopped.
See also Adjusting slide velocity in section Compressor regulation.
Electrical slide systems (certain screw

compressors)
The built-in capacity slide position transmitter
must be adjusted correctly to ensure safe and stable slide control. This adjustment must always be
carried out as described in section Transmitter adjustment.
Afterwards, the capacity signal must be
adjusted by software as described in section
Software adjustment.
Manual slide positioning
In contrary to hydraulic slides, the electrical capacity slide can be positioned manually for test.
This is useful both when performing transmitter
adjustment and software adjustment.
Select SETUP I CONTROL I COMPRESSORCONTROL = STOPPED and then SETUP I
CALIBRATE I CAPACITY. The picture shown in
section Software adjustment will appear. While
this picture is open (and still STOPPED mode), it
is possible to move the capacity slide by means of
the E and F buttons.
0178-445 - ENG
Rev. 03.09
UNISAB II 2.03
8. Calibration
Note that when reaching the end stop, the alarm

CAPACITY ERROR will be displayed after two
seconds. Release the button at once and reset the
alarm.
Transmitter adjustment
The capacity transmitter is fitted with a single calibration button surrounded by a green and a red
LED as shown in the drawing.
Fig. 8.9
LED-Position
(green)
Calibration
push button
LED-Working
(red)
0178_433_en_2.02.fm
Normally
not visible.
For calibration
remove cover
During normal operation the red LED is flashing

rather slowly. The green LED is switched on constantly when the transmitter is in 100% position
whereas it flashes quickly when the transmitter is
in 0% position.
tion transmitter is ready for 100% calibration.
1.

Increase capacity to its maximum and press

the calibration button twice. The red LED
will start flashing quickly. After ten seconds
the red LED will change to normal flash rate,
indicating that calibration has been completed.
2.
Press the calibration button for five seconds

to get the transmitter in calibration mode.
The red LED will change from normal flash
to OFF.
It is possible to ignore points 3 or 4 or both. Pressing the calibration button for five seconds in calibration mode will bring the transmitter back to normal operation mode.
3.
Decrease capacity to its minimum and press

the calibration button once. The red LED
will turn ON. After ten seconds the red LED
will turn OFF again, indicating that the posi-
The 4-20 mA signal from the transmitter is permanently available. However, during calibration the
signal is based on the default calibration values,
0178-445 - ENG
Rev. 03.09
4.
135/222
UNISAB II 2.03
8. Calibration
so it will not show 0% at minimum capacity nor

100% at maximum capacity!
Note that it is possible to return to the default calibration values by keeping the CAL Switch
pressed for twenty seconds. However, it is the
transmitter manufacturer's default values, which
are reset. These values may differ very much from
the correct values for the compressor in question.
Reset is indicated by the red and green LED flashing briefly a couple of times.
Software adjustment
When the capacity position transmitter has been
adjusted (see section Transmitter adjustment),
the capacity must be further adjusted. It is recommended to introduce a calculation offset of 2% to
ensure that the slide does not collide with the end
stops. Collisions will reduce slide motor service
life, etc.
Select SETUP I CALIBRATE I CAPACITY
CAPACITY
XXX.X %
CAP. ZERO AD
XX.X %
CAP 100 ADJ
XX.X %
Decrease capacity to its minimum. Change CAP.

ZERO AD so that a value of -2.0% is displayed for
CAPACITY.
If capacity is eg 0.3 %
(when CAP. ZERO AD = 0.0%),
select CAP. ZERO AD = - 2.3%.
Increase capacity to its maximum. Change CAP
100 ADJ so that a value of 102.0 % is displayed
for CAPACITY.
If capacity is eg 100.3% (when CAP 100ADJ = 0.0
136/222
%), select
CAP 100ADJ = 1.7 %.
Factory setting
During configuration it is possible to bring
UNISAB II back to its factory settings.
If a factory reset is carried out, the following
points will be affected:
- Alarm and warning limits
- Timer setup
- Regulator settings
- State of control
The factory settings appear from the tables in sections Alarms and Warnings, Timers as well as
Compressor regulation.
Before carring out factory reset, STOP the compressor.
Select CONFIG I FACTORY RESET and
change from NO to YES.
Now press H and UNISAB II will display the following:
CONFIGURATION CHANGED
RESTARTS!
PLEASE WAIT
Within a few seconds the operation will be completed and UNISAB II can be adjusted to the actual operating conditions.
REMEMBER to fill in the forms for actual settings.
These forms are included in the Starting-up Manual.
0178-445 - ENG
Rev. 03.09
UNISAB II 2.03
9. Trouble shooting
9. Trouble shooting
3
SOFTWARE VERSION
If irregularities occur in connection with the running of the compressor, it is possible to inspect
UNISAB II to determine the cause of these irregularities.
DIGITAL INPUTS
DIGITAL OUTPUTS
ANALOG INPUTS
ANALOG OUTPUTS
NO OF ALARMS
Please note that even though the voltage to

UNISAB II is disconnected, there may still be live
wires containing unknown voltage.
SUPERUSER PASSWORD
0178_434_en_2.02.fm
Before beginning the trouble-shooting, disconnect

the main supply to the compressor motor to prevent it from starting inadvertently.
There are light diodes on the printed circuit board.
These diodes make it possible to state the condition of the in- and outputs. It is also possible to enter different menu pictures and have various
states displayed.
Finally, UNISAB II includes a function, which in
case of an alarm will store the operating situation
including time and date. This makes it possible
subsequently to inspect this information on the
display, which is particularly useful when searching for the cause of a compressor shutdown.
In this way UNISAB II can store up to 30 alarm situations where the most recent alarm will replace
the oldest one.
An interruption of the voltage to UNISAB II will not
cause any loss of information. Thus, the information can be displayed again once the supply voltage has been restored.
Diagnosis pictures
If the menu DIAGNOSIS is selected, the following
DIAGNOSIS
1
INSPECT OLD ALARMS
MISC. FUNCTIONS
0178-445 - ENG
Rev. 03.09
10
SERIAL NUMBER
11
EXAMINE MEMORY
12
NEW PASSWORD
13
POWER ON
14
ZERO CAPACITY POS.
15
COP
16
PROFICOM
17
ROTATUNE PISTON
1) Diagnosis I Insp. old alarms

With the cursor in this field and a pressure on I a
picture with the most recent alarm will appear.
Example:
ALARM 940715-0740
HIGH DISCHARGE PRESSURE
The picture shows that on 15 July 1994 at 07:40

hrs an alarm was activated due to high discharge
pressure.
To inspect old alarms, press K and the previous
alarm will appear.
When the alarm of interest is displayed, press I
and the following picture will appear:
CTRL STATE
MEASURE VALUES
IMPUT STATE
OUTPUT STATE
Under this menu every piece of operating information which existed at the moment of the alarm is
stored.
137/222
UNISAB II 2.03
9. Trouble shooting
In the alarm situation HIGH DISCHARGE PRESSURE, do as follows to inspect the situations 1-4.
With the cursor on CTRL STATE and I the following picture will appear:
CONTROL
MANUAL
DISCHARGE LIM
START NO
SYSTEM NO
The compressor has been in MANUAL mode and

has been limited due to high pressure. Furthermore, it has been programmed to START NO 1
and SYSTEM NO 1.
EXT.INPUT
0.0 %
MOTOR CURR
113A
This picture shows all the measuring values connected to the above alarm. Note that not all values
are relevant for all compressor types.
If a different alarm situation is selected, a similar
set of measuring values will appear.
Use H to get back to the menu, select INPUT
STATE and press I , and the following picture will
appear:
D.INPUT
D.INPUT
D.INPUT
D.INPUT
D.INPUT
D.INPUT
D.INPUT
20.3C
D.INPUT
SUCT.PRESS
-10.4C/R
D.INPUT
SUCT. SUPERH
30.7C
D.INPUT
10
DISCH.TEMP
68.7C
D.INPUT
11
DISCH.PRESS
44.7C/R
DISCH.SUPERH
24.0C
BRINE TEMP
22.1C
OIL TEMP
39.1C
OIL PRESS
3.9 BAR
Use H to go back to the menu, select MEASURE

VALUES and press I ,and the following picture
will appear:
SUCT.TEMP
DIFF.PRESS
0.0 BAR
INTERM.TEMP
22.1C
INTERM.PRESS
0.0 BAR
VI POSITION
62.0 %
CAP POSITION
29.8 %
138/222
Here the state of all digital inputs connected to the

selected alarm can be read.
0 = The input has been open
1 = The input has been closed.
Use H to go back to the menu, select OUTPUT
STATE and press I , and the following picture will
appear:
0178-445 - ENG
Rev. 03.09
UNISAB II 2.03
0178_434_en_2.02.fm
9. Trouble shooting
14
ZERO CAPACITY POS.

COP
D.OUTPUT
15
D.OUTPUT
16
PROFICOM
17
ROTATUNE PISTON
D.OUTPUT
D.OUTPUT
D.OUTPUT
D.OUTPUT
D.OUTPUT
D.OUTPUT
2) Diagnosis I Misc. functions

This picture includes four items:
D.OUTPUT
SUCT. RAMP L
D.OUTPUT
10
SUCT. SUPERH
D.OUTPUT
11
CAPACITY
D.OUTPUT
12
BRAKE DLY
D.OUTPUT
13
D.OUTPUT
14
D.OUTPUT
15
D.OUTPUT
16
D.OUTPUT
17
D.OUTPUT
18
Here the state of all digital outputs connected to

the selected alarm can be read.
0 = The output has been open
1 = The output has been activated.
Tables 11 and 12 below show the numbering of
in-/outputs on screw and reciprocating compressors respectively.
Return to the previous menu by pressing H :
DIAGNOSIS
1
INSPECT OLD ALARMS
MISC. FUNCTIONS
SOFTWARE VERSION
DIGITAL INPUTS
DIGITAL OUTPUTS
ANALOG INPUTS
ANALOG OUTPUTS
NO OF ALARMS
SUPERUSER PASSWORD
10
SERIAL NUMBER
11
EXAMINE MEMORY
12
NEW PASSWORD
13
POWER ON
0178-445 - ENG
Rev. 03.09
X.XC/R
XX.XC
XXX.X SEC
X.X SEC
The first item SUCT. RAMP L. shows the state of

the suction ramp function. See section Limiting
functions, Suction ramp.
The value shows the actual suction pressure limit,
which will be equal to the suction pressure set
point if the suction ramp is not active. When the
suction ramp is active, the value will decrease by
1C every N seconds, where N is the selected value of the SUCT. RAMP timer.
The second item SUCT. SUPERH is the same as
the suction superheat set point 2, which is used by
the High Discharge Pipe Temperature Limiter.
See section Limiting functions, Special limiters.
The third and the fourth items are explained in
section Compressor regulation, Electrical slide
control.
3) Diagnosis I Software version

Here it can be checked which program version is
running in UNISAB II:
Example:
UNISAB II
2.00
YORK Refrigeration
000119 13 : 46
139/222
UNISAB II 2.03
9. Trouble shooting
4) Diagnosis I Digital inputs
6) Diagnosis I Analog inputs
In this picture it is always possible to check the actual state of the digital inputs both at compressor
standstill and during operation.
(Pressures, Temperatures, Current)

In this picture it is always possible to check the actual state of the analog inputs both at compressor
The inputs are numbered from 1 to 11 and their

particular status is displayed.
The picture looks as follows:
0 = Input open
1 = Input closed
Table 11 below shows the numbering of the inputs.
5) Diagnosis I Digital outputs

In this picture it is always possible to check the actual state of the digital outputs both at compressor
0 = Output open
1 = Output closed
Table 11 below shows the numbering of the outputs.
PRESS INP
XXXX
PRESS INP
XXXX
PRESS INP
XXXX
PRESS INP
XXXX
PT 100 INP
XXXX
PT 100 INP
XXXX
PT 100 INP
XXXX
PT 100 INP
XXXX
CURR.
XXXX
EXT.
XXXX
CAP.
XXXX
VI.
XXXX
It is 12 bit A/D-converted raw values of the input

signal which are displayed.
The displayed raw values are interpreted in the
following way (see tables below):
Pressure
Reading
752
7310
8191
Input from pres.transmit. (VDC)
0.5
4.5
5.0
Reading
-2000
-700
+1850
+2000
Temperature (C)
-200
-70
+185
+200
Reading
1606
4818
8030
Input (mA)
12
20
Pt100
Ext, Cap, Vi
Curr.
Reading
5910
Input (Amp AC)
1.0
Table 12 shows the numbering of the analog in-
140/222
puts.
0178-445 - ENG
Rev. 03.09
UNISAB II 2.03
9. Trouble shooting
7) Diagnosis I Analog outputs
0178_434_en_2.02.fm
ANALOG OUTPUTS
0.0%
TEST MODE
NO
TEST VALUE
0.0%
In this menu picture it is possible to see which analog output value (in percentage) UNISAB II is
transmitting to the equipment to which it is connected. The signal is a 4-20 mA signal and is usually used for regulating the speed of a frequency
converter. When using analog regulation of the
frequency converter, it is possible at the same
time to regulate the capacity and Vi slides digitally.
This requires that UNISAB II be fitted with an addon printed circuit board (UNICOM IF) between relay print and CPU print. The add-on board is additional equipment. See section Configuration for
detailed information on the use of this board.
As long as the above menu picture is shown in the
display, it is possible to select test mode = YES
and enter a test value between 0 and 100%.
UNISAB II will thus transmit an mA signal corresponding to the test value.
Note: Do not let the compressor motor run when
using test mode as the motor revolutions will follow the changes in the signal. However, test mode
can be used to check whether the frequency converter receives the signal correctly by reading the
analog input signal in the menu system of the converter.
9) Diagnosis I Superuser keyword

In this picture any application of the superuser
password including date and hour is registered.
Use K and J to inspect the list.
10) Diagnosis I Serial number

In this picture it is possible to read some of the information related to the EEPROM
SERIAL NO
123456
COMMISIONED
950101
ERASE EEPROM
NO
The compressor serial no can be read.

The date of compressor start-up (date of initial
start-up) can be read.
By using a special password it is possible to erase
the EEPROM.
11) Diagnosis I Examine memory

This picture is used for software debugging. A
section of 8 bytes from the RAM store is shown on
the display. The starting address of this section,
which is the figure shown at the top to the left, can
be changed by means of H I and K J .
0000
00 00 70 3A
0004
00 00 00 00
12) Diagnosis J New password

8) Diagnosis I No of alarms
The total number of alarms in the working life of
the control system is shown here.
In this picture it is possible to change the password. See section Operating the UNISAB II control.
Use K and J to inspect the list.
0178-445 - ENG
Rev. 03.09
141/222
UNISAB II 2.03
9. Trouble shooting
13) Diagnosis I Power on

In this picture it can be checked how many times
the power supply for UNISAB II has be reconnected. This menu is used for trouble shooting.
POWER ON
020606 22:53:31
+00000011
14) Diagnosis I Zero capacity pos.

The current calculated value of the zero point as
well as any manual setting value of the zero point
can be read in this picture:
CALCULATED ZERO
22%
MANUAL ZERO
0.0%
CAP.POSITION
66.5%
CAPACITY
100.0%
(current reading 0-40%)

(manual adjustment 0-40%)
(immediate slide position, 4-20 mA)
(corrected capacity - as read)
15) Diagnosis I COP

UNISAB II can be set to measure the compressor
COP values (Coefficient Of Performance) as well
as the mechanical efficiency and the Carnot efficiency.
The calculated COP values and a number of intermediate calculations are shown in this picture:
COP
XX.X
COP CARNOT
X.XX
COP MECH.
X.XX
COOLING OUTPUT
XXXX KW
MASS FLOW
XXXX kg/h
SHAFT POWER
XXXX KW
ABSORBED POWER
XXXX KW
MOT. EFFICIENCY
XX.X %
VOL. FLOW
XXXX m3/h
OVH.SPC.VOL
XXXX l/kg
SAT.SPC.VOL
XXXX l/kg
ENTALPI H1
XXXX kj/kg
ENTALPI H4
XXXX kj/kg
ENTALPI H2
XXXX kj/kg
LIQUID TEMP
XX.X C
A more comprehensive description of the COP

function and the setting of this can be found in the
manual UNISAB II-COP.
16) Diagnosis I PROFICOM

Only for internal use within YORK Refrigeration, Marine Group.
In this menu picture it can be checked how
UNISAB II communicates with other equipment
using PROFIBUS communication. The use of
PROFIBUS communication in UNISAB II has not
yet been completed. At the moment PROFIBUS
can therefore only be used for communication
with Mitsubishi PLCs of the type FX2N.
INIT MESS
I/0 LENGTH ERR
MODE
NEXT
17) Diagnosis I Rotatune piston

Only for internal use.
142/222
0178-445 - ENG
Rev. 03.09
UNISAB II 2.03
0178_434_en_2.02.fm
9. Trouble shooting
Table 11 - Numbering of digital inputs

and outputs
12.
Alarm
13.
Warning
Screw compressors
INPUTS:
14.
Aux. output (Compressor ready to start at

remote control, limit switch for capacity).
1.
Compressor motor starter feedback
15.
Starting request (PMS)
2.
External starting permission - normal stopping procedure
16.
Compressor motor starting signal
17.
Prelubrication pump starting signal
3.
External starting permission - stop immediately
18.
Full flow pump (cooling fan) starting signal
4.
Starting request OK (PMS)
INPUTS:
5.
Regulator set point no 1 /set point no 2
6.
Motor current limit value no 1/limit value no

2
7.
Oil pump motor starter feedback
8.
Full flow pump (cooling fan) motor starter

feedback
9.
Oil float switch
10.
11.
Thermistors in motor windings
OUTPUTS:
1.
Compressor motor starter feedback
2.
External starting permission - normal stopping procedure
3.
External starting permission - stop immediately
4.
Starting request OK(PMS)
5.
Regulator set point no 1 /set point no 2
6.
Motor current limit value no 1/limit value no

2
7.
Thermostat for oil return control. Intermediate pressure oil separator.
8.
Thermostat for oil return control. High pressure oil separator
1.
Capacity down
2.
Capacity up
3.
Volume down
4.
Volume up
9.
Not used
5.
Economizer - suction line
10.
6.
Economizer - liquid line
11.
Thermistors in motor windings
7.
Oil cooling system (HLI/BLI cooling)
OUTPUTS:
8.
Oil cooling system (not used in HLI/BLI cooling)
1.
Capacity stage no 1
2.
Capacity stage no 2
9.
Oil distribution pipe
3.
Capacity stage no 3
10.
Oil rectifier (Only MKD configuration; otherwise not used)
4.
Capacity stage no 4
5.
Capacity stage no 5
Heating element
6.
Capacity stage no 6
11
0178-445 - ENG
Rev. 03.09
143/222
UNISAB II 2.03
9. Trouble shooting
13.
Warning
14.
Oil cooling / thermo pump / thermo pump

solenoid valve for ventilation
Aux. output, (Compressor ready to start at

remote control, limit switch for capacity).
15.
9.
Oil return
16.
Compressor motor starting signal
10.
Water cooling
17.
Oil rectifier
11.
Heating element
18.
Not used
12.
Alarm
7.
8.
Capacity stage no 7 / intermediate pressure

injection
144/222
0178-445 - ENG
Rev. 03.09
UNISAB II 2.03
9. Trouble shooting
Table 12 - Numbering of analog inputs

Screw compressors
Pressures:
Interm.press.Not used
TSMC,TCMO
1.
Suct.press.-1/+9 bar r
1.
Suction pressure-1/+9 bar r
2.
Disch.press. -1/+25 bar r
2.
Discharge pressure-1/+25 bar r
3.
Oil press. -1/+25 bar r
3.
Oil pressure-1/+25 bar r
4.
Interm.press.-1/+25 bar r
4.
Oil pressure before filter-1/+25 bar r
Temperatures:
HPC, HPO
1.
Suct.press.-1/+25 bar r
1.
Suction temperature
2.
2.
3.
3.
Oil temperature
4.
Interm.press.Not used
4.
Brine or water temperature
Current inputs:
0178_434_en_2.02.fm
4.
Temperatures:
1.
Capacity slide position4-20 mA
1.
Suction temperature
2.
Volume slide position/

outside temp.4-20 mA
2.
3.
Oil temperature
3.
Motor current0-1 A AC
4.
4.
External set point /

ext. measuring signal4-20 mA
Brine or water temperature (Intermediate temp. on TSMC, TCMO)
Pressures:
Current inputs:
1.
Not used
SMC, CMO
2.
Outside temperature4-20 mA
1.
Suct.press.-/+9 bar r
3.
Motor current0-1 A AC
2.
4.
3.
External set point /

ext. measuring signal4-20mA
0178-445 - ENG
Rev. 03.09
145/222
UNISAB II 2.03
9. Trouble shooting
Printed circuit board, light diodes
Light in diode = output activated.
When opening the UNISAB II door, a number of

light diodes can be inspected on the printed circuit
boards.
COMMUNICATION DL12 (red), DL14 (yellow),

DL13 (green)
The following signals have light diodes:

DIGITAL INPUTS (Green,12 pcs)
DIGITAL OUTPUTS (Red, 18 pcs)
COMMUNICATION (one red, one yellow, one
green)
SUPPLY (One red)
CPU PRINT (One green, one red)
Positioning and identification of these light diodes
can be seen from the following drawing.
DIGITAL INPUTS, DI1 to DI12 (Green)
The light diodes are marked from DI1 to DI12 and
the attached functions appear from the list of inputs.
Light in diode = input activated.
DIGITAL OUPUTS, DLR1 to DLR18 (Red)
The light diodes are marked from DLR1 to DLR18
and the attached functions appear from the list of
outputs.
146/222
In case UNISAB II communicates with other units,

the flashing of the diodes must be irregular.
The red diode indicates that UNISAB II is transmitting information whereas the green diode indicates that information is being received.
SUPPLY, RST1 (red)
This diode will flash briefly while voltage is connected to UNISAB II. During normal operation the
light is off.
In case the diode flashes repeatedly when voltage
is connected, there may be an error in the voltage
supply.
CPU PRINT, ACT1 (green), RST1 (red)
The green light diode must flash irregularly whenever UNISAB II is electrified. A constant light or no
light is a sign of malfunction.
The red light diode must usually be off. It is only
on for brief moments in case the CPU tries to restart the program. This may only happen while
UNISAB II is switched on.
0178-445 - ENG
Rev. 03.09
UNISAB II 2.03
9. Trouble shooting
Fig. 9.1
Printed circuit board with light diodes
TERMINALS
RED
Communication
EPROM
Transmitter
YELLOW
GREEN
Receiver
CPU PRINT
RE1
1) Capacity slide down

2) Capacity stage
RE2
1) Capacity slide up
2) Capacity stage 2
RE3
1) Volume slide down

2) Capacity stage 3
RE4
1) Volume slide up
2) Capacity stage 4
RE5
1) Economizer suction line

2) Capacity stage 5
RE6
1) Economizer liquid line

2) Capacity stage 6
RE1
RE7
1) HLI/BLI cooling
2) Capacity stage 7/intermed. press. injection
RE8
1) Oil cooling
2) Oil cooling/thermo pump
RE9
1) Oil distribution pipe

2) Oil return
RE10
1) Oil rectifier
2) Water cooling
RE11
1) Heating element
2) Heating element
RE12
Alarm
RE13
Warning
RE14
AUX. output
Starting request
RE16
Compressor start
RE17
1) Oil pump start

2) Oil rectifier
RE18
1) Full flow pump
230 VAC
K22
115 VAC
24 VAC
DIGITAL
INPUTS
DI1
Compressor operation
DI2
EXT. start, normal stop
DI3
EXT. start, immediate stop
DI4
DI5
Regulator Sp1/Sp2
DI6
Motor currentSp1/Sp2
1) Oil pump operation
2) Oil return interm.press
1) Full flow pump operation
2) Oil return high pressure
1) Oil flow switch
2) Not used
DI7
Rev. 03.09
DI9
DI10
DI11
Thermistor (no light function)
DI12
Not used
RED
1) Screw compressor
2) Reciprocating compressor
0178-445 - ENG
RST1
ACT1
DI8
RE15
RED
GREEN
Battery
0178_434_en_2.02.fm
DIGITAL
OUTPUTS
RST1
147/222
UNISAB II 2.03
9. Trouble shooting
148/222
0178-445 - ENG
Rev. 03.09
UNISAB II 2.03
10. Trouble shooting diagrams

Fig. 10.1
Error diagram no 1
Start of reciprocating/screw compressor in MANUAL operating mode
MANUAL
operation
Is there light
in yellow C
on front?
No
Select picture COMPRESSOR CTRLMODE and adjust to MANUAL
0178_435_en.fm
Yes
Display
=
READY
Check that input EXT. START IMMED. STOP terminals 45-46 is closed. Light in green diode no. 3 on
print. Can also be cheked in picture DIAGNOSIS I
DIGITAL INPUT no 3=1.
No
Yes
Yes
Display
=
READY
No
Recipr./screw
No
Screw
Prelubrication
0178-445 - ENG
Rev. 03.09
Yes
Contact
YORK Ref.
149/222
UNISAB II 2.03
Fig. 10.2
Error diagram no 2
Start of reciprocating/screw compressor in MANUAL mode, continued

1
Press A to start compressor.
Green light diode on front
flashes
OK
Yes
Does
compressor start?
No
Check emerg. stop and TV pressure control, if any. There must be

connection between terminals
125-126 and 127-128.
Check that input STARTING REQUEST

FEEDBACK terminals 47-48 is closed. Light
in green diode no 4 on print. Can also be
checked in picture DIAGNOSIS I
Yes
DIGITAL INPUT no 4 = 1.
PMS
error message received
No
Input
closed?
Yes
Is relay no 16
activated on
print when trying to start (red
light diode)?
Try again
No
No Contact
YORK Ref.
Yes
Apply jumper, or check connections from terminals 116-117 to
power management system.
Check connection from terminals 118119 to motor starter
Yes
Is there feedback on terminals 41-42 from

motor guard?
Green light diode no 1 on
print.
No
Connection
OK?
No
Correct wiring
connect.
Correct wiring
connection
Yes
Check pre-fuses and control voltage of motor guard.
150/222
0178-445 - ENG
Rev. 03.09
UNISAB II 2.03
Fig. 10.3
Error diagram no 3
Start of screw compressor/prelubrication in MANUAL mode, continued

2
Press A to start compressor.

Green light diode flashes on front.
Yes
Error mes- No
sage in oil
system?
No
3
PMS
error message received?
0178_435_en.fm
Yes
Check wiring connection to oil float. When
float has been activated, green light diode no
9 will flash on print.
Connection
OK?
No
Oil pump
starts?
Yes

FEEDBACK terminals 47-48 are closed.
Light in green diode no. 4 on print. Can
also be checked in picture DIAGNOSIS
I DIGITAL INPUT no. 4=1.
No
No
Relay no 17
is activated
on print. Red
light diode
Check float
function
Yes
Try again
Apply jumper, or check connections from terminals 116117 to power management

system.
Correct wiring
connect.
Yes
Input
closed?
Check that CONFIG I

PRELUBRIFICATION = YES.
No
Yes
Check connection from terminals 120121 to pump motor starter
Connection
OK?
No
Correct wiring
connection
Yes
Check if feedback is recieved on terminals 53-54 (green light diode no 7 on
print) from pump motor guard
Check pre-fuses and control voltage of

pump motor guard.
0178-445 - ENG
Rev. 03.09
Yes
Connection
OK?
No
Correct wiring
connect.
151/222
UNISAB II 2.03
Fig. 10.4
Error diagram no 4
Start of reciprocating/screw compressor in AUTO mode
Prepare for AUTOMATIC operation
Select regulating form in picture

CONFIG I CONTROL ON
Set Set point, neutral zone and

P. Band for chosen regulator
Select picture CTRL MODE and

set to AUTO
With C it is possible to change

between MANUAL and AUTO by
one single pressure. Adjust to
MANUAL (= light in yellow diode)
In CONFIG check that

AUTO START = YES and
AUTO STOP = YES
Check setting of START DELAY

in picture TIMER SETUP
Display
READY?
Check that input EXT. START IMMED. STOP

terminals 45-46 is closed. Light in green diode
no 3 on print. Can also be checked in picture
DIAGNOSIS I DIGITAL INPUT no 3=1.
No
Yes
Yes
Display
READY?
No
152/222
0178-445 - ENG
Rev. 03.09
UNISAB II 2.03
Fig. 10.5
Error diagram no 5
Start of reciprocating/screw compressor in AUTO mode, continued
Check that input EXT. START,

NORM. STOP terminals 43-44 is
closed. Light in green diode no 2
print. Can also be checked in picture DIAGNOSIS I DIGITAL INPUT no 2=1.
0178_435_en.fm
Yes
Press C so that light in

diode goes out = AUTO
Display =
READY?
No
Contact
YORK Ref.
Compressor can now begin start-up

phase depending on setting of regulator. REMEMBER that start is delayed by timer START DELAY.
Is cooling/heating required?
No
Change set point or wait for cooling/heating requirement.
Yes
Recipr./screw
Screw
Prelubrication
No
Yes
0178-445 - ENG
Rev. 03.09
153/222
UNISAB II 2.03
Fig. 10.6
Error diagram no 6
Start of reciprocating/screw compressor in AUTO mode, continued
7
At compressor start-up
green light diode on front
will flash.
OK
Yes
Does compressor
start?
No
PMS
error
message
received?
Yes
Check that input STARTING REQUEST FEEDBACK terminals 47-48

is closed. Light in green diode no. 4
on print. Can also be checked in picture DIAGNOSIS I DIGITAL INPUT
no 4=1.
No
Input
closed?
Yes
Check emerg. stop and TV pressure control, if any. There must be

connection between terminals 125126 and 127-128.
No
Is relay no 16
activated on
print when trying to start (red
light diode)
No
Contact
YORK Ref.
Try again
Yes
Apply jumper, or check connections from terminals

116-117 to power management system.
Check connection from terminals

118-119 to motor starter
Yes
Is there feedback
on terminals 41-42
from motor guard?
Green light diode
no 1 on print.
No
Connection
OK?
No
Correct wiring connection
Correct wiring connection
Yes
Check pre-fuses and control
fuses of motor guard.
154/222
0178-445 - ENG
Rev. 03.09
UNISAB II 2.03
Fig. 10.7
Error diagram no 7
Start of screw compressor/prelubrication in AUTO mode, continued

6
At compressor start green light
diode on front will flash.
Yes
Error message in oil

system?
0178_435_en.fm
Oil pump
starts?
No
No
Yes

FEEDBACK terminals 47-48 are closed.
Light in green diode no. 4 on print. Can
also be checked in picture DIAGNOSIS
I DIGITAL INPUT no. 4=1.
PMS
error message
received?
No
Yes
Input
closed
Yes
Try again
Apply jumper, or check connections from terminal 116-117 to

power management system.
Check wiring connection to oil float. When

float has been activated, green light diode
no 9 will flash on print.
No
Relay no
17 is activated on
print. Red
light diode.
No
Check that CONFIG I

PRELUBRICATION = YES
Yes
Connection OK?
No
Correct
wiring connect.
Check connection from terminals 120-121 to

the pump motor starter.
Yes
Check float function
Connection
OK?
No
Correct wiring
connection
Yes
Check if feedback is received on terminals 53-54 on
green light diode no 7 on print from motor guard.
Check pre-fuses and control fuses of

motor guard.
0178-445 - ENG
Rev. 03.09
Yes Connection
OK?
No
Correct wiring
connection
155/222
UNISAB II 2.03
Fig. 10.8
Error diagram no 8
General trouble shooting, UNISAB II
No light/text in display
Is diode on
CPU print
ACT1 flashing
green
Yes
Check connection to
display. If necessary,
pull out white plug and
refit.
No
Is there light in
any diodes on
relay card
No
Display
OK?
Yes
No
Check supply on terminals L and N
Is
voltage
correct?
Contact
YORK Ref.
Yes
No
Yes
Check that white code
plug has been fitted.
Problem
solved
= 230 VAC
Display reads COPY
EEROM after power
cut
Probably defective battery
= 115 VAC
=24 VAC
Is
plug
correct?
Yes
10
No
Replace battery. See
section, Service, Battery
156/222
Fit correct plug
0178-445 - ENG
Rev. 03.09
UNISAB II 2.03
Fig. 10.9
Error diagram no 9
CPU print may have to be replaced
Check voltage supply of any

loose connections, burnt fuses
or the like
10
Check voltage on terminals 141142 = 24 VAC
Is this
OK
Transformer thermally
activated. May have to
be replaced.
0178_435_en.fm
Check fuse in black retainer.
Is this
OK?
Are terminals
29-32-37 shortcircuited to
frame?
Are terminals
29-30-33 or 3738 shortcircuited?
Are there any errors in external

components to
term. 29-30; 3233; 37-38
Replace fuse.
Max 3 Amp.
Correct error
Correct error
Correct error or replace

component
Contact
YORK Ref.
0178-445 - ENG
Rev. 03.09
157/222
UNISAB II 2.03
158/222
0178-445 - ENG
Rev. 03.09
UNISAB II 2.03
11. Service
11. Service
In case some of the main parts of UNISAB II are
defective, it is possible to replace them.
a.
Door in which display and keyboard are fitted.
It is recommended to contact
YORK Refrigeration before changing any of these
parts.
b.
Relay print with wiring connections.
c.
CPU print fitted on relay print.
d.
Transformer.
The main parts comprise:
The parts are shown below (see Fig. 11.1).
Fig. 11.1
Keyboard connection
U17
U18
EEPROM
PAL
EPROM U17
EPROM U18
CPU print
Display connection
Battery
Cooling
plate
Transformer
Fuse
0178_436_en_2.02.fm
Digital inputs
Empty socket!
NEVER use this
socket together
with sockets pos.
U17and U18
Digital outputs
Terminals
All replacements must be carried out with

UNISAB II in a state of no voltage. Remember that
outside control voltage may be connected.
Replacement of CPU print
Disconnect the main supply to the motor to avoid

risk of indadvertent start-up.
Remove the screws with which the print is secured. Get hold of the bottom of the print and pull
it out carefully. It may be fixed rather firmly as it is
positioned in two plugs with connection to the relay print. It is important to pull at the side of the
print in which the plugs are positioned to avoid
pulling it out askew, thus damaging the print.
Replacement of door
Remove the blue and white plugs leading to the
relay print (the two securing lugs must be bent a
little backwards). Remove the two fuse straps as
well as the earth connections.
Mount the new door in reverse order as opposed
to the dismounting process.
Connect supply voltage.
0178-445 - ENG
Rev. 03.09
Dismantle the door completely to provide free access to the printed circuit board.
Move both EPROMS and EEPROM from the old

CPU print to the new one.
Important!
See also Replacement of EPROMS.
159/222
UNISAB II 2.03
11. Service
Mount a new CPU print and door in reverse order

as opposed to the dismounting process.
When the above has been completed and the
control is switched on, the following picture will appear shortly in the display:
COPY EEPROM
YES
Press the H key. UNISAB II will now be reconfigured and the contents of the EEPROM, corresponding to the compressor setup, will now be
copied into the CPU storeage.
Important! It is possible to answer NO by means
of the password. In this case the contents of the
EEPROM and RAM store will be deleted, and
UNISAB II must be reconfigured. See description
under Replacement of CPU print and EEPROM.
The setting is now the same as before the CPU
print was changed except for the calibration of
the pressure transducers, possibly the brine temperature as well as the hour counter, which is now
zero. The language is now English. Select another language if this is required. Enter the values
from the table in the Starting-up Manual, which is
supplied with the compressor. Remember to set
time and date.
SERIAL NO
Enter the compressor serial no and press the H

key. All three light diodes on the front will flash
shortly, and the display will show the picture CONFIG.
It is also necessary to enter the original setup, all
alarm and warning limits as well as set points,
which must be different from the factory setting.
Remember also to calibrate the pressure transducers.
These values are included in the Starting-up Manual. Remember to set time and date. The language is now English. Select another language if
this is required.
Replacement of relay print

Dismantle the door completely to provide free access to the printed circuit board.
All connected wires on the relay print must be dismounted, but first they must be marked so that
correct remounting is possible.
Remove the screws that hold the print and tilt the
print out of the plastic holders at the terminal row
on the long side of the print.
Replacement of CPU print and

EEPROM
Pull the print off the guide opposite the terminal

row and out of the cabinet.
If - as an exception - it proves necessary to insert

a new EEPROM in connection with the replacement of a CPU print, the following procedure must
be observed.
Move the CPU print with the EPROM and Serial

EPROM onto the new relay print.
Important!
See also Replacement of EPROM.
Mount the new parts and switch on the control.
The following picture will appears in the display:
160/222
Mount the new relay print in reverse order as opposed to the dismounting procedure and connect
the marked wires in the correct order.
0178-445 - ENG
Rev. 03.09
UNISAB II 2.03
11. Service
COPY EEPROM
YES
labels. If replacement is necessary, always replace both EPROMs as they belong together.
EPROM and electronics in general can be
damaged by static electricity. Therefore, make
sure that static electricity is discharged without
current passing through the electronics, ie
touch the part on which the EPROM is positioned both before and while picking up the
EPROM. Touch also the box of the device in
which EPROM is to be positioned both before
and while fitting the EPROM. It is of course
necessary to use the same hand that holds (or
is going to hold) the EPROM.
0178_436_en_2.02.fm

The settting is now the same as before the CPU
print was changed except for the calibration of
the pressure transducers, possibly the brine temperature as well as the hour counter, which is now
zero. The language is now English. Select another language if this is required. Enter the values
from the table in the Starting-up Manual, which is
supplied with the compressor. Remember to set
time and date.
When replacing the EPROM or moving it from one

UNISAB II unit to another, do as follows:
Note the value of the hour counter as well as

the calibration values for pressure transducers and brine temperature.
Switch off the power supply to UNISAB II.
Switch off the compressor motor starter and

observe all safety measures in accordance
with the instruction manual, local rules and
regulations.
Place the door in service position as described in Operating UNISAB II
The EPROM modules are positioned in the

center of the printed circuit board (see
Fig. 11.1).
Each EPROM module is loosened from its

socket by an authorized EPROM puller.
Take care not to damage the pins on the
EPROM module.
Replacement of EPROM (program)

UNISAB II
The EPROMs are programmable modules,
mounted in sockets in the microelectronic part of
UNISAB II. Please note that there are two
EPROMs, numbered 0 and 1, identified by white
0178-445 - ENG
Rev. 03.09
161/222
UNISAB II 2.03
11. Service
Fig. 11.2
ues from the table in the Starting-up Manual,

which is supplied with the compressor. Remember to set time and date.
Notch
EPROM
Mount the EPROMs manually while paying attention to the following:
When changing the EPROM in connection with an

upgrade to an updated program version, it is recommended to carry out a FACTORY RESET.
Before a FACTORY RESET is carried out, write
down all the UNISAB II settings in the table
UNISAB II settings, especially the parameters
which are changed back to factory setting by a
factory reset. This applies to the following parameters:
Make sure to position the EPROM labeled 0

in the upper socket, and the EPROM labeled 1 in the lower socket.
Position the EPROM so that the notch in the

module is turning right (see Fig. 11.2).
Alarm and warning limits, set points,

PID parameters
Take care that all pins are fitted in the socket

and carry out the mounting with great care.
Timers, P band factors
Refit the door.

COPY EEPROM
YES
Capacity limits
See the table UNISAB II settings for a complete
review.
See section Operating UNISAB II control, Factory
settings for information on factory reset.
Once FACTORY RESET has been completed,
enter all the settings which are included in the table UNISAB II settings, and which differ from the
UNISAB II factory values.
Replacement of serial EEPROM

(diagnosis)

This EEPROM includes information on:
The settting is now the same as before the

EPROM was changed except for the calibration
of the pressure transducers, possibly the brine
temperature as well as the hour counter, which is
now zero. The language is now English. Select
another language if this is required. Enter the val-
162/222
e.
Compressor serial no.
f.
Date of initial start-up.
g.
Compressor configuration.
h.
Total number of alarm and warning limits and

all other setting values.
i.
Status of up to 30 old alarms.
j.
Total number of alarms.
0178-445 - ENG
Rev. 03.09
UNISAB II 2.03
11. Service
The EEPROM (positioned in a socket) can be removed from UNISAB II in compliance with the
same precautions as described under Replacement of EPROM.
The EEPROM must usually remain in the control
as the control cannot function without the EEPROM. However, in case the contents of the EEPROM is to be examined by YORK Refrigeration,
Denmark, it can be removed for inspection. When
removing the EEPROM, switch off the control and
have an empty EEPROM ready for insertion.
0178_436_en_2.02.fm
Once the new EEPROM has been fitted, switch on

the control again. All information will now be copied into the new EEPROM.
The control is now ready for operation with the
same setup as before the EEPROM was removed.
Replacement of battery
The battery is used primarily to ensure that the internal clock runs accurately after a power failure.
Moreover, the so-called RAM store is supplied
during power failures.
The battery has an expected service life of 10
years and is of the Lithium type. It is not reloaded
by the UNISAB II electronic circuit.
0178-445 - ENG
Rev. 03.09
If the following picture appears in the display after

a power failure, the battery should be replaced:
COPY EEPROM
YES
If a new battery is available, switch off the control

and change the battery. Dispose of the old battery
in conformity with the environmental rules and
regulations in force.
Mount a new battery and switch on the control,
and the above picture will appear once more. Answer YES and press the H key.
The compressor setup is now the same as before
the power failure except for the calibration values
for the pressure transducers and the brine temperature as well as the hour counter, which is now
zero. These values are included in the compressor Starting-up Manual.
Remember to set time and date as well as language. The compressor is now operational.
In case no new battery is available, answer YES
to the above picture and follow the procedure for
replacement of the EEPROM.
Please note that at the next power

failure, the problem will be the same.
163/222
UNISAB II 2.03
11. Service
Installation of data communication

cable
These instructions only apply to the installation of

UNISAB II. For information on connection of
PROSAB II/ UNISAB II, see instr.no 0171-745 under Supplementary material.
To obtain a correct function of the data communication between several YORK Refrigeration computers, the communication cable must be connected according to the following instructions.
Fig. 11.3
UNISAB II/UNISAB II
IN CASE OF COMMUNICATION CONNECTIONS BETWEEN UNISAB II,
RESISTANCE JUMPERS MUST BE CONNECTED IN EACH MODULE
UNISAB II
UNISAB II
64
- TX DL12
- RX DL13
- RX DL13
63
UNISAB II
- TX DL12
- TX DL12
65
66
63
64
- RX DL13
65
66
63
64
termination block
65
66
termination block
LED COLOURS
TX DL12 = RED
RX DL13 = GREEN
UNISAB II/PROSAB II
IN CASE OF CONNECTION BETWEEN MORE THAN TWO COMMUNICATION
MODULES, JUMPER(S) MUST BE CONNECTED IN BOTH END MODULES
PROSAB II
UNISAB-S/R/RT/RTH
UNISAB II
S1
- TX DL12
- RX DL13
63
64
65
66
S2
+
COMMUNICATION
MODULE
-
PROSAB II
UNISAB-S/R/RT/RTH
S1
S1
S2
S2
+
COMMUNICATION
MODULE
-
termination block
LED COLOURS
TX DL12 = RED
RX DL13 = GREEN
164/222
0178-445 - ENG
Rev. 03.09
UNISAB II 2.03
11. Service
Important!
The screen of the communication cable MUST be
connected correctly in the supplied screwed joints
(see Fig. 11.4).
The cable is connected in the terminals shown in
Fig. 11.3. The cable must be pulled in parallel
from control to control. This applies both to the two
conductors and the screen.
0178_436_en_2.02.fm
In the first and last control the cable must be finished correctly. The resistance of 120 ohm must
be fitted as indicated (mounted on delivery). On all
other controls the resistance is removed and the
terminals are used for passing on the communication cable.
Fig. 11.4
1.
2.
3.
UNISAB II
4.
The total length of the cable between the controls

must not exceed 1,000 m. Cables of this type are
available from YORK Refrigeration.
UNISAB II
The cable must have the following

data:
5.
2-conductor data cable with screening

Pair capacity
85 pF/m
Fig. 11.4 shows the connection of the cable
screen in screwed joint.
0178-445 - ENG
Rev. 03.09
165/222
UNISAB II 2.03
11. Service
Grounding
UNISAB II must always be grounded to the compressor frame. See drawing no. 2347-002 page
AC038_13 under Supplementary material.
In case of a shut down, there can be large electrical potential on the compressor motor and thereby
on UNISAB II.
The data communication cable screen provides a
voltage equalisation between the UNISAB II units.
The above mentioned electrical potential may
166/222
cause a large current surge through the cable

screen. The screen may melt, causing the voltage
equalisation to be broken and the communication
to be hampered by noise.
To avoid this situation, it is strongly recommended
to provide an extra equalising wire in parallel with
the communication cable between all the units on
the network, as indicated in the drawing no.
2347-002 page AC040_10 under Supplementary
material.
0178-445 - ENG
Rev. 03.09
UNISAB II 2.03
12. MULTISAB regulation

Introduction
MULTISAB is a distributed compressor control
system, which can capacity regulate reciprocating
and/or screw compressors according to rules,
which are set up in detail as described in the following, and in a sequence set by the user.
MULTISAB is a distributed software module included in all UNISAB II, PROSAB II and
UNISAB II units on delivery.
MULTISAB connects up to 14 compressors in one
and the same communication system.
Fig. 12.1
UNISAB II
UNISAB II
0178_437_en.fm
The MULTISAB system is based on some basic

rules:
1.
The system is controlled and optimized according to suction pressure, brine temperature, discharge pressure or external 4-20
mA signal, depending on the chosen type of
regulation.
14
UNISAB II
UNISAB II
the optimization of the compressors, it may be

necessary to regulate the compressors externally.
The plant itself may also make special demands
as to regulating speed and accuracy, which
makes a central external regulation necessary.
Such an alternative regulation can be carried out
in several ways:
2.
The programmed starting sequence is always followed.
controlling the digital input External start

permission, normal stop
3.
Screw compressors in operation are run to

as high a capacity as possible.
using the digital output Auxiliary output
using the 4-20 mA input Auxiliary input
4.
It is acceptable that reciprocating compressors operate at part load.
changing capacity set points from PC/PLC

via COMSAB II/PCCOMSAB II.
MULTISAB is a regulating system for general application. Should special demands be made as to
0178-445 - ENG
Rev. 03.09
167/222
UNISAB II 2.03
Fig. 12.2
PC/PLC
possible modem
COMSAB II/PCCOMSAB II
UNISAB II
UNISAB II
14
UNISAB II
UNISAB II
In case compressor capacity is controlled through

COMSAB II or PCCOMSAB II from a central computer, be aware of the time delay through the communication system.
See section Installation of data communication

cable as well as Connecting diagrams to
find information on the physical linking of
UNISAB II units.
It is possible to make an approximate calculation

of this time delay. See COMSAB II instruction no
0171-400.
B:
If UNISAB II is to be connected to controls of the

UNISAB S/R or PROSAB II type, see the following
instructions if the control units are part of the plant
in question:
1)
0171-761 / UNISAB S-Control
2)
0171-772 / UNISAB R-Control
3)
0178-175 / UNISAB RT-Control
4)
0178-181 / UNISAB RTH-Control
5)
0171-729 / PROSAB II
6)
0171-743 / the MULTISAB system for

PROSAB/UNISAB II
System setup
To be able to use MULTISAB, a number of points
must be completed. Please find the checklist for
MULTISAB setup (see the following pages). The
points on the checklist can be explained as follows:
A:
All units that are to be included in the system

must be connected physically.
168/222
All units must be configured for intercommunication. See also section Configuration.
In SETUP I CONFIG a compressor number,

COMPR. NO, beginning with no 1 and upwards, corresponding to the number of compressors must be entered in each unit.
It is recommended to mark the compressors with
this number.
Important!
If two compressors have the same compressor number entered in UNISAB II, there
will be no communication between the units.
In SETUP I CONFIG the communication speed,
BAUD RATE, must be entered. In case the
system only consists of UNISAB II units,
usually choose the highest baud rate. In
case the system consists of both UNISAB II
and PROSAB II or UNISAB II units, choose
1200 baud. Note that it must be checked
that all units on the network are able to run
at the selected rate.
C:
All units, especially screw compressors,

must have a swept volume value entered.
0178-445 - ENG
Rev. 03.09
UNISAB II 2.03
In SETUP I CONFIG enter SWEPT VOLUME,

which can be read on the compressor name
plate. See section Configuration.
D:
An entry must be made in all units whether

the system contains a common evaporator
and a common condenser.
In SETUP I CONFIG enter the current combination of common evaporator and common
condenser in COMMON EVAP/COND. See
section Configuration.
E:
All units must be have a system no and a

starting no.
In SETUP I MULTISAB I MULTISAB STATE

enter START NO and a SYSTEM NO. See
section MULTISAB.
0178_437_en.fm
F:
All units in the same system must agree on

the way a regulating master (sys. regulator)
is chosen.
In SETUP I CONFIG select the same PREF.

MASTER in all UNISAB II units, COMPR#
or START#. See section Configuration.
If selecting COMPR#, the UNISAB II with the lowest COMPR. NO (point B above) will always
be SYS.REGULATOR. The only exceptions
are if the UNISAB II is off power or disconnected from the network. In such case, the
UNISAB II with the next COMPR.NO will be
SYS.REGULATOR. Note that a defective
controlled input sensor does not lead to an
automatic change of SYS.REGULATOR in
this case.
If selecting START#, the UNISAB II with the lowest START.NO (point F above) will be
SYS.REGULATOR for as long as the compressor belonging to this UNISAB II unit is
running and ready. If the compressor is not
available, UNISAB II is not in REMOTE
mode, the controlled input sensor (point H
below) is defective, or UNISAB II is off pow-
0178-445 - ENG
Rev. 03.09
er or disconnected from the network, the

UNISAB II unit with the next START.NO will
be SYS. REGULATOR.
The SYS.REGULATOR is master of the co-ordinated capacity control, which also means
that the controlled input sensor (point H below) on this particular UNISAB II unit in use.
If only one compressor is required, it will
usually be the compressor of the SYS.REGULATOR which is in operation. However, if
COMPR# is selected, it may very well be
another compressor.
Guidelines for selecting COMPR# or START#:
COMPR# is easier and more safe if the controlled input is not available to all UNISAB II
units.
COMPR# must be selected if there are any

PROSAB II or UNISAB I units on the system.
START# is easier and more safe if equalizing running hours is important, especially if
all (or all but one) compressors must always
be available.
Always make sure that COMPR.NO is a

fixed value, ie never change it to equalize
running hours! However, START.NO is
meant to be changed from time to time.
G:
All units must be adjusted to remote control.
In SETUP I CONTROL COMPRESSOR.CTRL

MODE is on REMOTE. See section Compressor regulation.
Regulation Setup
H:
All units must be configured to the desired

regulating method.
In SETUP I CONFIG adjust CONTROL ON to

the desired regulating method. See section
Configuration.
169/222
UNISAB II 2.03
The following four regulators are available. The

last two have both a cooling and a warming
function:
Suction side
(regulation of suction pressure)
Discharge side
(regulation of discharge pressure)
Brine / hotwater
(regulation of brine/water temperatures)
Ext. cooling / Ext. heating
(regulation of a user defined measuring
value: temp./pressure/level).
Note that all units that can become master must measure the same value to be
used for the capacity control. If eg Brine
/ Hotwater temperature control is selected, a separate temperature sensor must
be available to all the relevant UNISAB II
units. Note that point F above describes
how to select the master.
I:
All units must (usually) be configured to both

automatic start and automatic stop. If this is
not the case, the compressor will not start
up automatically in case cooling is required
or stop automatically when cooling is not required and the temperature becomes too
low.
In SETUP I CONFIG, choose:

AUTO START= YES
AUTO STOP= YES
See section Configuration.
J:
The chosen regulator must be set in all

units.
In the picture for the parameter to be regulated,

set the following:
1)
Regulator set point, SP1 and possibly SP2
170/222
2)
Regulator neutral zone, NZ
3)
Regulator proportional band, PB
See section Compressor regulation.

Regulation of the entire system will usually take
place on the basis of the regulator in the current regulating master (sys. regulator), ie
the compressor with the lowest compressor
or starting number.
Therefore it is particularly important that the parameters of the configured regulator has
been set correctly.
Always set the same set point on all other units in
the same system (ie with the same SYSTEM NO).
K:
All units must have their timers adjusted.
In SETUP I TIMERS I TIMER SETUP the following timers are set:

1)
START DELAY, time delay before start.
2)
STOP DELAY, time delay before stop.
See section Timers, Timer setup.

Both timers can be made to work proportionally (ie
depending on the size of Pb).
In SETUP I TIMERS I P BAND
FACTOR a proportional factor can be set for
each of the timers.
This means that if only a small difference exists
between the desired temperature (Sp) and
the current one, the timer in the time delays
will count very slowly (up to
10 times slower than the time set, depending on the factor set).
If the difference between the desired temperature
and the current one is considerable (outside
the P Band), the timer in the time delay will
count in seconds.
See sectionTimers, P Band factor.
0178-445 - ENG
Rev. 03.09
UNISAB II 2.03
In case of reciprocating compressors, another two

timers must be set.
Transfer and the Take-over situations are

included.
3)
DELAY UP, time delay during loading of

stages.
4)
DELAY DOWN, time delay during unloading

of stages.
As described below, several parameters are

available to adjust the Transfer and the
Take-over function.
Both of these timers can also be made to work

proportionally (ie depending on the size of
Pb).
In SETUP I TIMERS I P BAND FACTOR a proportional factor can be set for each of the
timers.
0178_437_en.fm
L:
In plants with a combination of screw and

reciprocating compressors a number of factors may be set to optimize compressor operation so that the two types of compressors
are used in the best way possible. These
factors can only be set on reciprocating
compressors and will be effective only in
case all reciprocating compressors have
lower starting numbers than the screw compressors in the same system, and only if
TAKE OVER is set to YES in SETUP I
CONFIG, See section Configuration.
The optimization is carried out by the Transfer function and the Take-over function.
It is not economical to run a screw compressor at low capacity. The Transfer function
attempts to avoid this by reducing the capacity of the reciprocating compressor(s), ie
by transferring load to the screw compressor. The Take-over function increases the
capacity of the reciprocating compressor(s)
to make the screw compressor stop, ie by
taking over load from the screw compressor.
In the section Example of regulation - a
combination of screw and reciprocating
compressors illustrative examples of the
0178-445 - ENG
Rev. 03.09
In SETUP ITIMERS I TRANSFER a proportional factor FACTOR DOWN (1-10, default 1) can be set for timer DELAY DOWN.
It is used when MULTISAB wants to let a reciprocating compressor decrease its capacity in favour of a screw compressor at low
capacity. A larger FACTOR DOWN makes
MULTISAB wait longer before reducing the
reciprocating compressor capacity another
stage.
In SETUP I TIMERS I TRANSFER the
size of a transfer zone ZONE can be set, ie
the part of the proportional band (0-100%,
default 15%) where transfer may take place.
In SETUP I TIMERS I TAKE-OVER a
proportional factor FACTOR UP (1-10, default 1) can be set for timer DELAY UP. It is
used when MULTISAB wants to increase
the capacity of the reciprocating compressor to force the screw compressor down below 5% capacity, making it stop. A larger
FACTOR UP makes MULTISAB wait longer
before increasing the reciprocating compressor capacity another stage.
In SETUP I TIMERS I TAKE-OVER a
proportional factor FACTOR START (1-10,
default 1) can be set for the START DELAY
timer. It is used when MULTISAB wants to
start a reciprocating compressor to take
over the operation from a screw compressor
which is running at low capacity.
In SETUP I TIMERS I TAKE-OVER the
size of a take-over zone ZONE can be set,
ie the part of the proportional band (0-100%,
171/222
UNISAB II 2.03
default 15%) where take-over may take

place.
In SETUP I TIMERS I TIMER SETUP the
following timers are found.
1)
TAKE-OVER DELAY, time delay at

take-over, fixed at 300 seconds. When a reciprocating compressor has calculated that
it is possible to take over a subsequent
screw compressor, it will pass into a
take-over mode and start TAKE-OVER DELAY. If the reciprocating compressor during
the entire count down of take-over delay can
continue to take over, thus staying in the
take-over mode, START DELAY will be ac-
172/222
tivated once TAKE-OVER DELAY

expires.
2)
TAKE-OVER MAX, max duration of a

take-over attempt. When TAKE-OVER DELAY expires, the time delay TAKE-OVER
MAX will also be activated to ensure that a
reciprocating compressor will not use more
than the TAKE-OVER MAX time during a
take-over attempt. If the screw compressor
has not stopped before the TAKE-OVER
MAX expires, the reciprocating compressor
will give up and stop. This delay function
can be cancelled by setting the delay for 0
(default).
0178-445 - ENG
Rev. 03.09
UNISAB II 2.03
13. Checklist
13. Checklist
Compressor No
0178_438_en.fm
Checklist for MULTISAB setup

No
Item
Description
Cabling
All co-operating UNISAB

units must be wired together on common network.
B.1
CONFIG
COMPR NO
Unique ID for each compressor on network
B.2
CONFIG
BAUD RATE
Identical for all units on

network
CONFIG
SWEPT
VOLUME
Must be entered correctly

for each compressor, at
least for screws
CONFIG
COMMON
EVAP/COND
Identical for all compressors within system
E.1
MULTISAB
STATE
START NO
Unique priority within system (SYSTEM NO)
E.2
MULTISAB
STATE
SYSTEM NO
System ID, identical for all

compressors on same
controlled input
10 11 12 13 14
CONFIG
Identical for all compresREFRIGERANT sors within system
F
CONFIG
Identical for all compresPREF. MASTER sors within system
CONTROL
COMPR.
CONTROL
Must be REMOTE unless

the compressor is excluded (temporarily) from
MULTISAB
H.1
CONFIG
CONTROL ON
Identical for all compressors within system - see

also item C
H.2
Controlled input The measurement must

sencor
be available to all compressors in the system
which can become master
I.1
CONFIG
AUTO START
Should usually be YES. If

not, the compressor must
be started manually
I.2
CONFIG
AUTO STOP
Should usually be YES. If

not, the compressor must
be stopped manually
0178-445 - ENG
Rev. 03.09
173/222
UNISAB II 2.03
13. Checklist
Compressor No
No
Item
Description
J.1
Set point
Identical for all compressors within system
J.2
Neutral zone
and
Matching values for all

compressors within system
P Band
K.1
TIMER SETUP
START DELAY

K.1
a
P BAND FACTOR
START DELAY

K.2
TIMER SETUP
STOP DELAY

K.2
a
P BAND FACTOR
STOP DELAY

K.3
TIMER SETUP
DELAY UP
Matching values for all reciprocating compressors

within system
K.3
a
P BAND FACTOR
DELAY UP

within system
K.4
TIMER SETUP
DELAY
DOWN

within system
K.4
a
P BAND FACTOR
DELAY DOWN

within system
L.1
CONFIG
TAKE OVER
Only recipr. compr. Set

for YES if compr. is to
take over from screw
L.2
TIMER SETUP
TK OVER
MAX

within system (TK = Take)
L.3
TRANSFER
FACTOR
DOWN

within system
L.4
TRANSFER
ZONE

within system
L.5
TAKE-OVER Matching values for all reFACTOR UP

ciprocating compressors
within system
174/222
10 11 12 13 14
0178-445 - ENG
Rev. 03.09
UNISAB II 2.03
13. Checklist
Compressor No
Item
Description
L.6
TAKE-OVER Matching values for all reciprocating compressors

FACTOR
within system
START
L.7
TAKE-OVER Matching values for all reZONE

ciprocating compressors
within system
10 11 12 13 14
0178_438_en.fm
No
0178-445 - ENG
Rev. 03.09
175/222
UNISAB II 2.03
13. Checklist
176/222
0178-445 - ENG
Rev. 03.09
UNISAB II 2.03
14. Start and system numbers

-
pref. master = COMPR#.

Example A - plants with one temperature system and five compressors where pref. master = COMPR#.
System no
Starting no
K1
K2
K3
K4
K5
Compressor no
Example B - plants with one temperature system and five compressors where pref. master = COMPR#.
System no
Starting no
K1
K2
K3
K4
K5
Compressor no
0178_439_en.fm
In examples A and B, K1 will be the regulator (system regulator) of the entire system.
Example C - plants with two temperature systems and five compressors (eg two-stage plants) where
pref. master = COMPR#.
System no
Starting no
K1
K2
K3
K4
K5
Compressor no
In example C, K1 will be system regulator of system no 1, and K3 will be system regulator of system no 2.
SETUP I MULTISAB I MULTISAB STATE

shows which unit has been chosen as SYS. REGULATOR.
In case of two regulating systems or more, it is the
compressor with the lowest number in the individual system that works as system regulator.
A compressor will not be part of the MULTISAB

system if it is in either MANUAL, AUTO,
STOPPED or SHUTDOWN, or if the digital inputs
EXTERNAL START-NORMAL STOP and EXTERNAL START-IMMEDIATE STOP have not
been connected.
The regulating compressor (SYS. REGULATOR)

will regulate the other compressors in the system
even if the compressor is in MANUAL, AUTO,
STOPPED or SHUTDOWN.
Moreover, the compressor will not be part of the

MULTISAB system if it is in REMOTE/capacity remote control with either a 4-20 mA external signal
or communication signal.
Only if the voltage supply or the communication is

disconnected, the system will automatically select
a new system regulator, which will be the unit with
the second lowest number.
The way the system operates can be varied depending on whether a reciprocating or a screw
compressor comes first in the sequence. Likewise, the way the system operates can be varied
with screw compressors of different sizes, de-
0178-445 - ENG
Rev. 03.09
177/222
UNISAB II 2.03
pending on whether a small or large compressor

comes first.
In case of mixed systems, it is recommended that

all reciprocating compressors in a system is
placed one after the other, followed by the screw
compressors, or vice versa. The take-over and
transfer functions will only be effective in case all
of the reciprocating compressors have lower starting numbers than the screw compressors in the
same system.
If compressors of different sizes are mixed, unfortunate part load conditions may occur, depending
on the sequence.
Be aware that if a screw compressor has the lowest starting number, it may go down on low capacity even at small loads.
Start and system numbers - pref. master = START#

Example A - plant with one temperature system and five compressors where pref. master = START#.
System no
Starting no
K1
K2
K3
K4
K5
Compressor no
In example A, K1 will be the regulator (system regulator) of the entire system, but only if it is operating or
able to start.
If K1 is stopped because of an alarm or if one of the digital inputs EXTERNAL START - NORMAL STOP
or EXTERNAL START- IMMEDIATE STOP is disconnected - and a cooling requirement still exists, the
next compressor in the starting sequence will be the regulator of the entire system provided that it is operating or able to start - and that it does start. In the above example K2 will become the regulator.
Example B - plant with one temperature system and five compressors where pref. master = START#.
System no
Starting no
K1
K2
K3
K4
K5
Compressor no
In example B, K5 will be the regulator (system regulator) of the entire system, but only if it is operating or
able to start.
If K5 is stopped - and a cooling requirement still exists, the next compressor in the starting sequence will
become the regulator of the entire system provided that it is operating or able to start - and that it does
start. In the above example K4 will become the regulator.
Example C - plant with two temperature systems and five compressors (eg two-stage plants)
System no
178/222
0178-445 - ENG
Rev. 03.09
UNISAB II 2.03
Example C - plant with two temperature systems and five compressors (eg two-stage plants)
Start no
Compressor no
K1
K2
K3
K4
K5
0178_439_en.fm
In example C, K2 will be the system regulator of system no 1, and K4 will be the system regulator of system no 2 provided that K2 and K4 are operating or able to start.
SETUP I MULTISAB I MULTISAB STATE
shows which unit has been chosen as SYS. REGULATOR.
If compressors of different sizes are mixed, unfortunate part load conditions may occur, depending
on the sequence.
In case of two regulating systems or more, it is the

compressor with the lowest number in the individual system that works as system regulator.
Be aware that if a screw compressor has the lowest starting number, it may go down on low capacity even at small loads.
The regulating compressor (SYS. REGULATOR)

will regulate the other compressors in the system,
but only if the compressor is in REMOTE/MULTISAB and at the same time operating or ready to
start.
In case of mixed systems it is recommended that

all reciprocating compressors in a system be
placed one after the other, followed by the screw
compressors, or vice versa. The take-over and
transfer functions will only be effective in case all
of the reciprocating compressors have lower starting numbers than the screw compressors in the
same system.
A compressor will not be part of the MULTISAB

system if it is in either MANUAL, AUTO,
STOPPED or SHUTDOWN, or if the digital inputs
EXTERNAL START-NORMAL STOP and EXTERNAL START-IMMEDIATE STOP have not
been connected.
Moreover, the compressor will not be part of the
MULTISAB system if it is in REMOTE/capacity remote control with either a 4-20 mA external signal
or communication signal.
The way the system operates can be varied depending on whether a reciprocating or a screw
compressor is comes first in the sequence. Likewise, the way the system operates can be varied
with screw compressors of different sizes, depending on whether a small or large compressor
comes first.
Compressor
Note:
The described example of possible configuration
where the pref.master = START# can only be
used for plants (systems) which are fitted solely
with UNISAB II units. The function cannot be used
together with a PROSAB II, UNISAB S or UNISAB
R / RT/ RTH. In such cases set pref.master =
COMPR# on UNISAB II.
Example of regulation - screw

compressors only
The working of MULTISAB will be described on
the basis of the below example and with the indicated compressors.
K1. SAB163 Mk.2
K2. SAB163 Mk.2
K3. SAB202S
K4. SAB202S
System no
Starting no
0178-445 - ENG
Rev. 03.09
179/222
UNISAB II 2.03
The following settings have been made in all units:

The digital inputs EXTERNAL START - NORMAL
STOP and EXTERNAL START - IMMEDIATE
STOP have been connected.
Configuration
CONTROL ON
= BRINE
AUTO START
= YES
AUTO STOP
= YES
COMPR.NO
= xx
(the compressors are numbered from 1-4)
PREF. MASTER
= COMPR#
(ie K1 is the system regulator)
COMMON EVAP/COND =Y/Y (
(common evaporator and common condenser)
SWEPT VOLUME
= xxxx
(corresponding to compressor name plate)
BAUD RATE
= 9600/19200/38400
(all compressors are fitted with UNISAB II)
Regulating parameters (for BRINE

regulator)
SP
= -2C
(chosen according to the operating conditions of
the plant)
NZ
= 1C
PB
= 5C
Timers
sors. By increasing Nz the temperature can vary

within a larger area before a temperature regulation becomes necessary.
If Pb is reduced, the plant will react faster to
changes in temperature to return to its set point.
This usually leads to temperature variations close
to the set point, but with frequent loading/unloading of compressor capacity.
If Pb is increasedl the plant reaction will be slower,
and this can prevent frequent oscillations around
the set point.
START DELAY is meant to prevent inadvertent
start of a subsequent compressor. In case the
compressor runs above 95% capacity and the
temperature is above the set point, START DELAY will be started on the next compressor in the
sequence. Should the temperature reach the set
point, ie be within the neutral zone before START
DELAY expires, the following compressor will not
start.
Should the temperature rise excessively before
start of the next compressor, START DELAY must
be reduced.
In case of too frequent compressor starts/stops,
START DELAY must be increased.
STOP DELAY determines the time the compressor runs at minimum capacity before stop. If quick
stop is required, reduce STOP DELAY. If the compressor is to run for a longer period, increase
STOP DELAY.
START DELAY = 60 sec.

STOP DELAY = 45 sec.
The above is a general description of the various

setting potentials. The final settings will depend
completely on the plant in question.
During the running-in time, adjustment of the values will be required.
Loading sequence
If Nz is reduced, the plant will react to minor temperature variations in relation to the set point. This
will result in a frequent regulation of the compres-
Compressor K1 is assumed to be in operation at

eg 70 % {Runs by itself}, K2 {Not my turn}, K3 and
K4 {Not my turn} are stopped.
180/222
0178-445 - ENG
Rev. 03.09
UNISAB II 2.03
The MULTISAB status, shown in picture SETUP

I MULTISAB I MULTISAB STATE, is marked
with {--}.
pr.}. When the compressors meet, ie when their

slide position is the same, they will continue to
regulate in parallel (see Fig. 14.1).
At increasing cooling requirements and consequent capacity loading, compressor K1 will increase capacity until 100% capacity is reached.
How much screw compressor K1 decreases in capacity and how fast in order to meet K2 depends
completely on the strength of the "UP" regulating
signal.
The loading speed depends on how far the immediate temperature is above the set point that has
been entered into the regulator.
0178_439_en.fm
If a cooling requirement still exists, ie the immediate temperature is above the set point and the capacity of K1 is above 95%, the time delay (START
DELAY) will start up in UNISAB II on compressor
K2. The timer will count down from its set point to
zero, and compressor K2 will start. (Should the
temperature reach the set point, ie be within Nz
before START DELAY expires, K2 will not start).
When the above has taken place, screw compressor K1 {Lead compr.} will run slowly down from
100% while K2 will increase its capacity {Lag com-
0178-445 - ENG
Rev. 03.09
With screw compressors K1 and K2 at 100% and

with a persistent cooling requirement, START DELAY will be started on screw compressor K3. After
a count-down to zero, K3 will start up. K1 will be
kept at 100% {Runs at max. capacity} and K2 and
K3 will regulate in parallel.
With a persistent cooling requirement and with K1,
K2 and K3 at 100%, START DELAY will be started
on screw compressor K4. The timer will count
down to zero, and K4 will start up. K1 and K2 will
be kept at 100% {Runs at max. capacity} and K3
and K4 will regulate in parallel.
181/222
UNISAB II 2.03
Fig. 14.1
%
100
Lead
Lead=lag
75
Increasing capacity
50
Lag
25
Start
5
0
10
15
20
25 min.
%
100
Lead
75
Decreasing capacity
50
Lag
25
Stop
5
0
When two screw compressors regulate in parallel,

it means that they follow each other up and down
in capacity and that both units will try to keep the
same capacity +/- approx 2%.
If the two compressors that regulate in parallel
have equal capacities, the capacity change at any
given relocation of the capacity slide will be doubled compared to the regulation of a single compressor.
MULTISAB compensates for this by reducing (by
half) the up and down regulating speed.
Unloading sequence
Three of the four plant compressors are assumed
to be in operation, K1 at 100% {Runs at max capacity}, K2 {Lead compr.} and K3 {Lag compr.}
both in parallel operation at eg 90%.
182/222
10
15
20
25 min.
At decreasing cooling requirement and a consequent capacity unloading, compressors K2 and

K3 will decrease their capacity until both are below the value called parallel capacity. The parallel
capacity is automatically calculated by MULTISAB. It depends on the size and types of the involved compressors and the operating conditions.
The parallel capacity is the limit at which K2 is
able to take over for certain. If the two compressors are of equal size, the parallel capacity will
usually be about 55%.
The percentage of PARALLEL CAPACITY can be
read in SETUP I MULTISAB I PARALLEL
CONTROL.
K3 will now ramp down towards 0% {Stop Ramp
Down} with a speed of approx 12%/min. When K3
is below 5% {May stop} the STOP DELAY timer
will start up. When STOP DELAY expires, K3 will
stop {Blocked}. K2 will, until K3 stops, ensure reg-
0178-445 - ENG
Rev. 03.09
UNISAB II 2.03
ulation all alone {Stop Ramp Up}, as K1 remains

at 100% {Runs at max capacity}.
When K1 and K3 are above 95% the time delay

(START DELAY) will start in UNISAB II
on compressor K4. The timer will count down from
its set point to zero, and compressor K4 will start
up.
Screw compressor K1 {Lead compr.} and K2 {Lag

compr.} will join each other in parallel operation.
If a cooling requirements still does not exist, K1
and K2 will decrease their capacity until both are
below parallel capacity. K2 will ramp down and
stop as soon as the STOP DELAY timer expires.
K4 will regulate upwards and the plant will have

the following operating mode: K1 at 100 % {Runs
at max capacity}, K3 {Lead compr.} and K4 {Lag
compr.} both in parallel operation at approx 65%
(the parallel operation percentage is lower now
than during the output state as K4 is larger than
K2).
K1 will now ensure regulation all alone {Runs by

itself}.
Operating sequence
The cooling requirement is constant.
The alarm on K2 is confirmed (after the oil filter

has been replaced), and although K2 enters the
READY status {Not my turn}, it will not start until a
requirement exists, as MULTISAB does not stop
K4 to make K2 resume its position in the sequence.
Due to an alarm caused by high oil filter differential pressure, K2 stops {Blocked}. This makes K1
{Lead compr.} and K3 {Lag compr.} change to parallel operation, and K3 will increase its capacity to
100%.
Example of regulation reciprocating compressors only

the basis of the below example and with the indicated compressors.
0178_439_en.fm
Three of the four plant compressors are assumed

to be in operation, K1 at 100% {Runs at max. capacity}, K2 {Lead compr.} and K3 {Lag compr.}
both in parallel operation at eg 80%.
Compressor
K1. SMC108L
K2. SMC108L
K3. SMC106S
K4. SMC106S
System no
Starting no

CONTROL ON
= SUCTION
AUTO START
= YES
AUTO STOP
= YES
Rev. 03.09
PREF. MASTER
= COMPR#
COMMON EVAP/COND = Y/Y
Configuration
0178-445 - ENG
COMPR.NO
= xx
(The compressorers are numbered from 1-4)
SWEPT VOLUME
= xxxx
(corresponding to the compressor name plate)
BAUD RATE
= 9600/19200/38400
183/222
UNISAB II 2.03
Regulating parameters (for SUCTION

PRESSURE regulator)
SP
= -10C/R
the plant)
NZ
= 3C
PB
= 5C
Timers
START DELAY
= 60 sec
STOP DELAY
= 45 sec
DELAY UP
= 30 sec
DELAY DOWN
= 20 sec

If Nz is reduced, the plant will react to minor suction pressure variations in relation to the set point.
This will result in frequent regulation of the compressors. By increasing Nz the suction pressure
can vary within a larger area before a regulation of
the compressors becomes necessary.
changes in the suction pressure to return to its set
point. This usually leads to temperature variations
close to the set point, but frequent loading/unloading of compressor capacity.
If Pb is increased, the plant reaction will be slower,
and this can prevent frequent oscillations around
the set point.
START DELAY is meant to prevent inadvertent
start of a subsequent compressor. In case the
compressor runs at 100% capacity and the temperature is above the set point, START DELAY
will be started on the next compressor in the se-
184/222
quence. Should the temperature reach the set

point, ie be within the neutral zone before START
DELAY expires, the next compressor will not start.
be reduced.
STOP DELAY determines the time the compressor runs at minimum capacity before stop. If a
quick stop is required, reduce STOP DELAY. If
the compressor is to run for a longer period, increase STOP DELAY.
If DELAY UP is increased, the reciprocating compressor will load capacity stages at a lower speed;
vice versa a lower value of DELAY UP will result
in faster loading.
If DELAY DOWN is increased, the reciprocating
compressor will unload capacity stages at a lower
speed; vice versa a lower value of DELAY DOWN
will result in faster unloading.
In many cases it is advantageous if DELAY UP is
higher than DELAY DOWN.
setting. The final settings will depend completely
on the plant in question.
Loading sequence
eg 75 % {Runs by itself}, K2 {Not my turn}, K3 and
K4 {Not my turn} have been stopped.
The MULTISAB status, as shown in picture SETUP I MULTISAB I MULTISAB STATE, is
marked with {--}.
0178-445 - ENG
Rev. 03.09
UNISAB II 2.03
Fig. 14.2
Capacity for
1 compressor
Increasing requirement for capacity

Compressors 1+2
Compressor 1
100
Compressor 2
75
50
25
0
Time
Capacity for
1 compressor
100
Decreasing requirement for capacity

Compressors 1+2
Compressor 2
Compressors 1
75
0178_439_en.fm
50
25
0
Time
At increasing cooling requirement and consequent capacity loading, reciprocating compressor

K1 will load stages at the DELAY UP time lag until
100% capacity has been reached.
With compressor K2 at 100% and still capacity requirement, the timer START DELAY starts on
compressor K3. It will count down before K3 starts
up.
It is possible to make the loading speed depend

on how far the actual suction pressure is above
the set point by setting the proportional factor DELAY UP above 1 in the picture SETUP I TIMERS
I P BAND FACTOR. See section Regulating setup.
When K3 is at 100% and a cooling requirement

still exists, the timer START DELAY will start on
K4. When timer has expired, K4 will start.
If a cooling requirement still exists, ie the immediate suction pressure is higher that the set point,
the timer START DELAY is started on compressor
K2. The timer will count down from its set point to
zero, and K2 will start. (In case the suction pressure reaches the neutral zone before START DELAY expires, K2 will not start).
0178-445 - ENG
Rev. 03.09
Unloading sequence
In an operating situation where the entire plant
runs at 100% and with a decreasing cooling requirement, unloading will start on compressor K4
first.
K4 will decrease its capacity by unloading stages
with the time delay DELAY DOWN between each
change of stage until it reaches minimum capacity, ie 33% (SMC 106S). One stage will now be un-
185/222
UNISAB II 2.03
loaded on compressor K3, which will run at 67%,

and the timer STOP DELAY will start on K4, (during unloading the reciprocating compressors will
overlap, Fig. 14.2).
The system will continue its unloading in stages

until K1 is stopped.
When time delay STOP DELAY expires on K4, K4

will stop.
It is also possible that the plant stabilizes at part

load, and if the cooling requirement increases, the
situation will be the same as described under
Loading sequence.
K3 will now decrease its capacity to minimum, and

after K2 has unloaded one stage, K3 will stop on
the timer STOP DELAY.
Example of regulation - combination of

screw and reciprocating compressors
Reciprocating compressor K2 will now start unloading stages with time delay DELAY DOWN,
until it reaches minimum capacity, ie 25%. One
stage will be unloaded on compressor K1, and the
timer STOP DELAY will start on K2.

the basis of the below examples A and B and with
the indicated compressors.
A:
Compressor
K1. Recip.
K2. Recip.
K3. Screw
K4. Screw
K5. Screw
System no
Starting no
Compressor
K1. Screw
K2. Screw
K3. Screw
K4. Recip.
K5.Recip.
System no
Starting no
B:

SWEPT VOLUME
= xxxx
(corresponding to the compressor name plate)
BAUD RATE
= 9600/19200/38400
Configuration
CONTROL ON
= SUCTION
AUTO START
= YES
AUTO STOP
= YES
COMPR.NO
= xx
(The compressorers are numbered from 1-5)
PREF. MASTER
= COMPR#
186/222
COMMON EVAP/COND = Y/Y

Regulating parameters (for SUCTION

PRESSURE regulator)
SP
= -20C/R
the plant)
NZ
= 1C
0178-445 - ENG
Rev. 03.09
UNISAB II 2.03
PB
= 5C
Timers
START DELAY
= 60 sec
STOP DELAY
= 45 sec
DELAY UP
= 30 sec
(only reciprocating compressors)
DELAY DOWN
= 20 sec
(only reciprocating compressors)
0178_439_en.fm

If Nz is reduced, the plant will react to minor suction pressure variations in relation to the set point.
This will result in frequent regulation of the compressors. By increasing Nz the suction pressure
can vary within a larger area before a regulation of
the compressors becomes necessary.
changes in the suction pressure to return to its set
point. This usually leads to temperature variations
close to the set point, but frequent loading/unloading of compressor capacity.
If Pb is increased, the plant reaction will be slower,
and this may prevent frequent oscillations around
the set point.
The purpose of START DELAY is to try to prevent
inadvertent start-up of a subsequent compressor.
In case a compressor is at 100% capacity and the
suction pressure is still above the neutral zone,
START DELAY will be started on the next compressor in the sequence. Should the suction pressure reach the neutral zone before START DELAY expires, the following compressor will not
start.
be reduced.
0178-445 - ENG
Rev. 03.09

STOP DELAY determines the time the compressor runs at minimum capacity before stop. If a
quick stop is required, reduce STOP DELAY. If
the compressor is to run for a longer period, increase STOP DELAY.
If DELAY UP is increased, the reciprocating compressor will load capacity stages at a lower speed;
vice versa a lower value of DELAY UP will result
in faster loading.
If DELAY DOWN is increased, the reciprocating
compressor will unload capacity stages at a lower
speed; vice versa a lower value of DELAY DOWN
will result in faster unloading.
In many cases it is advantageous if DELAY UP is
higher than DELAY DOWN.
It is recommended to place all reciprocating compressors in a system one after the other followed
by the screw compressors, or vice versa.
The take-over and transfer functions described in
the following will only be effective if all reciprocating compressors have lower starting numbers
than the screw compressors.
settings. The final settings will depend completely
on the plant in question.
Loading sequence - sequence A

eg 50 % {Runs by itself}, K2 {Not my turn}, K3, K4
and K5 {Not my turn} have been stopped.
marked with {--}.
At increasing cooling requirement and consequent capacity loading, reciprocating compressor
187/222
UNISAB II 2.03
K1 will load stages at the DELAY UP time lag until

100% capacity has been reached.
It is possible to make the loading speed depend
on how far the actual suction pressure is above
the set point by setting the proportional factor DELAY UP above 1 in the picture SETUP I TIMERS
I P BAND FACTOR. See section Regulating setup.
If a cooling requirement still exists, ie the actual
suction pressure is higher than the set point, the
timer START DELAY will start on compressor K2.
The timer will count down from its set point to zero, and reciprocating compressor K2 will start. (In
case the suction pressure reaches the neutral
zone before START DELAY expires, K2 will not
start).
With compressor K2 at 100% and a persistent capacity requirement, the timer START DELAY will
start on K3. The timer will count down before K3
starts up.
When K3 is at 100% and a cooling requirement
still exists, the timer START DELAY will start on
K4. When the timer has expired, K4 will start.
When the above has taken place, screw compressor K3 will go down from 100% while K4 will increase its capacity. When they meet, ie when their
slide positions are the same, they will continue to
regulate in parallel (see Fig. 14.1).
Whether screw compressor K3 decreases its capacity and how fast to meet K4 depends completely on the strength of the "UP" regulating signal.
With screw compressors K3 and K4 at 100% and
with a persistent cooling requirement, START DELAY will be started on screw compressor K5. After
a countdown to zero, K5 will start up. K3 will now
be kept at 100% {Runs at max capacity}, and K4
{Lead compr.} and K5 {Lag compr.} will regulate in
parallel.
188/222
State of transfer
In case of a minor cooling requirement, it is assumed that the plant stabilizes in the following situation: reciprocating compressors K1 and K2 both
at 100% and screw compressor K3 in 40% slide
position.
Reciprocating compressor K2 will now pass into
the "transfer" state, ie it will start decreasing its capacity to force the screw compressor capacity upwards.
However, this will only take place if the actual suction pressure is within the 'transfer zone', consisting of the neutral zone (zone 1) plus the transfer
zone (zone 3), which is default 15% of the regulator proportional band, (see Fig. 14.3).
When the reciprocating compressor unloads another stage, this will happen with a time delay that
(in sec) is the setting of DELAY DOWN multiplied
by the 'transfer factor' for DELAY DOWN. This
factor, 1-10, has been entered to avoid hunting in
the plant as far as possible as the regulating system must have time to react to the rise in the suction pressure when the reciprocating compressor
is unloading.
If the suction pressure rises (zone 2), the reciprocating compressor will stop the down regulation
while the screw compressor regulates upwards to
get the suction pressure in place.
Once the plant has balanced, the reciprocating
compressor will continue the unloading of stages
and the screw compressor will readjust.
Provided that requirements stay the same, this
process will continue until the screw compressor
is above 85% slide posiiton. Above this fixed limit
it is assumed that the screw compressor is running fairly economically. Further reduction of the
reciprocating compressor capacity would result in
a high risk that the screw compressor is no longer
able to take over, causing frequent loading and
0178-445 - ENG
Rev. 03.09
UNISAB II 2.03
unloading of stages or start and stop of the reciprocating compressor.

The result may be that the reciprocating compresor K1 runs at 100%, K2 at 25% and screw compressor K3 at 85%.
If the cooling requirement increases, screw compressor K3 will be loaded at 100%, whereupon reciprocating compressor K2 will be loaded.
Fig. 14.3
+ regulator output signal (capacity UP)
6. outside PB
4. 85% PB
SP
2. 15% PB
1. NZ
Takeover zone = 1+2

Transfer zone = 1+3
3. 15% PB
0178_439_en.fm
5. 85% PB
7. outside PB
- regulator output signal (capacity DOWN)
State of take-over
If the plant stabilizes after a transfer situation with
K1 at 100%, K2 stopped, screw compressor K3 at
40% capacity, and K2 able to take over this capacity, K2 will start. However, this will only take
place if the actual suction pressure is within the
'take-over zones', consisting of the neutral zone
(zone 1) plus the take-over zone (zone 2) which is
default 15% of the regulator proportional band,
(see Fig. 14.3).
When K2 starts up to take over the screw compressor capacity, this will take place with the loading time DELAY UP multiplied by the 'take-over'
factor for DELAY UP. This factor, 1-10, has been
entered to avoid hunting.
When reciprocating compressor K2 is loading
stages, the suction pressure will drop, but this is
0178-445 - ENG
Rev. 03.09
compensated for by unloading on screw compressor K3, until it reaches minimum and stops on
STOP DELAY.
Be aware that during reloading periods it may
happen that a screw compressor is running at low
capacity. Furthermore, reloading will take a certain amount of time, which prevents instability in
the plant.
In plants with frequent load changes, it may take
longer before the reciprocating compressors take
over/transfer capacity.
If the plant is very unstable, the variations may be
absorbed exclusively by the screw compressor.
Consequently, the screw compressor will in some
periods run at low capacity. This can be avoided
by removing the starting permission from either
189/222
UNISAB II 2.03
the screw compressor or the reciprocating compressor.

Reciprocating compressors will only try to take
over/transfer capacity from/to screw compressors
that come later in the sequence.
lay DELAY DOWN until it is down to minimum capacity. Next, a stage is unloaded on compressor
K1, and the STOP DELAY time will start on K2 (ie
during unloading the reciprocating compressors
will overlap, (see Fig. 14.2).
Unloading sequence - sequence A
The system will continue unloading in stages until

K1 stops.
In an operating situation where the entire plant

runs at 100% and with a decreasing cooling requirement, unloading will start on the screw compressors.
The plant may also stabilize at part load, and in

case the cooling requirement is increasing, the situation will be the same as described under Loading sequence - sequence A.
As illustrated in Fig. 14.1, K4 and K5 will reduce

their capacity in parallel until both are below the
value called the parallel capacity. The parallel capacity is automatically calculated by MULTISAB.
It depends on the size and types of the involved
compressors and the operating conditions. The
parallel capacity is the limit at which it is certain
that K4 is able to take over. If the two compressors
are of equal size, the parallel capacity will usually
be approx 55%.
The percentage of PARALLEL CAPACITY can be
read in SETUP I MULTISAB I PARALLEL
CONTROL.
K5 will now ramp down towards 0% {Stop Ramp
Down} with a speed of approx 12% /min. When K5
is below 5% {May stop}, the timer STOP DELAY
will start. When STOP DELAY expires, K5 will
stop {Blocked}. K4 will, until K5 stops, ensure regulation all alone {Stop Ramp Up} as K1, K2 and
K3 remain at 100% {Runs at max capacity}.
Next, the screw compressors K3 {Lead compr.}
and K4 {Lag compr.} will work together until K4
stops.
K3 will now decrease its capacity to a minimum
and stops on its time, STOP DELAY.
When this has happened reciprocating compressor K2 will start unloading stages with the time de-
190/222
Loading sequence - sequence B

Compressor K1 is assumed to have stopped {May
start}, K2, K3, K4 and K5 {Not my turn} are
stopped.
marked with {--}.
In case of a cooling requirement, K1 will start.
When it has reached 100% capacity, START DELAY will start on screw compressor K2. The timer
will count down, and K2 will start up. When this
has happened, screw compressor K1 will go down
from 100%, while the capacity of K2 will go up.
When the compressors meet, ie when their slide
positions are the same, they will regulate in parallel.
When K1 and K2 are in 100%, the time delay
START DELAY will start on screw compressor K3.
When the timer has expired, K3 will start up and
K1 will be kept at 100%.
When this has happened, screw compressor K2
will go down from 100%, while the capacity of K3
will go up. When the compressors meet, ie when
their slide positions are the same, they will regulate in parallel.
0178-445 - ENG
Rev. 03.09
UNISAB II 2.03
Whether K2 reduces its capacity and at which

speed to meet K3 depends completely on the
strength of the "UP" regulating signal.
With K2 and K3 at 100% and a persistent cooling
requirement, ie the actual suction pressure is
higher than the set point, the time delay START
DELAY will start on reciprocating compressor K4.
The timer will count down to zero and reciprocating compressor K4 will start up. Should the actual
suction pressure reach the neutral zone before
START DELAY expires, K4 will not start.
0178_439_en.fm
K4 will now load and unload stages according to

the cooling requirements, while the screw compressors K1, K2, K3 are kept at 100% capacity
{Runs at max capacity}.
pressor K5 {Lag compr.} will be the first to unload

stages with time delay DELAY DOWN until it has
reached minimum capacity. Next, one stage is unloaded on compressor K4, and STOP DELAY will
now start on K5 (ie during unloading the reciprocating compressors will overlap, (see Fig. 14.2)).
When STOP DELAY has expired, compressor K5
will stop, and K4 will now continue the unloading.
When K4 has unloaded to minimum capacity, it
will start up its STOP DELAY time and when this
has expired, K4 will stop.
This will continue until all the compressors are at

100% capacity.
Screw compressors K2 and K3 are now going to

decrease their capacity in parallel operation, until
they are below the parallel capacity (usually 55%
if they are of equal size). K3 will be run down to
minimum capacity and stops on its STOP DELAY
time. At the same time K2 will take over.
Be aware that with the above sequence screw

compressor K1 may start and stabilize at eg 35%
capacity corresponding to the actual cooling requirement. In this situation a subsequent reciprocating compressor will not try to take over because it comes later in the sequence.
Screw compressors K1 and K2 will adjust in parallel to the same slide position and start decreasing their capacity in parallel operation until they
are below the parallel capacity. K2 will be run
down to minimum capacity and stop on its STOP
DELAY time. At the same time K1 will take over.
Unloading sequence - sequence B
Depending on the capacity requirement, K1 will

reduce its capacity and possibly stop completely.
With the entire plant running at 100% and a decreasing cooling requirement, reciprocating com-
0178-445 - ENG
Rev. 03.09
191/222
UNISAB II 2.03
Practical example 1
Fig. 14.4
% SMC 8-100 Start # 2
100
80
60
40
20
0
SMC 12-100 Start # 1
100
80
60
40
20
0
VMY 325-3 Start # 5
100
80
60
40
20
0
VMY 325-2 Start # 3
100
80
60
40
20
0
VMY 347-1 Start # 4
100
80
60
40
20
0
-4
-3
A
C D
-2
E
F G
-1 Immediate Time
I
0177150_0
Fig. 14.4 shows that the VMY 347 screw compressor has number 1, the two VMY 325 compressors have numbers 2 and 3. Further, SMC 12-100
has number 4 and SMC 8-100 number 5. The sequence starting number is seen after "Start #".
The curve, taken from an existing plant, describes
a regulating course over a period of approx 3
hours, divided into intervals from A to K.
In interval "A" compressors 1 and 2 run at part
load, until they are both a little below 50% slide
position, interval "B". Here, the system decides
that K1 can be unloaded and K2 will take over.
K2 will now increase its capacity with a simultaneous increase in the cooling requirement, which
means that K4 will start up and adjust its capacity,
192/222
interval "C". In interval "D" the cooling requirement

drops, and K2 will unload and stop. The two reciprocating compressors K4 and K5 will now cover
the cooling requirements.
In interval "E" there is a brief increase in the cooling requirement. This increase is covered by K2.
After some time K2 will stop as the cooling requirement has dropped again. However, the plant
does not have time to stabilize.
In interval "F" the cooling requirement rises again
and K2 will restart and go up to approx 60% slide
position. Here, the plant stabilizes at a constant
compressor capacity in interval "G".
In the period until interval "H" the reciprocating
compressor transfers capacity to the screw com-
0178-445 - ENG
Rev. 03.09
UNISAB II 2.03
pressor as the screw compressor is below 85%

slide position. K5 stops completely, and K4 will
start transferring capacity. In interval "I" K2 has
risen to 70%. Until interval "K" K4 will unload further and K2 will now be at 100% capacity.
Practical example 2
Fig. 14.5
%
100
80
60
40
20
0
100
80
60
40
20
0
0178_439_en.fm
100
80
60
40
20
0
100
80
60
40
20
0
100
80
60
40
20
0
-4
SMC 8-100 Start # 2
SMC 12-100 Start # 1
VMY 325-3 Start # 5
VMY 325-2 Start # 3
VMY 347-1 Start # 4
-3
A B
-2
C D E F
-1
G
Immediate
Time
0177150_0
Fig. 14.5 shows that the VMY 347 screw compressor has number 1, the two VMY 325 compressors have numbers 2 and 3. Furthermore, SMC
12-100 has number 4 and SMC 8-100 number 5.
The sequence starting number is seen after "Start
#".
Until interval "C" these three compressors are running at 100%. A rise in the cooling requirement will
make K1 start up. At this point K1 and K2 will start
dividing the capacity. This can be seen in interval
"D", where K2 has decreased a little, while K1 is
on its way up.
The curve, taken from an existing plant, describes

a regulating course over a period of approx. 3
hours, divided into intervals from A to K.
In interval "E" K1 and K2 have the same slide position (approx 70%) and they regulate in parallel.
In interval "F" K5 may transfer capacity and this
may continue with K4 transferring until interval
"G", where the screw compressors have reached
approx 80%.
In interval "A" compressors K2 and K4 are running

at 100% until interval "B". Here, there is a rise in
the cooling requirement, and K5 will start loading.
0178-445 - ENG
Rev. 03.09
193/222
UNISAB II 2.03
In interval "H" K1 and K2 are above 85% and K4

will stay passive until interval "I", where K1 and K2
have regulated down due to decreasing cooling
requirement. Once they are below 85%, K4 will
transfer its remaining capacity. The screw compressors have now taken over the entire load.
Please note that in case the sequence is changed
during operation, do not expect any immediate reaction. If the plant is balanced at this particular
time, it will continue to operate with the "old" sequence, until a movement has taken place in the
regulation and it has adapted to the new sequence. The chosen compressor sequence will
depend on the operating mode of the plant as well
as the size of the compressors compared to each
other.
4)
Is the actual suction pressure higher than

the set point +1/2 neutral zone?
5)
Are any of the limiting functions active?
6)
Have AUTO START and AUTO STOP been

configured?
7)
Has the COLD STORE FUNC. been configured?
The plant does not run in sequence

1)
Thus, it can be difficult to achieve an optimum

compressor operation in every situation. However, it is possible to select compressors by using
the signal input external start - normal stop as a
supplement to the MULTISAB system facilities as
described above. By removing the external start normal start signal the compressors can be removed from the sequence. MULTISAB will now
load compressors with rising sequence numbers despite the "holes" in the starting sequence.
Trouble shooting
The plant cannot start
1)
Are all UNISAB II units set on REMOTE?
2)
Have the signals external start - normal stop

and external start - immediate stop been activated? See UNISAB II drawings Digital inputs.
3)
Do the units communicate? - check this by

means of the picture SETUP I MULTISAB
I ALL COMPRESSORS. Check communication cable.
194/222
Do the units communicate? In case of no

communication, each UNISAB II will run
with its own regulator. It may be useful to enter the picture SETUP I MULTISAB I ALL
COMPRESSORS and go through the compressor numbers (use J and K ). There will
be a question mark (?) in the lower left corner of the display if there is no communication to the UNISAB II with the selected
number.
Check communication cable and
connection.
Do two or more UNISAB II units have
the same compressor number (COMPR.
NO)? Check the numbers in picture
SETUP I CONFIG I COMMUNICATIONS. They must all be unique.
2)
Do all units that are supposed to run in sequence have identical SYSTEM NO, which
they must. Check the picture SETUP I
MULTISAB I MULTISAB STATE.
3)
Check whether all units in the same system

agree upon the same SYS.REGULATOR,
see picture SETUP I MULTISAB I MULTISAB STATE. If this is not the case, do all
units agree on how to decide the master/system regulator? See the PREF.MASTER field in SETUP I CONFIG.
0178-445 - ENG
Rev. 03.09
UNISAB II 2.03
If PREF. MASTER = START#, has the

same START NO been entered in two or
more units? See picture SETUP I MULTISAB I MULTISAB STATE. They must all
be unique!
5)
Is START NO = 0 in one or more UNISAB II

units? MULTISAB requires that all START
NO are higher than 0 and that not two are
identical. Note that though it is not possible
to select 0 as START NO., the START NO.
may still become 0 for several reasons.
0178_439_en.fm
4)
0178-445 - ENG
Rev. 03.09
195/222
UNISAB II 2.03
196/222
0178-445 - ENG
Rev. 03.09
UNISAB II 2.03
15. List of Versions

This instruction manual applies to the UNISAB II version stated on page 1.
As an exception, the manual can be used for an earlier version of the UNISAB II program. In such cases
it is necessary to consult the list of versions below to identify the points where the manual cannot be relied
upon.
Version no
Description
1.01
On the HPO compressor an incorrect scaling of the discharge pressure has been corrected. 15 languages have been entered.
1.02
No changes in the user's operation.
1.03
The timers Start Delay and Stop Delay will be working, also when capacity is regulated
on the external 4-20 mA analog signal.
The digital output AUX = "ready" is only active when the compressor is able to start, ie
the digital input "external start permission - normal stop" must also be active.
1.04
The hour counter counts in single hours and no longer in intervals of 10 hours.
0178_440_en.fm
An error in press./temp. conversion for R23 refrigerant at approx -70C has been corrected.
An error in the MULTISAB system resulting in blocking of plants with three or more reciprocating compressors in sequence has been corrected. (The compressor starting
as no 1 remained at 100% capacity at load reduction, preventing no. 2 from unloading
the last stage).
1.05
This version does not exist.
1.06
Refrigerant R508 has changed its name to R410A.

A new refrigerant, R407C, has been entered.
Two new screw compressor types have been introduced: SAB 128H Mk3 and SAB
163H Mk3.
Automatic zero position (capacity slide) setting has been introduced for SAB 202 with
automatic Vi slide as well as manual zero position setting for other screw compressor
types.
1.07
Automatic zero position setting has been introduced for SAB 202 with manual Vi slide.
The regulating speed (max speed) has been increased. The regulation is now faster
(longer pulses - particularly at low oil pressure levels) than in previous versions.
TSMC/TCMO compressors had no setpoint 2 (SP2) for discharge pipe temperature for
regulating the "intermediate press. injection". This has now been introduced.
1.08
General remarks:
During a sequence running with two or more screw compressors, it could happen that
all compressors stayed at low capacity without regulating upwards although a capacity
requirement existed. This error has been corrected in MULTISAB.
If the suction pressure ramp limiting function prevents the compressor from increasing
its capacity to more than 5%, the timer "delay before stop" will not be activated as was
the case previously. The compressor will remain in operation.
The configuration point "COMMON CONDENSER" has been extended to include
"common evaporator" and is now called "COMMON EVAP/COND N/N".
0178-445 - ENG
Rev. 03.09
197/222
UNISAB II 2.03
Version no
Description
Screw compressors:
For screw compressors two warnings have been introduced: "LIMITING SUCTION
PRESSURE"and "LIMITING DISCHARGE PRESSURE". These will occur whenever
the UNISAB II is in position "READY" but unable to start because the suction or discharge pressure is within the neutral zone of the limiter in question.
For VMY compressors, the solenoid valve for "capacity down" opens whenever the
compressor is prelubricated.
A limiting function has been introduced for "high suction pressure limitation". The compressor capacity is limited, during operation, to an adjustable max. value when the suction pressure is above the high warning limit for the suction pressure.
Reciprocating compressors:
A function controlling the by-pass valve ("cap.stage 1") has now been entered for the
TCMO 28 compressor.
The timers "DELAY UP" and "DELAY DOWN" that operate in connection with the loading and unloading of capacity stages are now active both during capacity regulation
with external "4-20 mA input" signals or if capacity regulation takes place via data communication.
1.09
General remarks:
In the TIMERS menu picture the TIMER SETUP picture has been displaced so that the
picture obtains a position on the part of the timer menu that is immediately visible when
you select the menu.
In the CALIB/AUX.OUTPUTpicture the AUX output can now be activated by: RUNNING and READY-EXT.
At auto alarm reset, e.g. at a low suction pressure, the alarm relay will also be auto
reset.
1.09 (cont.)
Special warnings: Limiter suction pressure, Limiter discharge pressure, Limiter brine
and Limiter hot water can now be read via the Danbuss communication.
Motor currents SP1 and SP2 can now be changed right up to 2500 Amp.
Due to an error in the A/D converter software, we have received reports of a false
alarm for "Low brine temp" at "Power up" in some plants. This has now been corrected.
Via the communication it is now possible to read whether UII is in REMOTE/capacity
regulating mode. To be read as "Cap.mode".
An HP compressor started up by means of the "HP at two-stages" function + the "Ext.
start normal stop" signal, is now not going to stop on the "Stop delay" timer anymore,
even though capacity is below 5%.
Screw compressors:
A Multisab error has been rectified which could occur as follows:
At suction pressure limitation, both compressors regulated down to 0% and the Lead
compressor stopped. Before the Lag compressor stopped, however, the capacity requirements change. The Lag compressor then continued to run at 0% without regulating upwards, although capacity was needed. This situation coul be altered by changing
the Lead compressor from Remote to Manual after which the regulation worked correctly when switching back again to Remote.
198/222
0178-445 - ENG
Rev. 03.09
UNISAB II 2.03
Version no
Description
The position regulator parameters (SP, NZ and PB) are now accessible in a new parameter picture for MOTOR/CAPACITY. It is also possible to change NZ and PB via
the communication.
Further, the neutral zone (+/-1%) at capacity regulation has been removed.
A false alarmfor "capacity error" that might occur (in some special cases), often at
100% capacity and with regulation in the neutral zone, has now been removed.
If a VMY compressor happened to fall out at "Capacity error" during operation, while
the slide was above 5%, the slide was not run down when the alarm was confirmed,
because the oil pump did not start. This has now been corrected.
The VMY compressor would stop the slide run down (the oil pump was stopped) whenever the capacity was below 5%. An extended hysterisis has now been introduced so
that the oil pump does not stop until 10 sec. have passed and capacity is below 4.5%.
1.09 (cont.)
The MULTISAB transfer- and take-over mode for linking of reciprocating and screw
compressors has now been implemented with the same functionality as that of Unisab-RT.
The texts in the TIMERS, TRANSFER and TAKE-OVER pictures have been changed.
0178_440_en.fm
The new E-type for SMC/TSMC compressors has been introduced in CONFIG.
HPO/HPC. The setpoint for the suction pressure regulator can now be set to 25 Bar the discharge pressure regulator right up to 40 Bar. The warning limit for High Differential Pressure is 25 Bar.
1.10
Please note that this program version no. 1.10 is tied up with instruction
manual version 1.10A.
General remarks:
All SMC and TSMC compressors are going to be configured as either type S/L or E.
An HP compressor started with the "HP at two-stage" function + "Ext. start normal" signal, is not going to stop on the "Stop delay" timer if the comperessor has been selected
for REMOTE/Multisab and no other compressors are operating in this system. Can
only be stopped by opening the input:"Ext. start normal".
The AUX output READY-EXT is now also applicable in AUTO
It is now possible to use a user-configurable refrigerantR000.
It is now possible to use a user-defined password.
UNISAB II can now be reconfigurered to UNISAB / Evolution.
Screw compressors:
The secondary oil pump on VMY compressors was able to make a brief start on "power
up". This has been corrected.
Prosab II and UNISAB II did not regulate correctly in LEAD-LAG.
This has been corrected.
The minimum limits for low oil pressure has been raised for Mk3 compressors.
The heating rod was not connected at compressor stop if the compressor:
1) stopped on alarm within 60 sec after start or
2) the alarm "capacity error" appeared at a stop.
This has now been rectified.
0178-445 - ENG
Rev. 03.09
199/222
UNISAB II 2.03
Version no
Description
An adjustable time delay has been built in on the oil return.
The time delay for low oil pressure is now also active during operation.
It is now possible to set up a delayed closing of the solenoid valves for oil cooling or
water cooling at compressor stop.
A limiting function has beeen introduced for high discharge temperatures.
The limiting function for "high suction pressure limitation" has now also been introduced for reciprocating compressors.
The capacity of the reciprocating compressor is stored in DIAGNOSIS I OLD
ALARMS in case the alarm should fall out.
1.11
This version does not exist.
1.12
General remarks:
COP calculation and display on the UNISAB II is now possible. Select the function in
configuration. The calculated COP, the cooling output and the efficiencyare shown in
the picture COP.
The position transmitter signal for the capacity slide can be calibrated at 0 % and 100
%.
A test version containing the SAB 330 screw compressor is installed. The programme
can only be used for internal YORK test.
It is now possible to select the unit kPa in the UNISAB II.
A larger EEPROM type with a capacity of 4 kByte has been introduced. Up to now the
capacity has only been 2 kByte.
Screw compressors:
Screw compressor type SV 80 is now supported.
The UNISAB Evolution II data are now automatically updated in the Evolution menu
structure.
An error whereby the heating element was not activated after switching the power
on/off has been rectified.
Aconversion error in the display of oil filter difference pressure has now been rectified.
The error only occured during PSI conversion.
It is now possible to disconnect the MULTISAB "transfer/take-over" function.
A MULTISAB error which occurred in a certain combination of plants with both screw
compressors and reciprocating compressors has now been rectified.
1.13
General remarks:
EEPROM, calibration settings and hour counter are saved.
Screw compressors
In version 1.12 the VMY compressors started the prelubrication pumps shortly after
power up. This has now been rectified.
When the UNISAB II has been configured so that it is regulated using the brine temperature, and this is in the lower P-Band, and a limiting function at the same time is
active, the UNISAB II will - when the lowest step has been reached - count down in
"delay down" instead of "stop timer". This has now been rectified.
200/222
0178-445 - ENG
Rev. 03.09
UNISAB II 2.03
Version no
Description
1.13
(990831)
Version 1.13 - which is marked with the date 990831 - differs from the original 1.13
mainly on the following points:
It is found in three varieties: 1.13-A, 1.13-B and 1.13-C. The three varieties contain the
same program but in three different sets of languages:
-1.13-A: English, Danish, Finnish, Italian, Norwegian and Swedish.
-1.13-B: English, German, French, Hungarian, Dutch and Russian.
-1.13-C: English, Czech, Spanish, Greek, Portuguese and Polish.
When UNISAB II is switched on for the first time or when a program
RESET is performed, the set language is English.
Low oil pressure alarm is delayed extra 10 seconds at compressor start to avoid unintended alarm.
A number of alarms and warnings has been added.
The alarm #83 "Vi position" appears if the shown capacity is 100% while the measured
capacity position is < 20%.
1.13
(000224)
A number of errors have been corrected compared to earlier versions.

Additionally,
it is now possible in the MULTISAB PARALLEL CONTR picture to type in an OFFSET to the parallel capacity;
0178_440_en.fm
changes regarding "Evolution" have been carried out.

2.00
General remarks:
The following compressor types have been added:
-SAB 128 HR
-SAB 163 HR
-SAB 250 S/L/E
-SAB 330 S/L/E
The following refrigerant type has been added: R744 (CO2).
Communication with Quantum compressor controller now possible.
The AUX OUTPUT can now additionally be configured to "READY AND ME ONLY"
which can be used to ensure water circulation at the PT100 sensor even if no compressor is running.
The manual has been thoroughly updated.
0178-445 - ENG
Rev. 03.09
201/222
UNISAB II 2.03
Version no
Description
Screw compressors:
The capacity control is now being carried out by standard PID controllers.
Minimum capacity increase/decreace pulse 0.3 sec.
At compressor stop, capacity down signal until capacity < 5%.
A low pass filter has been attached to the suction superheat to avoid low superheat
alarm when unloading stages. The timer "Low superheat" is now adjustable 15 - 600
sec.
2.01
Further remarks:
Compressor types SAB 283 L/E, SAB 355 L as well as the GSV/RWF series (see configuration).
Two new refrigerants: R1270 (Propylene), R 290 (Propane).
One new timer has been introduced for screw compressors:
Timer 33 Lubricating pressure.
One new timer for reciprocating and screw compressors have been introduced:
Timer 32 Low suction pressure.
Turkish has been added.
Timer for oil filter differential pressure has been raised to 300 seconds.
Screw compressor, type SAB 80. Max values for oil filter differential pressure have
been changed to: Alarm = 2.5 bar and warning = 2.2 bar.
Contrast can now be adjusted from any menu picture by means of the RESET button
and the arrow up/down keys.
Low alarm and low warning for brine temperature have been changed from -60C to
100C.
Screw compressor: Start delay and stop delay factors affecting the countdown of the
timer have been changed to start and stop delay zones in [%] of the P-band. When
regulated value is outside a zone, the timer will start. Set value 0-100 [%]. Setting of
0 [%] results in the zone passing over to the other side of Nz, ie. a stop delay zone =
0 % means that the stop delay timer will start when regulated value is inside or below
Nz.
2.01 (020221)
202/222
EEPROM. When switching to the use of two EPROMS at the same time (from version
2.0x) a timing problem occurred which had the effect that writing to and reading from
the EEPROM was not always carried out correctly. This has now been rectified.
0178-445 - ENG
Rev. 03.09
UNISAB II 2.03
Version no
Description
2.01 ROTA
This version has never been officially released but has primarily been used for rotatune
units and as spare part for correction of errors.
General remarks
If the compressor capacity was controlled by a 4-20 mA signal, the compressor would
not start even though the signal exceeded 4.8 mA (5% capacity). This has now been
rectified.
At the initial start-up of UNISAB II, the start number and system number were set at a
fixed value of 0. This had the effect that the compressor could not start and operate
in auto and remote control. This has now been rectified.
Multisab sequence was not optimized to support correct operation between frequency
controlled and conventional compressors. This has now been rectified.
The menu lines CAPACITY and VOLUME have been moved from the MOTOR picture
in the main menu to a new picture called CAPACITY. This picture is found below the
SET UP menu. See menu tree in the beginning of your manual.
There is a new menu line below the MOTOR picture which is called MOTOR FREQUENCY. It indicates motor revolutions per minute when the compressor capacity is
regulated by a frequency converter.
0178_440_en.fm
The COP picture has been moved from the CALIBRATION menu to the CONFIGURATION menu.
Configuration. In the measuring unit picture, there is a new menu line, MOTOR INPUT.
See the configuration section in your manual for installation.
Screw compressors
When operating in 100% capacity for a longer period of time, sometimes the compressor would simply stop for no reason with the alarm for capacity error on. This has now
been rectified.
The following compressor type has been added: Gram GST screw compressor with
stepless capacity slide control and control of the volume slide in three steps by means
of two solenoid valves. Volume ratios: 2.2-3.5-5.
The volume transmitter can now be calibrated by means of software calibration. See
the calibration section in your manual.
The feedback signal from a frequency converter can now be calibrated by means of
software calibration. See the calibration section in your manual.
Configuration. In the measuring unit picture, there is a new menu line, CAP/FREQ.
See the configuration section in your manual for installation.
A new timer has been introduced in connection with GST compressors: Timer 34 Vipause.
HPO/HPC. High warning is increased from 25.0 bar to 25.2 bar. Thus, the limiter zone
is now 25.0-25.2 bar.
0178-445 - ENG
Rev. 03.09
203/222
UNISAB II 2.03
Version no
Description
2.02.1
This version replaces all prior versions.

General remarks
4-20 mA initialization error during UNISAB II restart. The display was flashing during
reconnection of power supply to UNISAB II. The error first occurred in version 2.01. It
has now been rectified.
The ROTA concept has now been extended to include reciprocating compressors with
frequency converters and screw compressors controlled by a combination of frequency, capacity slide and volume slide.
The multisab system now handles both frequency controlled screw and reciprocating
compressors which operate in sequence with either reciprocating and/or screw compressors.
The copy EEPROM function, when changing parts in UNISAB II or at low battery voltage and a simultaneous reconnection of power supply, has now been changed. Thus
it is no longer necessary to enter password to reply YES, simply press arrow left to
restart. See service section in the manual for further details.
UNISAB evolution plant. When simultaneously using the function EVOLUTION and
CHILLER = YES in the configuration, the following error might occur: During operation,
the green diode on the front cover would start to flash for about one minute and then,
for no apparent reason, the compressor would stop. This has now been rectified.
UNISAB evolution plant. When simoltaneously using the function EVOLUTION and
CHILLER = YES in the configuration, the following error might occur: In case of a
pause before compressor start-up, the compressor would not start. The start delay timer kept counting in negative seconds instead of stopping at 0 and starting the compressor. This has now been rectified.
Configuration. There are two new menu lines in the picture MOTOR below the CONFIG menu, namely, MINIMUM frequency and MAXIMUM frequency. See the configuration section.
Multisab error in connection with direct capacity control: When disrupting the 4-20 mA
remote control signal for several UNISAB II compressors at the same time, not all of
the compressors will start when the signal returns. This has now been rectified. The
error might also occur in EPROM version 1.13 and earlier.
In the Instruction Manual of version 2.02 and in later manuals, there are charts of UNISAB II Settings and UNISAB II diagnosis in the back of this book. These used to be
in the Starting-up Manual.
All new menus and parameters of this version are primarily shown in English only,
even if a language other than English has been chosen. However, the following five
languages are fully translated: Danish, Swedish, Dutch, French and Italian. The remaining languages will be updated in later versions as they are being translated.
Screw compressors
When regulating the discharge pressure, the regulator would be out of order and thus
capacity could either be 0% or 100% but could not settle at medium capacity. This has
now been rectified.
Timer values concerning the prelubrication function for screw compressors was not initialized correctly after factory reset - only if followed by a power reset. This has now
been rectified.
204/222
0178-445 - ENG
Rev. 03.09
UNISAB II 2.03
Version
Description
There was an error in the regulator, which would only occur when a limiter was in passive
mode and when, at the same time, more capacity was required. This error caused the capacity to decrease very slowly as long as the limiter was in passive mode. This has now
been rectified.
The following compressor type has been added: SAB110SR/LR.
The PID-regulator function has been thoroughly explained in this version of the manual and
it contains practical examples of general usage of this function.
Known errors of this version:
General remarks
Multisab. Sequential control of several rotatune compressors in the same system as conventional compressors (rotatune master/slave operation) has not yet been implemented. It
is expected to be implemented in version 2.02.2.
0178_440_en.fm
The following concerns compressors which control frequency on the frequency converter
by means of a 4-20 mA output signal from the UNISAB II and only in MANUAL OPERATION MODE:
In MANUAL MODE, the compressor capacity will be regulated back to the capacity it had
before the limiter went into active MODE, as soon as the limiter is no longer in function.
Therefore, if capacity is manually regulated up to e.g. 80% and the limiter is activated and
forces capacity down to e.g. 30%, capacity will then automatically be regulated back to 80%
as soon as the limiter is no longer in function. This regulation takes place without activating
the capacity keys.
UNISAB II Evolution: When changing baudrate for port 1 (when using Evolution PLC), a
factory reset must be carried out or UNISAB II must be turned off and on. If this is not carried out, the new communication speed will not be initialized and communication to the PLC
cannot be effected.
Screw compressors
SAB110SR/LR. During operation for a long period of time in remote or auto control, it might
be quite some time before capacity is decreased even though the regulator requires less
capacity.
Motor frequency control in connection with two-stage reciprocating compressors has not
yet been fully implemented.
0178-445 - ENG
Rev. 03.09
205/222
UNISAB II 2.03
Version
Description
2.02.2
General remarks
Multisab sequence with several rotatune compressors running in the same system is now
implemented but has not yet been tested. It is expected to be released in the next version.
UNISAB II evolution; when changing communication speed on port 1 for use with Evolution
PLC, the new speed is now initialised automatically.
Superuser password has been changed.
Textual errors have been corrected in the Swedish instruction manual.
When installing eprom version 2.02.2 instead of an earlier version and at the same time
maintaining battery voltage on UNISAB II, the contrast now initialises at a value between
20 and 80 when pressing the R key. Afterwards, the contrast can be adjusted by simultaneously activating the Reset key and the arrow up or arrow down key.
Screw compressors
Screw compressor SAB110SR/LR. When operating at 100% capacity for a long period of
time in either remote or auto control, the length of period until capacity was reduced was
disproportionately long even though the regulator had required less capacity. This has now
been rectified.
Due to an error in the outer PID-regulator, a screw compressor about to stop would keep
running at minimum capacity because the delay before stop timer was reset and started
recounting before the compressor stopped. The problem only appeared when e.g. the suction pressure value passed the limit between NZ and the lower P-band. This problem applies to all regulating modes. Furthermore, the compressor would run up capacity a little
every time this limit was passed. This has now been rectified.
Known errors
When using the copy eeprom function, all timer values are reset at default values.
206/222
0178-445 - ENG
Rev. 03.09
UNISAB II 2.03
Version
Description
2.03.1
General remarks
Mode of operation has been changed for timer no. 32 "Low suction pressure". Now the
alarm for low suction pressure can be suppressed for up to 60 seconds during both startup and operation.
Rotatune multisab function; the taking over function has been corrected. Now a master
compressor includes subsequent stopped rotatune compressors (slaves) in the taking over
calculation when attempting to take over a subsequent screw compressor. Earlier, it only
included its own 60% free capacity in the taking over calculation. See Rota appendix.
A false warning for low suction pressure when the compressor is in stopped control mode
has been corrected. Before, the warning disappeared when control mode was changed
from stopped but it generated false warnings which communicated with the UNISAB network either via the Sabcom II driver or the Comsab II module. The warning typically appeared when the suction pressure lay between the low alarm default value and the low
warning default value.
Rotatune multisab. An error regarding several systems in the same network has been corrected. When a rotatune compressor was operating with several systems in the network
(e.g. low and high pressure systems) the multisab system would fail. A slave which was
starting up would immediately stop after only a few seconds.
0178_440_en.fm
Rotatune multisab. When a master compressor was stopped due to an alarm, the slave did
not automatically adopt the role of master regulator. This has now been rectified.
Screw compressors
Timer no. 7 "Prelubrication" has been changed for screw compressors of the SABxxxHR
type. Prelubrication has been changed from a default value of 10 seconds to 0 seconds.
The compressor will still be prelubricated but the compressor motor must start up immediately when the signal of the oil flow switch is present.
An error has been corrected in rotatune multisab between two rota screw compressors.
When two rotatune compressors were running in parallel, the master ran with a fixed capacity of e.g. 60% and the slave hunted up and down with a variation of 5-10% around the
the masters 60%=50-70% when it should be running with the same capacity as the master.
To compensate for this, the default values for the internal regulator on the UNISAB II on the
slave compressor must be changed. P-band should be changed from 200 to 400%, T.int.
from 30 to 90 seconds and minimum pulse should be changed to 0.3 seconds.
Reciprocating compressor Mk4. A new timer no. 11 is introduced, "Filter diff. High". On Mk4
reciprocating compressors, the oil filter differential pressure is monitored by an electrical
switch. Digital input 9 is usually open. If the differential pressure exceeds the set value, the
switch gives an input signal. If this signal is active for more than 300 seconds, the warning
"high oil differential pressure" is given. There is no operating limiting function in this warning. See wiring diagrams for installation of this switch.
The auxiliary output function has been corrected. When using the auxiliary output function
for maximum and minimum capacity respectively, this did not function correctly for rotatune
machines in earlier eprom versions.
Rotatune reciprocating compressors. An error has been corrected in the outer regulator.
The neutral zone value was doubled so that it applied both above and below the set point.
Now, the neutral zone is divided in equal parts above and below the set point. See also the
section about regulation in this manual.
0178-445 - ENG
Rev. 03.09
207/222
UNISAB II 2.03
Version
Description
Known errors
When using the "copy eeprom" function, all timer values are reset at default values.
When using the 4-20 mA analog output function from UNISAB II to a frequency
converter to control the speed of the compressor motor the following problem is
found:
When running in auto or remote control mode, it is still possible to change the
speed of the compressor motor with the operating keys capacity up or capacity
down. This should only be possible in manual control mode.
208/222
0178-445 - ENG
Rev. 03.09
UNISAB II 2.03
16. Spare parts for UNISAB II
0178_441_en.fm
Item
Part number
Normal spare parts set
3084-394
Set of accessories - UNISAB II
1572-018
EPROM tongs
1613-002
EEPROM tongs
1613-003
EEPROM (2kB-serial) - To be used in version Eprom 1.10 and earlier versions.
1571-015
EEPROM (4kB-serial) - To be used in version Eprom 1.12 and later versions.
1571-018
Certificate set
3084-383
Normal spare parts set
3084-394
Front cover with sheet and display, YORK Refrigeration logo
1573-008
Front cover with sheet and display, Sabroe logo
1573-007
CPU print (rev. C)
1572-026
Relay print (rev. G)
1574-016
Pressure transducer dia.10 AKS32R-1-9 bar 1)
1373-249
Pressure transducer dia.10 AKS2050-1-25 bar
1373-271
Pressure transducer dia.10 AKS32R-1-59 bar 2)
1373-251
Pt100 sensor 4-conductor (1/2" thread) 3)
1373-245
1373-252
1373-264
Position transmitter 6)
3448-004
3448-___
3448-___
3448-___
Notes:
1) Not used for HPO/HPC compressors
2) Only used forHPO/HPC compressors
3) Units supplied before November 1995
4) Units supplied after 1 November 1995
5) Units supplied after 1 January 1997
6) Only for SAB 110, SAB 128H (not HR),
0178-445 - ENG
Rev. 03.09
SAB 163B, SAB 163H (not HR) and SAB

202 compressors.
7) Only for SAB 250 and SAB 330 compressors.
8) Only for SAB 80 compressors.
9) Only for SV 10/20 compressors (not Rotatune)
209/222
UNISAB II 2.03
210/222
0178-445 - ENG
Rev. 03.09
UNISAB II 2.03
17. Supplementary Material

"Quick Reference"Leaflet
Installing a data communications cable0171-745
Data sheet for Pt100 sensor - Temp./resistance

table0178-411
Data sheet for AKS 32R -(-1/+9 bar)0178-410
Capacity and Vi pos. transmitters0178-412
Data sheet for AKS 2050 - (-1/+25 bar)0178-414

Electrical Wiring Diagrams for:
Mounting of ground log and emergency stop
(page AC038_13)
2347-002
Screw compressors(page 1-4, 10-14,

16-22, 25-32, 35-36, 39-40)
3448-235
Voltage equalization (page AC040_10)

2347-002
Reciprocating compressors (page 1-40)

3448-236
0178_442_en.fm
0178-445 - ENG
Rev. 03.09
211/222
UNISAB II 2.03
212/222
0178-445 - ENG
Rev. 03.09
UNISAB II 2.03
Index
Additional unload
reciprocating compr. ........................................................................................ 39
Adjusting slide velocity .......................................................................................... 97
Alarm
alarm from Chiller ............................................................................................. 57
auxiliary input signal ......................................................................................... 55
capacity .......................................................................................................... 103
capacity error
screw compr. .............................................................................................. 55
Cooling fan error .............................................................................................. 56
Error in diagnosis- EEPROM ........................................................................... 57
Evolution
no communication to PLC .......................................................................... 58
full flow pump error
screw compr. .............................................................................................. 56
high motor temperature .................................................................................... 56
identification numbers Alarms-warnings .......................................................... 59
Limiting brine temperature ............................................................................... 57
Limiting discharge pressure ............................................................................. 57
Limiting discharge temperature ........................................................................ 57
Limiting hot water ............................................................................................. 57
Limiting suction pressure ................................................................................. 57
low lubricating pressure monitoring ................................................................. 58
motor error ....................................................................................................... 55
motor overload ...........................................................................................55, 56
no communication to Chiller ............................................................................. 57
no starting permission ...................................................................................... 55
oil pump error
SAB 80 ....................................................................................................... 56
screw compr. .............................................................................................. 56
oil rectifier error ................................................................................................ 57
oil system error
screw compr. .............................................................................................. 55
overload discharge pressure ............................................................................ 56
suction gas superheat ...................................................................................... 54
Vi-position error ................................................................................................ 57
Wrong starting number in sequence ................................................................ 57
Analog inputs
numbering ...................................................................................................... 145
Auto
Start ................................................................................................................. 34
stop .................................................................................................................. 34
0178-445 - ENG
213/222
0178-445IX.fm
Rev. 03.09
UNISAB II 2.03
Automatic setting of a new zero point

(SAB 202) ........................................................................................................99
Aux.
output .............................................................................................................119
214/222
Baud rate
port 1 ................................................................................................................41
port 2 ................................................................................................................42
selecting ...........................................................................................................39
Booster
menu description ..............................................................................................35
Brine
temperature ......................................................................................................33
Brine temperature
Calibration ......................................................................................................126
Cabinet
open the cabinet ..............................................................................................13
Calculated Vi position ..........................................................................................102
Calibration ...........................................................................................................125
Capacity
corrected capacity ............................................................................................98
Capacity measuring system
Long-Stroke Capacity-Rod
Calibration ................................................................................................130
Turning Transmitter
Calibration ................................................................................................128
Change to full load ...............................................................................................102
Change to part load .............................................................................................102
Checklist ..............................................................................................................173
Chiller
Circuit board with light diodes ..............................................................................147
Clima control
Climate control
description ........................................................................................................95
code plug ...............................................................................................................12
Cold store
funktion ..........................................................................................................120
Compressor
adjusting slide velocity .....................................................................................97
slide data ............................................................................................. 42, 43, 44
Configuration
menus ..............................................................................................................27
Control and surveillance ......................................................................................111
0178-445 - ENG
Rev. 03.09
UNISAB II 2.03
0178-445IX.fm
Aux. output ..................................................................................................... 119

Capacity down blocked .................................................................................. 120
Cold store function ......................................................................................... 120
COP setting .................................................................................................... 119
External start permission- immediate stop ..................................................... 117
External start permission- normal stop .......................................................... 118
FV 19 with oil pump ....................................................................................... 115
FV 24/26 with oil pump .................................................................................. 114
GSV/RWF with oil pump ................................................................................ 113
Motor current measuring ................................................................................ 118
motor power measuring ................................................................................. 119
Power management system .......................................................................... 120
Reciprocating compressors ........................................................................... 117
SAB 110/128/163 Mk 2 without oil pump ....................................................... 116
SAB 128/163 Mk 2 Booster with oil pump ...................................................... 116
SAB 163 Mk 1 with oil pump .......................................................................... 117
SAB 202/ 163 & 128H MK3 with oil pump ..................................................... 111
SAB 283/ 330 and 355 with oil pump ............................................................. 112
SAB 80 with fitted (mechanical) oil pump ...................................................... 113
SAB128/163 HR with oil pump ....................................................................... 111
Thermistor connection ................................................................................... 119
VMY Mk 2 and 2.5 with built-in oil pump ........................................................ 116
VMY Mk 3 without full flow pump ................................................................... 116
VMY Mk3 with full flow pump ......................................................................... 111
Control mode ......................................................................................................... 79
COP
active ................................................................................................................ 40
Diagnosis ....................................................................................................... 142
setting ............................................................................................................ 119
Danbuss
menu description .............................................................................................. 41
Data communication cable
installing the data communication cable ........................................................ 164
Define refrigerant R000 ....................................................................................... 122
Diagnosis
Analog inputs ................................................................................................. 140
COP ............................................................................................................... 142
Digital inputs .................................................................................................. 140
Digital outputs ................................................................................................ 140
Examine memory ........................................................................................... 141
Insp. old alarms .............................................................................................. 137
Misc. functions ............................................................................................... 139
New password ............................................................................................... 141
No. of alarms .................................................................................................. 141
pictures .......................................................................................................... 137
serial number ................................................................................................. 141
Software version ............................................................................................ 139
0178-445 - ENG
215/222
Rev. 03.09
UNISAB II 2.03
Zero capacity pos. ..........................................................................................142

Digital inputs
Diagnosis .......................................................................................................140
Digital inputs and outputs
Numbering .....................................................................................................143
Digital outputs
Diagnosis .......................................................................................................140
Discharge pressure
overload ...........................................................................................................56
Display
contrast ............................................................................................................25
description ........................................................................................................13
in Bar or C/R ...................................................................................................20
Display indications
various limiters ...............................................................................................109
216/222
Economizer
high suction pressure .......................................................................................35
low capacity .....................................................................................................35
Electrical slide control
SAB 250 and SAB 330 ...................................................................................101
Evolution
no communication to PLC ................................................................................58
warning from PLC ............................................................................................58
Examine memory
Diagnosis .......................................................................................................141
EXT.COOL
EXT.HEAT
External input
universal regulators ..........................................................................................91
Factory setting
restore setting ..................................................................................................41
Factory settings
return to ... ........................................................................................................25
Flow factor
Front panel
control/recording section ..................................................................................14
green lamp .......................................................................................................14
Red lamp ..........................................................................................................14
Yellow lamp ......................................................................................................14
0178-445 - ENG
Rev. 03.09
UNISAB II 2.03
Function
changing a function .......................................................................................... 24
Green ..................................................................................................................... 14
Grounding ............................................................................................................ 166
High difference pressure Limiter .......................................................................... 107

HP
on two stage ..................................................................................................... 36
HP on TWO-STAGE ............................................................................................ 121
Calibration ...................................................................................................... 127
Input signal
Auxiliary input signal
screw compressors .................................................................................... 49
auxiliary input signal
HPO-HPC ................................................................................................... 52
recip.compr. ................................................................................................ 51
Languages
list of languages ............................................................................................... 26
Limiting functions
Standard limiters ............................................................................................ 105
Liquid subcool
List of Versions .................................................................................................... 197
Loading sequence ............................................................................................... 180
Long-Stroke Capacity-Rod
Adjusting ........................................................................................................ 131
Manual setting of a new zero point ........................................................................ 99

Manual zero ........................................................................................................... 40
Mecanical zero ...................................................................................................... 40
Menu Tree
One-stage Reciprocating Compressor ............................................................. 17
Screw Compressor .......................................................................................... 16
Two-stage reciprocating compressor ............................................................... 18
Motor
alarm for cooling fan error ................................................................................ 56
alarm for high motor temperature .................................................................... 56
alarm motor overload ....................................................................................... 55
current
calibration ................................................................................................. 127
0178-445 - ENG
217/222
0178-445IX.fm
Rev. 03.09
UNISAB II 2.03
limiter ........................................................................................................106
measuring .................................................................................................118
range ..........................................................................................................38
motor error alarm .............................................................................................55
motor overload alarm .......................................................................................56
power measuring ...........................................................................................119
signal ................................................................................................................42
size ...................................................................................................................41
Multisab
compressor. no. 1 to 14 ...................................................................................35
description ........................................................................................................74
parallel control ..................................................................................................77
preferred master ..............................................................................................35
regulating Setup .............................................................................................169
regulation .......................................................................................................167
special timers
recip.compr. ................................................................................................73
state .................................................................................................................75
system setup ..................................................................................................168
take over ..........................................................................................................41
218/222
New password
Diagnosis .......................................................................................................141
No. of alarms
Diagnosis .......................................................................................................141
Node no
port 1 ................................................................................................................41
port 2 ................................................................................................................42
Oil cooling
selecting ...........................................................................................................38
setting ..............................................................................................................37
Oil heating ...........................................................................................................122
Oil pump
full flow
screw compr. ..............................................................................................34
Oil rectifier
selecting ...........................................................................................................40
Oil return
reciprocating compressors .............................................................................121
Operating sequence ............................................................................................183
Part load and Full load .........................................................................................101

Password
Applying the password .....................................................................................22
Changing the password ...................................................................................22
0178-445 - ENG
Rev. 03.09
UNISAB II 2.03
0178-445IX.fm
description ........................................................................................................ 22
Resetting the password ................................................................................... 23
P-band
factor ................................................................................................................ 71
start delay ........................................................................................................ 71
stop delay ......................................................................................................... 71
PBF ........................................................................................................................ 72
PID
controller .......................................................................................................... 81
Port 1
Port 2
Position indications .............................................................................................. 102
Pref. master = START
Starting- and system numbers ....................................................................... 178
Prelubrication
Press
Pressure
measured/calculated pressure levels
recip.compressors ...................................................................................... 50
screw compr. .............................................................................................. 48
measured/calculated pressures/temperatures
HPO-HPC ................................................................................................... 51
Pressure transducers
Calibration ...................................................................................................... 125
Printed circuit board, light diodes ........................................................................ 146
Regulators ............................................................................................................. 79
Replacing
CPU print and EEPROM ................................................................................ 160
the battery ...................................................................................................... 163
the CPU print ................................................................................................. 159
the door .......................................................................................................... 159
the EPROM (program) UNISAB II .................................................................. 161
the relay print ................................................................................................. 160
the serial EEPROM (diagnosis) ..................................................................... 162
Rotatune
menu description ........................................................................................42, 43
Sequence
The plant does not run in sequence ............................................................... 194
Serial number
Diagnosis ....................................................................................................... 141
Service ................................................................................................................. 159
0178-445 - ENG
219/222
Rev. 03.09
UNISAB II 2.03
Set points
control with current input ..................................................................................91
on regulators ....................................................................................................90
Settings
regulating parameters
reciprocating compressors .........................................................................86
SAB 330 .....................................................................................................90
screw compressors .....................................................................................88
Short-Stroke Capacity-Rod
Adjusting ........................................................................................................132
Slide brake control ...............................................................................................102
Spacer block
built-in space block ........................................................................................100
Spare parts for UNISAB II ...................................................................................209
Special Limiters ...................................................................................................107
State of take-over ................................................................................................189
State of transfer ...................................................................................................188
Suction Pressure
Superuser keyword
Diagnosis .......................................................................................................141
Swept volumen
System numbers ..................................................................................................177
220/222
Temperature
measured and calculated temperatures
measured/calculated pressures/temperatures
HPO-HPC ...................................................................................................51
Timer description
reciprocating compressors ...............................................................................69
screw compressors ..........................................................................................66
Timers
menu ................................................................................................................61
reciprocating compressor values .....................................................................65
screw compressor values ................................................................................63
Trouble shooting ..................................................................................................137
Trouble-shooting
The plant cannot start ....................................................................................194
Trouble-shooting diagrams
General trouble-shooting, UNISAB II .............................................................156
Start compressor
in AUTO, continued ..........................................................................153, 154
in MANUAL, continued .............................................................................150
Start of compressor
0178-445 - ENG
Rev. 03.09
UNISAB II 2.03
in AUTO mode .......................................................................................... 152

in MANUAL mode ..................................................................................... 149
Start Screw comp,
Prelub. in MANUAL, continued ................................................................. 151
Start Screw comp.
Prelub. in AUTO mode, continued ............................................................ 155
Universal regulator
ext.input ........................................................................................................... 91
Unloading sequence ....................................................................................182, 185
Value
changing a value .............................................................................................. 23
Variable Zero position ............................................................................................ 98
Vi
mode ................................................................................................................ 41
Volume ratio
auto .................................................................................................................. 34
Volume ratio slide .................................................................................................. 97
Warning
Evolution
warning from PLC ....................................................................................... 58
identification numbers alarms / warnings ......................................................... 59
watch the oil pressure ...................................................................................... 57
Water
cooling
recip. compr. ............................................................................................... 36
Yellow .................................................................................................................... 14
Zero capacity pos.

Diagnosis ....................................................................................................... 142
Zero point
automatic setting .............................................................................................. 99
configuration .................................................................................................. 100
manual setting of a new zero point .................................................................. 99
Zero pos.
menu .............................................................................................................. 101
0178-445 - ENG
221/222
0178-445IX.fm
Rev. 03.09
UNISAB II 2.03
222/222
0178-445 - ENG
Rev. 03.09
2.02-020911 IVH
Date: ____________
Init: ______
Settings for UNISAB II 2.03

Customer:
ROC No.:
Enduser:
Order No.:
Plant Type:
Compressor Shop No.:
Compressor Type:
Local Compr. No. :
Software version/date
0179-005-EN
2.02-020911 IVH

Setup>Configuration
>Control
No
Function
01
>Economizer
Setting
No
Function
Control On
01
02
Auto Start
02
03
Auto Stop
04
Cold Store
05
Climate Control
>COP
Setting
No
Function
Eco Low Cap.
01
Eco High Suction
No
Function
COP Active
01
Press./Temp.
02
Flow Factor
02
Press
03
Liq. Sub-cooling
03
Motor Signal
04
Motor Input
05
Cap/Freq
Setting
>Communication
No
Function
Setting
01
Range Motor Current
No
Function
02
Range Motor Power
01
Danbuss
No
Function
03
Motor size kW
02
Compressor No.
01
Refrigerant
02
Chiller
No
Function
01
Compressor Type
04
Rotatune
03
Baud Rate
02
Swept Volume
05
min freq
04
Port 1
03
Booster
06
max freq
05
Node No
04
Volume Ratio
06
Baud Rate
05
Economizer
No
Function
07
Port 2
06
Mech. Zero
01
Pref. Master
08
Node No
07
Manual Zero
02
Common Evap/Cond
09
Baud Rate
08
Vi Mode %
03
HP on Two Stage
10
Profibus
09
Add. Unload
04
Take Over
11
Node No
12
Baud Rate
>Multisab
>Oil system
Function
01
Pre-lubrication
02
Full Flow Pump
03
Oil Cooling
04
Water Cooled
05
Oil Rectifier
0179-005-EN
Setting
>Motor
>Compressor
No
>Measuring unit
Setting
>Unit Plant
Setting
>Factory reset
01
Setting
Setting
Factory Reset
Setting
2.02-020911 IVH

Alarm-/Warning Limits & Regulator
Settings
(1)
High
Alarm
High
Low
Warning Warning
Low
Alarm
Set pt. Set pt.

No. 1 No. 2
NZ
PB
T.
INTE
T.
DIFF
MIN
PULS
RUN
TIME
Suction>Suction pressure [C/R]

Suction>Suction superheat
Discharge>Disch. superheat
Oil>Oil pressure
Oil>Diff. pressure
(*S)
Oil>Oil temperature
Motor>Motor current
Motor>Motor Power
Setup>Capacity>Capacity
(*S)
Setup>Capacity>Vi Position
(*S)
Intermediate>Interm. temperature
(*R)
///////////
All the empty/not used squares
must always be filled out.
The availability of the areas framed
is dependent upon the configuration of the UNISAB II.
Setup>Control
(1+2)
Compressor Control
Setup>Multisab>Multisab state
(2)
Start No. System No. Sys. Controller
Setup>Diagnose>
Software version / date
Setup>Language
Contrast
(2)
Language
>Setup>Diagnose
>Misc. functions
Brake Delay
0179-005-EN
2.02-020911 IVH

Setup>Calibrate>
Press Transducer
Setup>Calibrate>
Brine Temp.
Suction Adjust
Brine Adjust
(2)
Setup>Calibrate>
Cap. Pos
Setup>Calibrate>
Motor Freq
Cap. Pos
Motor Freq
Discharge Adjust
Cap. Zero Ad
Frq. Zero Adj
Oil Adjust
Cap. 100 Adj
Freq. 100 Adj
Diff. Adjust
Imed. Adjust
Setup>Calibrate>
Vi position
Setup>Calibrate>
4-20mA Input
Setup>Calibrate>
Aux. Output
Setup>Calibrate>
Cap. Limits
Vi Position
4mA
Activate When
Signal Low
Vi. Zero Adj
20mA
Signal High
Vi. 100 Adj
Used at
Limit High
Setup>Timers>Timers Setup
No
Function
01
Setting
No
Function
Start-Start Delay
07
Prelubrication
Delay Down
02
Stop-Start Delay
08
Transfer max
03
Start Delay
04
(1)
No
Function
25
Oil Rect. Start
26
Oil Rect. Delay
09-20 NOT ADJUSTABLE
27
Oil Rect. Disable
Stop Delay
21
Motor Start
28
Start HP
05
Suction Ramp
22
PMS Feedback
29
NOT ADJUSTABLE
06
Slide Max
Delay Up
30
31
32
33
Cap. Negative
(*S)
Start Unload
(*S)
Low suct. press
NOT ADJUSTABLE
(*S)
(*R)
23
24
0179-005-EN
F.F. Pump Start

Oil Cool On
Oil Pump Start
Oil Return
Setting
(*S)
(*R)
(*S)
(*R)
(*S)
(*R)
(1)
Setting
2.02-020911 IVH

Setup>Timers>
Service
(2)
Setup>Timers>
P Band Factor
(1)
Setup>Timers>
Transfer
(1)
Setup>Timers>
Take Over
On Time
Delay Up
(*R)
Factor Down
(*R)
Factor Up
(*R)
(Service Hours)
Delay Down
(*R)
Zone
(*R)
Factor Start
(*R)
Zone
(*R)
Start Delay
(1)
Stop Delay
Notes:
*(S) = Screw, *(R) = Reciprocating

(1) The value(s) will be changed to factory settings by a Factor Reset.
(2) The value(s) are not stored in the EEPROM and will therefore be changed to initial settings after a Copy EEPROM messages on the display.
The hour counter Setup>Timers>Service>On Time will be reset to zero.
0179-005-EN
Date:
Init.:
96.09
Diagnosis for UNISAB II

Customer:
Ordre no.:
Compressor shop no.:
Compr. type:
Diagnosis > Inspect old alarms
Alarm text (type of alarm)

Date and time of alarm
Rev. 0
Diagnosis > Inspect old alarms > Ctrl state
Unit
Compressor Control
Text
Compressor State
Text
Start no
0-14
System no
1-14
Multisab state
Text
On time
Hour
Since start
Sec/Hour
Diagnosis > Inspect old alarms >

Measure values
1661-215-EN
Current operating conditions
Current
operating
conditions
Unit
Diagnosis > Inspect old

alarms >
No
Suction temp.
Suction press.
C/R
Suction superheat
Disch. temp
Disch. press.
C/R
Disch. superheat
Brine temp.
Oil temp.
Oil press.
BAR
Diff. press. (S)
BAR
10
Intermediate press. (R)
C/R
11
Intermediate temp. (R)
12
Vi position (S)
13
Capacity position
14
Ext. input
15
Motor current
Amp
16
17
18
Notes:
* (S) = Screw, (R) = Reciprocating
1661-215-EN
Rev. 0
Input
Output
Diagnosis>
Digital
Input
Digital
Output

Unisab II 0178 445 ENG Logo 1

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Unisab II 0178 445 ENG Logo 1

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

UNISAB II 2.

This document is produced by:

This document must not be copied without the

Be aware of the version number of this manual.

0-55 C (during operation)

20-90% relative humidity (not condensing)

Description of UNISAB II control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Alarms and Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Capacity error (screw compressors) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Compressor control and surveillance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SV 24/26 with oil pump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4) Diagnosis I Digital inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Trouble shooting diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Start and system numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Regulating parameters (for SUCTION PRESSURE regulator) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Spare parts for UNISAB II . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1. Description of UNISAB II control

1. Description of UNISAB II control

UNISAB II contains different ways of controlling/regulating compressor capacity according to

UNISAB II can be configured to run as a

By inserting an optional communication

1. Description of UNISAB II control

UNISAB II front panel

Operating UNISAB II control

Drawing of plugs and their positions

only necessary to add the correct supply voltage

that no outside voltage must be applied to the

that the code plug for the supply voltage must

Also check that the 3 Amp fuse is in good working

1. Description of UNISAB II control

Drawing of fuses and their positions

points is carried out via the display. The display

By turning the screws half a turn the control panel

Opening the cabinet

Before any voltage is applied to UNISAB II, the

emergency stop switch will be activated.

In this way it is still easy to operate the control

UNISAB II has been programmed with values for

Has a constant background illumination and displays 4 lines each with 20

1. Description of UNISAB II control

is not possible to change to automatic. See section Control Mode.

The UNISAB II front panel is divided into two sections:

D Key used to acknowledge alarms.

E Loading of capacity during manual

Green lamp indicating whether the

Yellow lamp indicating whether the

When pressing the G key, a change

Red lamp indicating warning or

Changing the set values can only be

A Compressor start at manual

The G key has several functions.

manual for the UNISAB II in question.

H Used for moving left in the menu

I Used for moving right in the menu

1. Description of UNISAB II control

K Used for moving downwards in a

1. Description of UNISAB II control

1. Description of UNISAB II control

UNISAB II - Ver. 2.02/2.03

1. Description of UNISAB II control

UNISAB II Ver. 2.02/2.03

1. Description of UNISAB II control

In the menu tree the selection of pictures is carried